international logistics questions
http://www.fiatadiploma.org/ProjectSelf/FiataDiplomainChina.asp#orgnizer
international federation of forwarding agents’ associations 国际货运行协会联合会
Logeam of Nanjing University of Finance & Economics
2007.9.18
录入与编撰人员:
Chapter 4:时杰 梁华 刘秋燕
Chapter 6、8:曾海金 刘静 戴振华 强正军
Chapter 9:陈靖 方瑞峰 刘尧琦 汪海洋 薛培浩 钟永让
Chapter 12:陈旭 韩一阳 张浩威 赵捷喑
Chapter 13:崔媛媛 方昉 陈彤华 贾琴 吴梓源
Chapter 14:钱莉莉 李佳 韩善涛 江伟 金鑫 沈斌 苏真斌
Logeam协助:李小艳 颜天宝 叶平 刘晓明
总体指导:吴志华
content
17 Chapter 4
17 Outline
18 Key Terms:
20 4-2 Understanding Incoterms
25 4-4b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under EXW
28 4-5b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under FCA
28 4-6 Free Alongside Ship (FAS)
29 4-6b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under FAS
30 4-7 Free on Board (FOB) Port of Departure
31 4-7b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under FOB
34 4-8b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under CFR
34 4-9 Cost, Insurance, and Freight (CIF)
37 4-9b Export’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under CIF
38 4-10b Exporter’s and Importers’ Responsibilities under CPT
39 4-11 Carriage and Insurance Paid To(CIP)
40 4-11b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under CIP
40 4-12 Delivered Ex-Ship(DES)
42 4-12b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DES
42 4-13 Delivered Ex-Quay(DEQ)
43 4-13b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DEQ
43 4-14 Dlivered at Frontier(DAF)
44 4-14b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DAF
45 4-15 Dlivered Duty Unpaid(DDU)
46 4-15b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DDU
47 4-16 Delivered Duty Paid (DDP)
48 4-16b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DDP
49 4-17 Electronic Data Interchange
51 Endnotes
53 Chapter 5
53 Outline
54 Key Terms
58 5-2 Alternative Terms of Payment
67 5-5b Process
69 5-5c Additional Information
74 5-5d Stand-By Letters of Credit
75 5-5f URR 525
79 5-6g Banker's Acceptance and Aval
80 5-6h URC 522
82 5-7 Purchasing Cards--Procurement Cards
84 5-9b Guarantee Payable on First Demand (at First Request)
85 5-9c Guarantees Based Upon Documents-Cautions
85 5-9d Stand-By Letters of Credit
85 5-9e Types of Bank Guarantees
87 Endnotes
90 Chapter 6
90 Outline
91 Key Terms
92 6-1 Sales Contracts" Currency of Quote
95 6-1c Third Country's Currency
96 6-1d The Special Status of the Euro
96 6-2 The System of Currency Exchange Rates
97 6-2a Types of Exchange Rates
105 6-3 Theories of Exchange Rate Determinations
107 6-3a Purchasing Power Parity
109 6-3c International Fisher Effect
111 6-3e Forward Rate as Unbiased Predictor of Spot Rate
112 6-3f Entire Predictive Model
112 6-4 Exchange Rate Forecasting
113 6-4a Technical Forecasting
114 6-4b Fundamental Forecasting
114 6-4c Market-Based Forecasting
115 6-5 Managing Transaction Exposure
116 6-5b Forward Market Hedges
119 6-5d Options Market Hedges
120 6-6 International Banking Institutions
121 6-6a Central National Banks
121 6-6b International Monetary Fund
122 6-6c Bank for International Settlements
122 6-6d International Bank for Reconstruction and Development--World Bank
122 6-6e Ex-lm Bank
123 6-6f Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial
123 End – of – Chapter Questions
124 Endnotes
127 Chapter 8
127 Outline
128 Key Terms:
129 8-1 Introduction
133 8-3d Jettison
134 8-3e Fire
135 8-3f Sinking
135 8-3g Stranding
139 8-3i Theft
140 8-3j Piracy
140 8-3k Other Risks
144 8-4 Perils Associated with Air Shipments
150 8-7 Marine Insurance Policies
151 8-7a Marine Cargo Insurance
153 8-7c Protection and Indemnity
155 8-8a Institute Marine Cargo Clauses---Coverage A
156 8-8c Institute Marine Cargo Clauses--Coverage B
157 8-8d Institute Marine Cargo Clauses---Coverage C
158 8-8e With Average Coverage
159 8-8f Free of Particular Average Coverage
161 8-8h War and Seizure Coverage
161 8-8i Warehouse-to-Warehouse Coverage
162 8-8j Difference in Conditions
162 8-8k Other Clauses of a Marine Insurance Policy
163 8-9 Elements of an Airfreight Policy
164 8-10 Lloyd's
164 8-10a Principles
167 8-11 Commercial Credit Insurance
169 8-11c Insurance Policies Available
171 End – of – Chapter Questions
172 Endnotes
178 Chapter 9
178 Outline
178 KEY Terms
186 9-3b Roll-On/Roll-Off Ships
190 9-4 Flag
198 9-7 Non-Vessel-Operating Common Carriers
199 End – of – Chapter Questions
199 Endnotes
203 Chapter12
203 Outline
203 Key terms
207 12-3 Ocean Cargo
207 12-3a Full-Container-Load Cargo
210 12-3b less-than-container-load(LCL) cargo
214 12-3d Markings
215 12-4a Containers
216 12-4c Markings
217 12-5 Road and Rail Transport
217 12-6 Security
223 12-9 Domestics Packaging Issues
226 Endnotes
229 Chapter13
229 Outline
229 Key Terms
230 13-2 Duty
235 13-2b Valuation
239 13-2d Tariffs
243 13-2e Dumping
247 13-3a Quotas
249 13-3b Adherence to National Standards
251 13-3c Other Non-Tariff Barriers
252 13-3d Pre –Shipment Inspections
254 13-4 Customs Clearing Process
260 13-4e Required Documentation
267 Endnotes
273 Chapter14
273 Outline
274 14-1 Definitions
278 14-2b Canals and Waterways Infrastructure
281 14-2c Airport Infrastructure
290 14-2f Warehousing Infrastructure
291 14-3 Communication Infrastructure
293 14-3b Telecommunications Services
295 14-4 Utilities Infrastructure
298 Endnotes
Chapter 4
Terms of Trade or Incoterms
Outline
4-1 Introduction
4-2 Understanding Incoterms
4-3 Incoterm Strategy
4-4 Ex-Works (EXW)
4-4a Delivery under EXW
4-4b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under EXW
4-5 Free Carrier (FCA)
4-5a Delivery under FCA
4-5b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under FCA
4-6 Free Alongside Ship (FAS)
4-6a Delivery under FAS
4-6b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under FAS
4-7 Free on board (FOB) Port of Departure
4-7a Delivery under FOB
4-7b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under FOB
4-8 Cost and Freight (CFR)
4-8a Delivery under CFR
4-8b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under CFR
4-9 Cost, Insurance, and Freight (CIF)
4-9a Delivery under CIF
4-9b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under CIF
4-10 Carriage Paid To (CPT)
4-10a Delivery under CPT
4-10b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under CPT
4-11 Carriage and Insurance Paid To (CIP)
4-11a Delivery under CIP
4-11b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under CIP
4-12 Delivered Ex-Ship (DES)
4-12a Delivery under DES
4-12b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under DES
4-13 Delivered Ex-Quay (DEQ)
4-13a Delivery under DEQ
4-13b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under DEQ
4-14 Delivered at Frontier (D AF)
4-14a Delivery under DAF
4-14b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under DAF
4-15 Delivered Duty Unpaid (DDU)
4-15a Delivery under DDU
4-15b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under DDU
4-16 Delivered Duty Paid (DDP)
4-16a Delivery under DDP
4-16b Exporter’s and Importer’s
Responsibilities under DDP
4-17 Electronic Data Interchange
End-of-Chapter Questions
Endnotes
Key Terms:
Incoterm
ship’s rail
Stevedoring
variant
4-1 Introduction
Whenever an exporter to sells goods to a foreign company, whether through an intermediary such as an agent or a distributor, or directory to an importer, there are a large number of steps involved in getting the goods to the customer:
· clearing the goods for export
· organizing the transport of the goods between the exporter and the importer, often using several means of transportation
· clearing Customs the importing country
The Terms of Trade used in the contract of sale determines which of these steps the responsibilities of the substantial are, and specifically dividing all of these tasks between the exporter and the importer for each shipment would be a daunting task. In addition, it would be virtually impossible to anticipate everything that could go “wrong” during transit and determine at the time of the contract在契约的时候 which of the parties should be responsible for each incident.
Fortunately, a set of standardized Terms of Trade was created in 1936 by the International Chamber of Commerce: they have evolved into thirteen International Commerce Terms, from which the acronym Incoterms( is derived. These Incoterms were revised in 1953,1967,1976,1980, and most recently in 1990 and 2000, the latter revision bringing only moderate changes to a few terms. It is of significant benefit to both parties to use one of these Incoterms ,since ample information is available to add, after the three-letter acronym by which all Incoterms are known, “Incoterms 2000” to remove any doubt regarding the adoption of the specific meaning defined by the International Chamber of Commerce in its 2000 version of these terms. For example, a pro-forma invoice would read: “FCA Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA, Incoterms 2000” to indicate which would remain the responsibility of the importer. If a standard contract is used, the same clarification should be made especially since the 2000 Incoterms have only been in existence for a short time.
4-2 Understanding Incoterms
The Terms of Trade of Incoterm that the exporter and the importer agree to use in a given transaction defines several aspects of an international sale:
· Which tasks will be performed by the exporter
· Which tasks will be performed by the importer
· Which activities will be paid by the exporter
· Which activities will be paid by the importer
· When the transfer of responsibility will take place
This last point is complicated: it is conceptually difficult to make the distinction between (1) the transfer of responsibility between the exporter and the importer and (2) the transfer of title between the exporter and the importer. The transfer of responsibility (transfer of risk) is dictated by the choice of the Incoterms. The transfer of title (transfer of ownership) is usually done when the importer has either paid the exporter (and obtained the original bill of lading) accepted to sign a draft (see Chapter 5), or performed some other event specifically outlined in the contract of sale between both parties. The transfer of responsibility happens at the delivery of the goods, a point which is clearly outlined in each of the Incoterms, and in most cases, a point that occurs chronologically much earlier than the transfer of title.
The transfer of responsibility of the exporter never extends beyond the services for which that company has paid. There are several Incoterms, however, where the exporter is obligated to pre-pay a portion of the transportation costs, even though it is no longer responsible for the goods. Such is the case for the so-called C-terms, the ones whose acronyms start with the letter C.
4-3 Incoterm Strategy
The proper choice of an Incoterm is therefore contingent upon the strategy followed by the exporting firm, but is also somewhat constrained by the following parameters:
· The type of product sold: several industries (commodities in particular) prefer using some specific terms of trade rather than others
· The method of shipment: goods shipped by ocean or barge will be sold under different Incoterms than containerized goods using several transportation modes
· The ability of either of the parties to perform the tasks involves in the shipment
· The amount of trust placed by either of the parties toward the other
Nevertheless, the greatest criterion to be used is the willingness of both parties to perform and pay for some of the tasks involved in the shipment. In some cases, a strategic advantage can be gained by an exporter who is willing to facilitate the sale of its products by assisting the importer in the shipment. In others, a price advantage may be obtained by an importer who is willing to perform all or most of the tasks involved in the shipment. A company generally does not determine Which Incoterm to use on a case-by-case basis, but will determine which strategy it would like to pursue and determine which Term of Trade should be used regularly, given its product line, its customers’ expectations, and its trade volume.
Another issue to understand clearly in this decision is that, regardless of the Incoterm chosen, the importer is always paying for the transportation and other costs of shipping internationally. The fact that the exporter is pre-paying and arranging for certain aspects of the shipment is reflected in the invoice price; therefore, the importer ends up paying for it.
Nevertheless, the choice of Incoterm is almost always the exporter’s decision: it is difficult for an exporter to “adapt” its Incoterm strategy to accommodate the requirements of an importer, as it may require the exporter to be responsible for tasks that it has decided it would rather not perform. Should the importer feel that the exporter is not providing a service that is adequate, it can always “vote with its feet” and purchase from another source. However, should the importer want to perform more tasks than what the exporter prefers, it is certainly possible for the exporter to do less than what it expected, and use a different Incoterm on that transaction, one for which it is responsible for less.
Finally, the choice of the proper Incoterm is a critical decision for a firm, as it is an integral part of its export strategy and linked to the level of customer service it is aiming to provide. The thirteen Incoterms are reviewed in a progressive order of service provided by the exporter (see Table 4-1).
TABLE 4-1 Incoterms Summary
|
The responsibilities of the exporter are denoted with an “X”, those of the importer with an “1”. Whenever there is no obligation on either party, or whenever there is ambiguity as to whether the activity is responsibility of the exporter or the importer, the spot is left blank. Please refer back to the appropriate section for further details. |
|||||||||||||
|
Task |
EXW |
FCA |
FAS |
FOB |
CFR |
CIF |
CPT |
CIP |
DES |
DEQ |
DAF |
DDU |
DDP |
|
Export packing |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
|
Inland Freight |
1 |
|
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
|
Export Clearance |
1 |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
|
Arrange Carrier |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
|
Load onto Carrier |
1 |
1 |
1 |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
|
Pay Carrier |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
X |
|
Unload Carrier |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
1 |
X |
|
X |
X |
|
Pay Insurance |
|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
X |
|
|
|
|
|
Import Clearance |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
X |
X |
|
Pay Duty |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
X |
|
Pay Inland Freight |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
X |
X |
|
The possible alternative Incoterms for a given means of transportation are marked with an “X”. Those that would be improper or likely to likely to present problems are clearly marked as such. |
|||||||||||||
|
Mode of Transport |
EXW |
FCA |
FAS |
FOB |
CFR |
CIF |
CPT |
CIP |
DES |
DEQ |
DAF |
DDU |
DDP |
|
Break-Bulk Ocean Cargo |
X |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
X |
X |
|
Bulk Ocean Cargo |
X |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
X |
X |
|
Roll-On/Roll-Off |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
|
Multi-modal (FCL) |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
|
Multi-modal(LCL) |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
|
Rail |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
|
Road |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
|
Air |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
NO |
NO |
X |
X |
X |
4-4 Ex-Works (EXW)
The EXW Incoterm can be used for any merchandise and for any means of transportation. It should be used with the following syntax:
EXW Poughkeepsie, New York, USA, Incoterms 2000
where Poughkeepsie is the town in which the exporter will hold the merchandise available to the importer. It is usually located in the exporting country.
Ex-Works is the “easiest” of the Incoterms for the exporter, and the most difficult for the importer. In an Ex-Works transaction, the exporter only has the obligation to “place the goods at the disposal of the buyer” and “render every assistance (┄) in obtaining (┄) any export license or other official authorization necessary for the export of the goods.” In addition, the exporter has to package the goods for export, but the exporter does not even have to load the goods into the importer’s prearranged vehicle. It should be evident that this is not an advantageous Incoterm from the importer’s perspective: arranging to pick up goods in a foreign country is not easy, and neither are providing domestic transportation nor clearing goods for export in a foreign country.
In the case where the exporter and the importer agree that the expense and responsibility of loading the goods should fall on the exporter, it is possible to amend the Incoterm to include this condition, usually by what ICC refers to as variant of an Incoterm. This is usually accomplished by including “EXW loaded” to the pro-forma invoice. Since variants( of Incoterms are not defined by the International Chamber of Commerce, the correct syntax for such a modification should be:
EXW Poughkeepsie, New York, USA, Incoterms 2000, loaded
The choice of an EXW Incoterm should only be made when the exporter knows that the importer is extremely savvy; otherwise, there is a strong possibility that the quote will not be turned into a sale, as the exporter’s competitors are likely to offer better (more importer-friendly) Terms of Trade.
4-4a Delivery under EXW
There is nothing specified in this Incoterm regarding delivery. It occurs at the time that the importer (or the importer’s agent) picks up the goods at the exporter’s plant. This delivery has to take place at a mutually convenient time. The exporter has the obligation to notify the importer that the goods are available for pick-up and the importer has the obligation to notify the exporter of the time at which the goods will be picked up.
There is no specific transportation document corresponding to the delivery of the goods under this Incoterm, although, if a transportation company is picking up the goods, the exporter will generally be given a copy of the bill of lading or some form of receipt for the goods.
4-4b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under EXW
The exporter’s responsibilities are limited to the most basic functions; make the goods available to the buyer, package the goods for export shipment, assist in the export clearance procedures, and provide information to the importer so that the goods can clear Customs in the importing country or insured. That’s it.
In the United States, a change was recently made in the Shipper’s Export Declaration (SED) (see Chapter 7, specifically to record correctly who the exporter was in the case of a sale under an EXW Incoterm: until very recently, the exporter of record was the importer (or the importer’s freight forwarder). Under revised rules put in place on July 10,2000, the importer is no longer listed as the exporter of record, and the seller-exporter is listed as the “U.S. Census to record who was the exporter of specific merchandise under an EXW sale, rather than record the importer of the goods: the term “exporter” has been stricken from the SED.
Because of this requirement, the United States government has placed the responsibility of providing the correct Export Commodity Classification Number (ECCN) and any information that could affect an export license on the exporter in the case of an EXW transaction.
The importer is responsible for all aspects of the shipment in an EXW transaction; it has to clear the goods for exports, arrange for transportation, clear Customs in the importing country, purchase insurance, and provide domestic transportation in the importing country.
4-5 Free Carrier (FCA)
The FCA Incoterm can be used for any merchandise and for any means of transportation, but it was specifically created for goods shipped though multi-modal transportation (i.e., merchandise that is shipped though multiple means of transportation without being “handled” because it is containerized). This Incoterm can be used for shipments of either full-container loads (FCL) or less-than-container loads (LCL). FCA is expected to become one of the most popular Incoterms as the number of multi-modal shipments increases. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
FCA Castres, France, Incoterms 2000
where Castres is the city in which delivery takes place. It is usually located in the exporting country or in a neighboring country.
In an FCA transaction, the exporter delivers the goods to a carrier selected by the importer. Since FCA is a recent Incoterm-it was created in 1990-great care has been taken to define specifically what responsibilities are borne by the exporter, and which are borne by the importer. There are generally no variants to this Incoterm.
The FCA Incoterm replaced three other Incoterms, which were abandoned in 1990: Free on Rail (FOR), Free on Truck (FOT), and Free on Board-Airport (FOB-Airport).
4-5a Delivery under FCA
Under FCA, the delivery takes place when either of two conditions are met:
· If the named point in the Incoterm refers to the exporter’s plant, then delivery takes place when the goods are loaded, by the exporter and at its expense, onto the carrier’s truck.
· If the named point in the Incoterm refers to the carrier’s premises, then delivery takes place when the goods are made available to the carrier (i.e., when the goods have arrived at the carrier’s dock). The goods are unloaded from the exporter’s truck by the carrier and at the carrier’s expense (i.e., at the importer’s expense).
The document that corresponds clearly to the transfer of responsibility for an FCA shipment is the receipt given by the carrier to the exporter; it can be a bill of lading, a sea waybill, an air waybill, or a multi-modal bill of lading (see Chapter 7 for an explanation of each of these terms).
4-5b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under FCA
The exporter is still in charge of packing the merchandise for export. However, its responsibilities can increase to include loading the merchandise into a container provided by the carrier, loading the container on the carrier’s truck, or delivering the merchandise for export, and has to provide whatever information is needed by the importer to clear Customs in the importing country and to obtain insurance. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the “U.S. principal party in interest.” In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection (see Chapter 13), the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is responsible for arranging the contract of carriage (I.e., finding a carrier between the exporter’s town and the final destination) and communication to the exporter which carrier it is. The importer is also responsible for arranging for insurance and for clearing Customs in the importing country. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-6 Free Alongside Ship (FAS)
Although the FAS Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, it is specifically designed for ocean transportation, and is not meant for any other means of transportation or for merchandise that is not destined to be handed to an ocean shipping line at the port of departure. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
FAS Santos, Brazil, Incoterms 2000
Where Santos is the port in which the delivery takes place. This port is usually located in the exporting country or a neighboring country.
In a Free Alongside Ship transaction, the exporter is responsible to bring the goods to the port, “alongside” a ship designated by the importer, at which time the responsibility shifts to the importer. One major change was made in the 2000 version of the FAS Incoterm; the exporter is now responsible to clear the merchandise for export, leaving EXW as the only Incoterm for which the importer has to perform this task.
4-6a Delivery under FAS
The delivery officially takes place when the exporter has delivered the goods “alongside” a ship designated by the importer. The problem with this Incoterm is that ports rarely keep merchandise “alongside” a ship, or keep merchandise on a quay waiting for s ship. There is always delivery to a holding area, then cartage (transportation within the port area) from the holding area to the ship before the stevedoring( (loading onto the ship) takes place. When and where the delivery does take palace is sometimes difficult to determine.
Compounding this difficulty is the fact that there is no transport document that clearly corresponds to a delivery to a holding area or to the quay alongside the ship. The suggestion by the ICC that the exporter must obtain “a transport document (for example, a negotiable bill of lading, a non-negotiable sea waybill)” is contradicted by the fact that no ocean carrier will issue a bill of lading until the goods have been received in good condition on board the vessel. ICC further comments that the seller “may not always receive a receipt or a transport document from the carrier” and adds that the exporter must then “provide some other document to prove that the goods have been delivered” but does not suggest what it may be. A dock receipt from the port authorities may be sufficient; however, this lack of clear evidence of delivery should be a substantial deterrent to the use of the FAS Incoterm.
4-6b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under FAS
The exporter is responsible for packing the goods for export, transporting them to the port, and unloading them onto the quay or holding area in the port. With the advent of Incoterms 2000, another duty was added to the responsibilities of the exporter under an FAS transaction. The exporter is responsible for clearing the goods for export, providing whatever documents and assistance the importer may need to clear Customs in the importing country, and to obtain insurance. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the “U.S. principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is responsible for the shipment starting from the point of delivery. Therefore the importer is responsible for port handling charges, stevedoring (loading the goods in the vessel), and for ocean transportation costs as well as insurance, unloading in the port of arrival, and Customs duties in the importing country. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-7 Free on Board (FOB) Port of Departure
Although the FOB Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, it is specifically designed for ocean transportation, and is not meant for any other means of transportation or for merchandise that is not destined to then be handed to an ocean shipping line at the port of departure. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
FOB Cape Town, South Africa, Incoterms 2000
where Cape Town is the port in which the delivery takes place. This port is generally located in the exporting country or a neighboring country.
The Free On Board term, sometimes called Freight On Board , is one of the oldest maritime Terms of Trade. The exporter is responsible for the goods until they are placed on the ship. The importer is responsible for them after that.
Unfortunately, because FOB is such an old Term of Trade, its meaning is somewhat dependent on the practices of the port in which the goods are loaded. These differences matter specifically in the way the loading costs are billed: some ports have the tradition to include loading, stowing, and securing the goods in the hold of the ship as part of the stevedoring costs. Some other ports will customarily bill for these services as part of the ocean cargo costs. The shipping line contracted by the importer obviously would be able to communicate what the practice is at a given port of departure. However, these differences in practices have triggered the need for a variant to the FOB Incoterm to reflect which of the trade partners is responsible for handing costs on the ship; either “FOB stowed” or “FOB stowed, trimmed and secured” can be used to denote that the exporter is responsible for those specific costs. Here again, since the International Chamber of Commerce does not regulate Incoterm variants, the correct syntax should be:
FOB Cape Town, South Africa, Incoterms 2000, stowed
4-7a Delivery under FOB
In an FOB transaction, the point of delivery is extremely clear and has been governed by centuries of maritime tradition. The” FOB point,” the point at which the responsibility shifts from the exporter to the importer, is the Ship’s Rail.( Until the merchandise has cleared the ship’s rail, it is the responsibility of the exporter. After that, it is the responsibility of the importer. What happens if the merchandise falls and is damaged as it crosses the ship’s rail depends on whether it remains on the ship or falls back toward the quay.
The document associated with the FOB term is also quite clear: the proof of delivery is an ocean bill of lading or a sea waybill. Only after receiving the goods will the shipping line issue this document, giving a copy to the exporter.
4-7b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under FOB
The exporter is responsible for packaging the goods for export, shipping them to the port of departure, and loading them onto the ship. The exporter is responsible for clearing the goods for export, and has the obligation of providing whatever documents and assistance the importer may need to clear Customs in the importing country and to obtain insurance. In the United States, the export fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the “U.S principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is responsible for arranging and paying for ocean transportation from the port of departure to the goods’ destination, Customs’ clearance in the importing country, and eventually arranging and paying for insurance. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
Figure 4-1 Incoterms
|
EXW Ex-Works |
FCA Free Carrier |
FAS Free Alongside Ship |
FOB Free on Board |
|
ANY |
MULTI-MODAL |
OCEAN |
OCEAN |
|
The exporter only has the obligation to place the goods at the disposal of the buyer.
|
The exporter delivers the goods to a carrier selected by the importer.
|
The exporter is responsible for bringing the goods to the port, ”alongside” a ship designated by the importer, at which time the responsibility shifts to the importer.
|
The exporter is responsible for the goods until they are placed on the ship. The importer is responsible for then after that.
|
4-8 Cost and Freight(CFR)
Although the CFR Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, it is specifically designed for ocean transportation, and is not mean for any other means of transportation or for merchandise that is not destined to then be handed to an ocean shipping line at the port of departure. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
CFR Lagos, Nigeria, Incoterms 2000
where Lagos is the port of destination in which the importer takes physical control of the goods. This port usually located in the importing country or in a neighboring country. In a CFR transaction, the delivery (the transfer or responsibility or the transfer of risk)does not take place in the port of destination, but in the port of departure.
The Cost and Freight term is also one of the oldest maritime Terms of Trade, and it was known until the 1990 Incoterms as C&F or C+F, which is now obsolete. The exporter is responsible for the goods until they are placed on the ship and the importer for the them that, but the exporter pre-pays the ocean freight.
Unfortunately, because CFR is such an old Term of Trade, its meaning is somewhat dependent on the practices of the port in which the goods are unloaded. These differences matter specifically in the way the unloading costs are billed: some ports have the tradition to bill separately for the unloading of the goods as stevedoring costs. Some other ports will ask shipping lines to bill for these services as part of the ocean cargo costs. The shipping line contracted by the port of discharge. Nevertheless, in order to account for these differences in practices, variants to the CFR Incoterm were created to reflect which of the trade partners was responsible for unloading costs.” CFR landed” explicitly states that the costs of unloading are borne by the exporter, and “CFR undischarged” notes unloading costs are borne by the importer. In these cases, the correct syntax should be:
CFR Lagos, Nigeria, Incoterms 2000,landed
4-8a Delivery under CFR
In a CFR transaction, the point of delivery is the” FOB point,” the point at which the responsibility shifts from the exporter to the importer, the ship’s rail. Until the merchandise has cleared the ship’s rail, it is the responsibility of the exporter; after that, the responsibility shifts to the importer.
The document associated with the CFR term is also quite clear: the proof of delivery is an ocean bill of lading or lading or a sea waybill. Only after receiving the originals to the exporter.
4-8b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under CFR
The exporter is responsible to package the goods, ship them to the port of departure, load them onto a ship” of the type normally used for the transport of goods of the contract description,” and pre-paid for the shipment. Depending on the practices at the port of destination, this pre-paid contract of carriage may include the costs of unloading the goods. If it does not, then the importer has to pay for unloading the ship. The exporter is also responsible to clear the goods for export, assist the importer in providing the documentation necessary to clear Customs in the importing country, and obtain insurance. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the” U.S principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer takes responsibility for the goods at the delivery point (i.e., at the ship’s rail in the port of departure), even though the exporter is the one who contracts for the ocean shipping of the goods. Depending on the practice at the port of destination, and the possible Incoterm variant used, the importer may also have to pay for the unloading costs. It is also responsible for clearing Customs in the importing country and for inland transportation after that. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-9 Cost, Insurance, and Freight (CIF)
Although the CIF Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, it is specifically designed for ocean transportation, and is not meant for any other means of transportation or for merchandise that is not destined to then be handed to an ocean shipping line at the port of departure. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
CIF Kobe, Japan, Incoterms 2000
where Kobe is the port of destination in the importing country in which the importer takes control of the goods. In a Cost, Insurance, and Freight transaction, the delivery does not take place in the port of destination, but in the port of departure.
The CIF Incoterm is quite similar to the CFR term, with the exception that the exporter has the additional responsibility to pre-pay for Marine Cargo Insurance until the port of destination. Unfortunately, the mandate of the International Chamber of Commerce is for “minimum cover,” that is, the so-called Coverage C of the Institute Cargo Clauses (see Chapter 8), resulting in yet another Incoterm variant. CIF maximum cover—mandating Coverage A of the Institute Cargo Clauses—exists in addition to the predictable CIF undischarged and CIF landed, which are mirrors of their CFR equivalents. The syntax again must accommodate the fact that that Incoterm variants are not regulated by the International Chamber of Commerce and should read:
CIF Kobe, Japan, Incoterms 2000, maximum cover, landed
Finally, under the CIF Incoterm, the amount insure must be at least 110 percent of the value of the goods, a custom that dates back to 1906,when Great Britain instituted the Marine Insurance Act.
One aspect of CIF is also unusual: certain countries(see Table 4-2) do not allow their importers to purchase insurance abroad, and therefore prevent any import on a CIF basis. This restriction is in place to conserve foreign currency—it obligates importers to purchase insurance locally in local currency—and to subsidize the national insurance industry; all of the countries practicing this restriction are quite small traders.
4-9a Delivery under CIF
In a CIF transaction, the point of delivery is the ”FOB point,” the point at which the responsibility shifts from the exporter to the importer, the ship’s rail. Until the merchandise has cleared the ship’s rail, it is the responsibility of the exporter; after that, the responsibility shifts to the importer.
The document associated with the CIF term is also quite clear: the proof of delivery is an ocean bill of lading or a sea waybill. Only after receiving the goods will the shipping line issue this document, giving one of the original to the exporter.
TABLE4-2 Countries’ Restriction on Incoterms
|
The following countries place restrictions on the Incoterms that can be used by their exporters or importers: these restrictions are current as of October 2000: |
|||||||||||
|
Country |
A |
B |
C |
Country |
A |
B |
C |
Country |
A |
B |
C |
|
Albania |
|
X |
X |
Ecuador |
|
X |
|
Nigeria |
|
X |
X |
|
Algeria |
|
X |
X |
Ethiopia |
X |
X |
|
Oman |
|
X |
X |
|
Angola
|
|
X |
|
Gabon |
|
X |
|
Pakistan |
|
X |
|
|
Bangladesh |
X |
X |
|
Ghana |
|
X |
X |
Poland |
X |
X |
|
|
Barbados |
|
X |
|
Guinea |
|
X |
X |
Romania |
X |
X |
|
|
Benin |
|
X |
|
Haiti |
|
X |
X |
Pwanda |
X |
X |
|
|
Bolivia |
X |
X |
|
India |
X |
X |
|
Senegal |
|
X |
X |
|
Brazil |
|
X |
|
Indonesia |
X |
X |
|
Seychelles |
X |
X |
|
|
Bulgaria |
X |
X |
|
Iran |
|
X |
X |
Sierra Leone |
|
X |
|
|
Burkina Faso |
|
X |
|
Ivory Coast |
|
X |
|
Slovenia |
X |
X |
|
|
Burundi |
X |
X |
|
Jordan |
|
X |
X |
Solomon Islands |
|
X |
X |
|
Cambodia |
|
X |
X |
Kenya |
|
X |
|
Somalia |
|
X |
X |
|
Cameroon |
|
X |
|
North Korea |
|
X |
|
Sudan |
|
X |
|
|
Cape Verde |
X |
X |
|
Liberia |
|
X |
X |
Syria |
|
X |
|
|
Central African Republic |
|
X |
|
Libya |
|
X |
X |
Tanzania |
|
X |
|
|
Chad |
|
X |
|
Madagascar |
|
X |
X |
Togo |
|
X |
|
|
Colombia |
|
X |
X |
Mali |
|
X |
X |
Tunisia |
|
X |
X |
|
Congo(Brazzavile) |
|
X |
X |
Mauritania |
|
X |
X |
Uganda |
|
X |
X |
|
Congo(Kinshasa) |
X |
X |
|
Morocco |
|
X |
|
Venezuela |
|
X |
|
|
Cuba |
X |
X |
|
Nicaragua |
|
X |
X |
Yemen |
X |
X |
|
|
Dominican Republic |
|
X |
|
Niger |
|
X |
|
Zambia |
|
X |
X |
|
The definitions of these restrictions are summarized as follows: Restriction A An exporter is not allowed to purchase insurance abroad(it is therefore possibly more difficult for an exporter from that country to offer CIP, CIF, and DDP terms) Restriction B An importer is not allowed to purchase insurance abroad(it is therefore presumably impossible to sell to an importer in that country on CIP, CIF, DDU, or DDP terms) Restriction C An importer is not allowed to import on a CIF basis(it is therefore presumably illegal to offer CIP, DDU, and DDP terms to an importer in that country as well). Most of the countries in this list tend to be fairy small trade partner: if further information is specifically necessary for any of them, the commercial attache of any embassy to this country would be the best source of information on the exact implementations of these restrictions. |
4-9b Export’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under CIF
The exporter has to package the goods for export, and has to pay for shipping costs and minimum insurance costs to the port of destination. It is also responsible for clearing the goods for export. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the” U.S. principal party in interest” or the export of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is taking responsibility for the goods at the ship’s rail in the port of departure, even though the contract of carriage is between the seller and the importing country and for inland transportation after that. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-10 Carriage Paid To(CPT)
Conceptually, the CPF Incoterm is the same as the CFR Incoterm, except that it applies to goods shipped by means other than ocean transport, or shipped by sea without being handed over the ship’s rail (i.e., in the case of roll-on/roll-off cargo),or containerized cargo using multiple modes of transportation, including ocean transport as one of the modes. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
CPT Koln, Germany, Incoterms 2000
where Koln is the city of destination in which the importer takes control of the goods. This city is generally located in the importing country or a neighboring country.
In a Carriage Paid To transaction, the delivery does not take place in the city of destination, but in the city where the exporter delivers the goods to the carrier. The exporter pre-pays shipping charges do not include the unloading of the merchandise in the destination city
4-10a Delivery under CPT
Delivery takes place when the exporter hands over the goods to the carrier and the exporter is given a bill of lading or equivalent document (air waybill, sea waybill, multi-modal bill of lading),which acts as the proof of delivery.
4-10b Exporter’s and Importers’ Responsibilities under CPT
The exporter is responsible for packaging the goods for export, shipping them to the carrier, and pre-paying the shipping costs to the city of destination. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the” U.S. principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer assumes responsibility for the goods at the time the seller delivers them to the carrier. The importer is responsible for unloading the goods from the carrier’s truck, clearing Customs, and for paying inland transportation (if any)beyond the city of destination. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-11 Carriage and Insurance Paid To(CIP)
Conceptually, the CIP Inconterm is the same as the CIF Incoterm, except it applied to goods shipped by means other than ocean transport, or shipped by sea without being handed over the ship’s rail (i.e., in the case of roll-on/roll-off cargo),or containerized cargo using multiple modes of transportation, including ocean transport as one of the modes. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
CIP Sofia, Bulgaria, Incoterms 2000
where Sofia is the city of destination in which the importer takes control of the goods. This city is located in the importing country or a neighboring country.
In a Carriage and Insurance Paid To transaction, the delivery does not take place in the city of destination, but in the city where the exporter delivers the goods to the carrier. Unlike the CPT Incoterm, the exporter has the added responsibility of pre-paying for minimum-cover insurance (coverage C of Institute Cargo Clauses) until the city of destination. Therefore, an additional variant of the CIP Incoterm has emerged, CIP maximum cover, to request that the exporter take on the responsibility to provide coverage A of the Institute Cargo Clauses. The syntax again must accommodate the fact that Incoterm variants are not regulated by the International Chamber of Commerce and should read:
CIP Sofia, Bulgaria, Incoterm 2000,maximum cover
Finally, under the CIP Incoterm, the amount insured must be at least 110 percent of the value of the goods, a custom that dates back to 1906,when Great Britain instituted the Marine Insurance Act.
4-11a Delivery under CIP
Delivery takes place when the exporter hands over the goods to the carrier and the exporter is given a bill of lading or equivalent document(air waybill, sea bill, multi-modal bill of lading),which acts as the proof of delivery.
4-11b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under CIP
The exporter is responsible for export packing ,transportation costs to the city of destination, and for minimum insurance costs. In addition, the exporter is responsible for clearing the goods for export. In the United States, the exporter, fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the ”U.S principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer’s responsibility starts when the exporter delivers the goods to the carrier, even though the exporter is the party that contracted with the carrier’s truck, clearing Customs in the importing country ,and for transportation costs beyond the city of destination. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-12 Delivered Ex-Ship(DES)
Although the DES Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, it is specifically designed for ocean transportation, and is not meant for any other means of transportation or for merchandise that is not destine to be delivered by an ocean shipping line at the port of destination. In practice, the DES Incoterm is mostly used for bulk shipments of commodities where the parties wish to have the importer pay for the unloading of the ship. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
DES Istanbul, Turkey, Incoterms 2000
where Istanbul is the port of destination in which the importer takes responsibility for the goods. That port is usually located in the importing country or in a neighboring country.
In a Delivered Ex-Ship transaction, the exporter is responsible for the goods until they are placed at the disposal of the importer in the port of destination.
Figure 4-2 Incoterms
|
CFR Cost and Freight |
CIF Cost, Insurance, and Freight |
CPT Carriage Paid To |
CIP Carriage and Insurance Paid To |
|
Ocean |
Ocean |
MULTI-MODAL |
MULTI-MODAL |
|
The exporter is responsible for the goods until they are placed on the ship and the importer is responsible for them after that, but the exporter prepays the ocean freight.
|
Until the merchandise has cleared the ship’s rail, it is the responsibility of the exporter; after that, the responsibility shifts to the importer.
|
The importer assumes responsibility for the goods at the time the seller delivers them to the carrier. |
The importer’s responsibility starts when the exporter delivers the goods to the carrier, even though the exporter is the party that contracted with the carrier to get the goods delivered.
|
4-12a Delivery under DES
The delivery takes place in the port of destination, once the ship has reached port and makes the merchandise available to the importer.
There is no specific document that conveys the transfer of responsibility between the exporter and the importer at the point of delivery. It is common practice to have the exporter provide the ocean bill of lading as evidence of delivery in the port of destination, although it is only proof of delivery in the port of departure. Should something happen to the goods during the ocean voyage, while under the responsibility of the exporter, the bill of lading is unaffected, even though delivery has certainly not been made, since the goods have not been made available to the importer. Nevertheless, this is not as major an issue as with the EXW or FAS Incoterms, as the importer is often represented in the port of destination and delivery problems can easily be uncovered.
4-12b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DES
The responsibilities of the exporter include the handing of the goods until their arrival in the port of destination; however, the exporter does not handle(or pay for )unloading the ship, In addition, the exporter must clear the goods for export. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the ”U.S. principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is responsible for unloading the ship, clearing Customs in the importing country, and paying for whatever shipment costs there may be beyond the port of destination. If the importing country mandates a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-13 Delivered Ex-Quay(DEQ)
Although the DEQ Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, it is specifically designed for ocean transportation, and is not meant for any other means of transportation or for merchandise that is not destined to then be handed to an ocean shipping line at the port of departure. In practice, the DEQ Incoterm is mostly used for bulk shipments of commodities where the parties wish to have the exporter pay for the unloading of the ship. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
DEQ Santiago, Chile, Incoterms 2000
where Santiago is the port of destination in which the importer takes control of the goods. This port is generally located in the importing country or in a neighboring country.
In a Delivered Ex-Quay transaction, the exporter is responsible for the goods until they are unloaded from the ship in the port of destination. The only difference between the DES and DEQ Incoterms is that the unloading costs are borne by the exporter in the DEQ transaction.
4-13a Delivery under DEQ
The delivery for a DEQ shipment takes place when the goods are placed, once they have been unloaded (“landed”),at the disposal of the importer. There is no specific document that conveys the transfer of responsibility between the exporter and the importer at the point of delivery. It is common practice to have the exporter provide the ocean bill of lading as evidence of delivery in the port of destination.
4-13b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DEQ
Under a DEQ shipment, the exporter has the same responsibility as in a DES shipment, with the following exception: the exporter has to pay for the unloading of the ship in the port of destination.
4-14 Dlivered at Frontier(DAF)
The DAF Incotern can be used for any merchandise, but it is specifically designed for land transportation, and should not be used for ocean transportation, where the DES or DEQ Incoterms fulfill the same function. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
DAF Nogales, Arizona, USA, Incoterms 2000
Where Nogales is the border city in which the importer takes physical control of the goods. This city is usually located at the border between the exporting country and the importing country or a neighboring country.
In a Delivered at Frontier transaction, the delivery(the transfer or responsibility or the transfer of risk) takes place in the city named in the Incoterm, but with the merchandise still loaded on the vehicle or the railroad car on which it arrived in that city. Common practice calls for the merchandise to remain on the truck or the railroad car until its final destination, but the responsibility of getting it there shifts to the importer who must contract for carriage. When carriage is done by railroad, it is not unusual for the term to read ”DAF Bulgarian border”, and for the goods to remain on the same train until their destination with no exact location mentioned; the final crossing point is left to the discretion of the railroad company. In trade within NAFTA, this Incoterm is very commonly used between the United States (or Canada) and Mexico, and usually specifies a town: there is still some political uneasiness about letting Mexican trucks and trailers on U.S. and Canadian highways, but it should subside.
The DAF Incoterm was almost eliminated from the 2000 Incoterm revisions for several reasons: it is rarely used, it can be easily replace with a DDU (see the next section) or another Incoterm, and since no specific documents mark the transfer of responsibility between the exporter and importer.
4-14a Delivery under DAF
In a DAF transaction, the delivery takes place when the merchandise, still on the truck or the railroad car, is placed at the disposal of the importer at the border city.
There is no specific transportation document that conveys the transfer of responsibility between the exporter and the importer, but some carriers provide a “through document of transport” that fulfills that role.
4-14b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DAF
In a DAF shipment, the exporter is responsible for packing the goods for export and paying for transportation until the border city. The exporter is responsible for clearing the goods for export and providing information to the importing country. In the merchandise can be insured and can clear Customs in the importing country. In the United States, the exporter fills out the shipper’s Export Declaration and is the “U.S. principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is responsible for the costs of transportation from the border city to the final destination and for the costs of clearing Customs. If the importing country requires a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer has to pay for it.
4-15 Dlivered Duty Unpaid(DDU)
The DDU Incoterm can be used for any merchandise, and can be used for any means of transportation, including goods that are meant to be carried by ocean. However, this Incoterm is not meant for ocean goods to be delivered to a port of destination, for which the DES and DEQ Incoterms were specifically designed. The DDU Incoterm is meant to be used when the exporter is willing to perform most of the tasks involved in a shipment, up to the city named in the Incoterm, with the exclusion of Customs clearance and duty payment. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
DDU Xi’an, China, Incoterms 2000
Where Xi’an is the city of destination in which the importer takes control of the goods. This city is generally the place of business of the importer, but can be any city located in the importing courtry or in a neighboring country.
In a Delivered Duty Unpaid transaction, the exporter is responsible for the goods. This city is generally the place of business of the importer, but can be any city located in the importing country or in a neighboring country.
In a Delivery Duty Unpaid transaction, the exporter is responsible for the goods until they arrive, still loaded on a truck or a railroad car, in the city of destination. The unloading costs are borne by the importer.
In most cases, the DDU Incoterm is used in those cases where the exporter wants to offer the greatest level of customer service, but when it is impossible for a foreign company to be the importer of record; it may be illegal for a foreign company to apply for an import license, the Customs official may only want to deal with local firms, or some other compelling reason exists to prevent the exporter from providing a DDP shipment.
4-15a Delivery under DDU
Under the DDU incoterm, the delivery takes place when the exporter place the goods at the disposal of the importer in the city of delivery mentioned in the Incoterm. The goods are delivered unloaded(i.e., it is the responsibility of the importer to arrange and pay for unloading the goods), However, this is often a very minor point, as the point of delivery is often the importer’s plant, which obviously has the ability to unload a truck.
Although there is no transportation document that corresponds to this delivery, it is common for the exporter to provide the bill of lading at the time of delivery.
4-15b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DDU
The exporter is responsible for arranging and paying for all shipping issues until the goods are delivered to the importer, with the exception of paying duty and clearing Customs. The exporter is therefore responsible for export packing, export clearance, domestic transportation in the exporting country, international transportation in the exporting country, international transportation, domestic transportation in the importing country, and insurance. In the United States, the exporter fills out the Shipper’s Export Declaration and is the “U.S. principal party in interest” or the exporter of record. In countries where export authorities require a Pre-Shipment Inspection (see Chapter13), the exporter has to pay for it.
The importer is responsible for Customs clearance and for paying duty. If the importing country mandates a Pre-Shipment Inspection, the importer is responsible for that cost.
4-16 Delivered Duty Paid (DDP)
The DDP Incoterm can be used for any merchandise and for any means of transportation. However, if the goods are carried by ocean and delivered in the port of destination, then the correct Incoterms to use are DES and DEQ. This Incoterm should be used with the following syntax:
DDP Karlsruhe, Germany, Incoterms 2000
where Karlsruhe is the city of destination in which the importer takes control of the goods. This city is generally the place of business of the importer, but can be any city located in the importing country or in a neighboring country.
Choosing the DDP Incoterm is the ultimate in customer service on the part of the exporter. The exporter handles everything for the importer, including shipment to the customer’s plant and Customs clearance. For the importer, this type of transaction is exactly equivalent to receiving a domestic shipment from a domestic supplier: the only thing left to the importer’s care is the unloading of the merchandise, something which is usually its responsibility under a domestic shipment.
In some case, it may be advantageous for pragmatic reasons to use a variant of the DDP Incoterm: in a number of countries, the Customs authorities collect not only duty on the goods imported but also Value Added Tax (VAT) on the value of the goods. Because of the peculiarities of VAT accounting, it is often much more convenient for the importer to pay for the VAT than it is for the exporter. In those circumstances, the DDP VAT unpaid Incoterm variant may be used. The syntax should be:
DDP Karlsruhe, Germany, Incoterms 2000, VAT unpaid to reflect the fact that the variant is not officially sanctioned by the International Chamber of Commerce.
Figure 4-3 Matching Incoterms
|
DES Delivery EX-Ship |
DEQ Delivered Ex-Quay |
DAF Delivered at Frontier |
DDU Delivered Duty Unpaid |
DDP Delivered Duty Paid |
|
OCEAN |
OCEAN |
LAND |
ANY |
ANY |
|
The responsibilities of the exporter include the handling of the goods until their arrival in the port of destination; the importer is responsible for unloading the ship, clearing Customs in the importing country, and paying for whatever shipment costs there may be beyond the port of destination. |
The exporter has the same responsibility as in a DES shipment, with the following exception; the exporter has to pay for the unloading of the ship in the port of destination. |
The exporter is responsible for packing the goods for transportation until the border city. |
The exporter is responsible for arranging and paying for all shipping issues until the goods are delivered to the importer, with the exception of paying duty and clearing Customs. |
The exporter assumes all responsibilities in a DDP shipment: clearing the goods for export, transporting them to the importer’s facilities and clearing Customs in the importing country. |
4-16a Delivery under DDP
Under the DDP Incoterm, the delivery takes place when the exporter places the goods at the disposal of the importer in the city of delivery mentioned in the Incoterm. The goods are delivered unloaded (i.e. , it is the responsibility of the importer to arrange and pay for unloading the goods). However, this is often a very minor point, as the destination of the delivery is often the importer’s plant, which obviously has the ability to unload a truck.
Although there is no transportation document that corresponds to this delivery, a commonly used alternative is for the exporter to provide the bill of lading at the time of delivery.
4-16b Exporter’s and Importer’s Responsibilities under DDP
The exporter assumes all responsibilities in a DDP shipment: clearing the goods for export, transporting them to the importer’s facilities, and clearing Customs in the importing country. All costs and responsibilities are for the exporter.
The importer only has the responsibility to receive the goods at delivery and unload them.
4-17 Electronic Data Interchange
Electronic Data Interchange (see Chapter 7) has somewhat changed one of the main issues in Incoterms: the documentation of the delivery,
For a number of Incoterms, there is no transport document that is issued at the point where the responsibility shifts from the exporter to the importer (i.e. , when the delivery takes place). For example, in an EXW transaction, the delivery takes place when the merchandise is placed “at the importer’s disposal,” and a similar situation is present with the use of the FAS Incoterm, and, to a lesser degree, of the DEQ, DES, DAF, DDU, and DDP Incoterms as well.
EDI has, to a considerable extent, solved this problem: whenever there is no transport document possible, the exporter can still send an EDI “notice” to the importer, which acts as a document for both parties. The exporter has a record of the notification sent, and the importer knows unambiguously when the goods were delivered to the quay (FAS shipment) or when they arrived in the port (DES and DEQ shipments). Therefore, one of the problems associated with the use of Incoterms is likely to abate substantially over the next few years, as the use of EDI increase. Unfortunately, EDI usage is still fairly new and limited to developed countries.
End-of-Chapter Questions
1. Describe two Incoterms of your choice.
2. What is the Incoterm that is most importer friendly?
Least importer friendly? Justify your answer.
3. Which of the Incoterms include a requirement of “insurance” by the exporter?
4. The “Delivered” Incoterms (DEQ, DES, DDP and DDU) do not include insurance. Why not?
5. Using a product of your choice as well as an importer and an exporter of your choice, determine what would be the ideal Incoterm for a transaction. Make as many assumptions as necessary to justify your decision.
6. Explain why a developing country would want to prevent its importers from purchasing CIF or CIP and instead require CFR or CPT shipments.
7. A certain sogo shosha (a Japanese Trading Company) always requests its suppliers to provide a EXW quote. Knowing what you know about Trading Companies, why do you think this is the case
Endnotes
1. Debattista, Charles, Editor, Incoterms in Practice, 1995, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No.505(E), ICC Publishing S.A. , 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA (refers to 1990 Incoterms).
2. Gooley, Toby B., “Incoterms 2000: What the changes mean to you,” Logistics Management Distribution Report, January 31, 2000, p.49.
3.Reynolds, Frank, “Implications of Incoterms 2000,” Journal of Commerce, September 9, 1999, p.10.
4.Freudmann, Aviva, “Traders get a brand-new Bible,” Journal of Commerce, September 9, 1999, p1.
5.Incoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No.560, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
6.Biederman, David, “New rules for exporters,” JOC Week, July 24-30, 2000, pp.10-12.
7.Incoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No.560, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
8.Ramberg, Jan, ICC Guide to Incoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No.620, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
8. Raty, Asko, “Variant on Incoterms(part 2),” in Debattista, Charles, Editor, Incoterms in Practice, 1995.
9. Reynolds, Frank, “Tale of a rail and other nuances of the marine cargo insurance experience,” Journal of Commerce, November 18, 1998, p. 10A.
10. Raty, Asko, “Variant on Incoterms(part 2),” in Debattista, Charles, Editor, Incoterms in Practice, 1995.
11. Incoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No.560, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
12. Mikkola, Kainu, “Variant on Incoterms(part 1),” in Debattista, Charles, Editor, Incoterms in Practice, 1995.
13. Reynolds, Frank, “Seminar in Pairs yields answers to widely asked questions on Incoterms,” Journal of Commerce, April 22, 1998, p.2c.
14. Reynolds, Frank, Incoterms for Americans, 1999, published by International Project, Inc., P.O. Box 352650, Toledo, Ohio 43635-2650, USA.
Chapter 5
Terms of Payment
Outline
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5-1 Introduction
5-2Alternetive Terms of Payment
5-2a Country Risk
5-2b Commercial Risk
5-2c Exposure
5-3 Cash in Advance
5-3a Definition
5-3b Applicability
5-4 Open Account
5-4a Definition
5-4b Applicability
5-4c Commercial Insurance
5-4d Factoring
5-5 Letter of Credit
5-5a Definition
5-5b Process
5-5c Additional Information
5-5d Stand-By Letters of Credit
5-5e Applicability
5-5f URR 525
5-6 Documentary Collection
5-6a Definition
5-6b Sight Draft
5-6c Time Draft
5-6d Date Draft
5-6e Instruction Letter
5-6f Trade Acceptance
5-6g Banker’s Acceptance and Aval
5-6h URC 522
5-6j Forfaiting
5-7 Purchasing Cards—Procurement Cards
5-8 TradeCard
5-9 Bank Guarantees
5-9a Definition
5-9b Guarantee Payment on First Demand(at First Request)
5-9c Guarantee Based Upon Documents—Cautions
5-9d Stand-By Letter of Credit
5-9e Types of Bank Guarantees
End-of-Chapter Questions
Endnotes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Key Terms
Advising bank
Amendment
Applicant
Aval
Bank guarantee
Banker’s acceptance
Beneficiary
Bill of exchange
Commercial risk
Confirming bank
Confirmed letter of credit
Correspondent bank
Country risk
Credit insurance
Date draft
Discrepancy
Drawee
Exposure
Instruction letter
International factoring
International forfaiting
Issuing bank
Political risk
Presenting bank
Protest
Remitting bank
Stand-by letter of credit
Time draft
Trade acceptance
5-1 Introduction
One of the greatest concerns an exporting company has is to make sure that it will be able to collect payment from its foreign customers. Although this is also a legitimate concern domestically, an international transaction is generally perceived to involve a much greater non-payment risk than a strictly domestic sale for several reasons:
· Credit Information There is generally much less information available on the creditworthiness of a creditor in a foreign market than there is for a domestic customer. Although few credit reporting agencies, accounting firms, and factoring houses do keep information, it is not always readily obtainable or is not always in existence for a specific customer, especially if the customer is a recently created firm, or if the customer is in a developing country. Some improvements have been made recently, though, with the creation of centralized credit information portals, which offer links to access foreign countries’ credit agencies. The task, though, is usually much more complicated for foreign customer than for a domestic one, if only because the identity of a domestic firm is usually easy to establish. The paucity of information about certain countries is often coupled with an unfamiliarity with the diverse business organizations(different types of partnership an corporations)of a foreign country’s legal system and with an inability to decipher businesses’ names.
· Lack of Personal Contact International transactions tend to be conducted in a more impersonal fashion(through fax, telex) than are domestic transactions, which tend to be conducted at least initially with some sort of personal contact(in person or over the phone).This lack of contact tends to lead to a climate in which the exporter has no way to evaluate the “character” of the importer, and where the possibility of a greater risk is often assumed. Where there is personal contact, it is often between people who are not always well versed in intercultural communication and can substantially misunderstand each other. This can foster the perception of a greater risk and encourages a more cautious approach.
· Collections are Difficult and Expensive Should a foreign customer renege on a payment, the collection of such a past-due account can be particularly difficult. Although there is a generally well-structured system on the domestic side, there are few firms that have the capability of offering international collection services. Those that do tend to offer the service at a very high price.
In some cases, relying on a foreign collection agency can lead a company to unwillingly employ some pretty unsavory characters, a situation which can eventually taint the image of the exporter, as Citibank discovered to its detriment when it used a “strong-armed” collection company in India
· No Easy Legal Recourse Unlike in a domestic setting, in which there is often a commercial code (of laws) and abundant jurisprudence, there is little of either in international trade. In addition, there is no Court with jurisdiction over international disputes and therefore a ruling by a Court in the exporter’s country cannot be easily enforced in the importer’s country. The reciprocal is also true.
The creation of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Good(CISG) and its implementation in 1980 have helped establish a body of legal principles for the sale of goods between companies located in two different sovereign countries. As of 2000,about sixty countries had ratified this treaty, representing about 80 percent of the world’s trade, but some countries, such as the United Stated, have ratified only part of it, presumably those articles which did not conflict with their own Code Law(Uniform Commercial Code for the United States).The enforcement of the Convention is left to the domestic courts’ interpretascant (all of the available jurisprudence is made accessible through a database created by the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law(UNCIRAL) called CLOUT, for “Case Law on UNCITRSL texts” ).There are always concerns on the part of exporters that conflicts of law between domestic laws and the CISG and differences in interpretation by the courts make the prospect of a court battle much more daunting. Section 3-2 outlined several of the differences between the CISG and the United States’ UCC.
It is a common misconception that there is some sort of an international court of justice; although the International Court in the Hague(the Netherlands) arbitrates disputes between two governments and between governments and multinational corporations, it never interferes in disputes between corporations. In addition, its rulings are non-binding, as the Court does not have the executive authority to en force them.
· Higher Litigation Costs The costs of international litigation or mediation court are generally much greater than those of domestic litigation. Seeking a ruling against an importer in the importer’s country is time-consuming, can involve several trips abroad, and necessitates the hiring of foreign law specialists, a process which Involves greater expense than domestic disputes. In India, for example, a judgment is generally not rendered for at least ten years, with cases meandering through the system for much longer periods than that.
Suing a foreign customer for non-payment in the courts of the exporter’s country could be perceived as a means to speed this process up and eventually lower its costs; however, it is only followed by the prospect of having to file suit in the importing country’s courts as well, just to enforce the judgment rendered against the importer. Most exporters perceive that litigation should be an absolute last resort.
· Mistrust Finally, there is the perception that the importing company is well aware of all these factors and knows that the exporter is unlikely to aggressively pursue an uncollected foreign receivable. This creates a climate of distrust on the part of the exporter who could assume the worse intention on the part of the importer.
5-2 Alternative Terms of Payment
There are essentially four ”traditional” methods to handle the issue of payment in foreign transaction, all involving a different level of risk: Cash in Advance, Open Account, Documentary Collection, and Letter of Credit. Although there are variations in each of these methods, each designed to mitigate one or another aspect of the risks involved in the transcation, they have not changed much in the past thirty years. However, in the past five years, an interesting fifth alternative has emerged, called “TradeCard,” and it promises to become a particularly effective means of securing payment from a customer abroad without involving as many fees or intermediaries as some of the more secure traditional alternatives.
TABLE 5-1 Advantages and Disadvantages
of Several Terms of Payment
|
Term of Payment |
Probability of Losing the Business because of the Choice of Method of Payment |
Probability of Loss Due to Non-Payment |
|
Cash in Payment |
High |
Nil |
|
Letter of Credit |
Fairly High |
Almost Nil |
|
Documentary Collection |
Low |
Low |
|
Open Account |
Nil |
relatively High |
|
TradeCard |
Low |
Almost Nil |
Each of these five general alternatives presents advantages and disadvantages, and can be generally seen as trade-off between the risk of non-payment and risk of losing the business to a more aggressive competitor who is willing to accept a greater risk and therefore present the customer with a ”simpler” alternative form of payment. Table 5-1 gives an example of the most common perceptions in terms of this trade-off:
Nevertheless, Table 5-1 is an overly simplified summary of the different alternatives. The ultimate choice of a term of sale should be carefully determined as a function of several objective and subjective factors, and each variant of the preferred method given careful consideration. Unfortunately, if only for the obvious reason of simplification of the process of selling, several exporting firms do not have the inclination—nor do they have the time and personnel—to tailor terms of payment to specific customers or countries, and these firms have designed a “foreign sales policy” to deal with all orders from importers, regardless of where these customers are located, or of who they are. Such a lack of flexibility tends to lead to exceedingly conservative policies. One exporter confessed to the author that it only considered “Cash in Advance” sales orders; undoubtedly this conservative stance never got its author into trouble, but it very likely yielded much lower sales than a slightly more aggressive approach. Ideally, the terms of sale of a particular transaction should be evaluated according to the risks attached to the transaction.
5-2a Country Risk
Country risk( is made up of an aggregate of different issues, some political, and some strictly economical.
On the political side, the government’s stability should be considered; for example, the possibility that a government may be changed (with a new election) may influence import policies, which, in turn, could mean that goods cannot clear. Customs as easily, or that tariffs increase, or that other policies are changed to such an extent that the importer will refuse delivery. In a country in which such a political risk is perceived, the exporter would prefer a term of payment that is more secure. Similarly, a government which is in a weak position could also see its strong political unrest, as was seen in France in late 1995 when the country was essentially paralyzed by strikes for several weeks.
Port personnel or other personnel critical to the timeliness of a shipment-such as Customs officers-strike often in some countries, and this fact should be factored in the decision of the terms of payment. Japan, for example, has an almost yearly strike in its ports. Finally, in some cases, the government chooses to delay payment of international obligations, including trade obligations, whenever it is found to make sense politically. However, although a few governments have reneged on their public debt, there has been no recent evidence of governments reneging on their commercial (trade) debt.
Secondly, the overall health of the economy should also be considered. If there is high unemployment, policies against “job-stealing imports” could be implemented. If there is high inflation, price controls may be initiated. Moreover, the balance of payments of the importing country may also be relevant: if it is badly in a deficit position, imports of “import cover,” or the amount of foreign currency that the country has to cover its imports, starts to become low; generally, the import cover is expressed in months (i.e. foreign currency reserves can cover the next X months of imports).
Finally, a quick survey of the social system of the country could be conducted. Some countries’ societies foster a climate where fraud is commonplace, sometimes prevalent (e.g., Nigeria), a situation which is conducive to much caution on the part of an exporter. The fairness of the legal system should also be considered. An importer located in a country in which claims are handled professionally should be offered more lenient terms of payment than one located in a country where the justice system is notoriously biased, inadequate, or agonizingly slow.
The magazine World Trade, in each of its issues, provides a summary report of a region of the world and of the situation in each country of that region. It also provides recommended terms of payment and credit terms generally expected in that country. The data is consolidated from several reliable sources: Dun and Bradstreet and the Economist’s Intelligence Unit. Table 5-2 is an excerpt of the information published in June 2000 for Asia. Note that expectations currency fluctuations do no affect the choice of the term of payment, but will affect the choice of the currency of quote (see Chapter 6).
5-2b Commercial Risk
This is the area in which it is more difficult to obtain accurate and reliable information. If the potential customer is a distributor who does business with other exporting firms, it is often possible to obtain firsthand information from these other exporters. Actually, it is considered good commercial practice in the United States to share information on the creditworthiness of a common customer-and in some cases to monitor this customer’s payments-with other suppliers.
Commercial risk( can also be evaluated from private sources, including credit report companies, factoring houses, some accounting firms, insurance companies, and banks. However, these are usually fee-based services and tend to be focused on larger established firms in developed countries. These sources are reliable and unbiased, though they tend to be conservative in their evaluations.
TABLE 5-2 Recommended Credit Terms and Terms of Payment (June 2000)
|
Country |
Credit Terms |
Recommended Terms of Payment |
|
China |
60-90 days |
Letter of Credit |
|
Indonesia |
90-120 days |
Cash in Advance |
|
Japan |
30-60 days |
Sight Draft (documentary collection) |
|
Pakistan |
30-90 days |
Confirmed letter of Credit |
|
Singapore |
30-90 days |
Open Account |
TABLE 5-3 Several Credit Reporting Services
|
Company |
U.S. Phone Number |
Web Address |
|
COFACE |
212-440-7576 |
www.cofacerating.com |
|
Credit Report Latin America |
718-729-4906 |
www.crla.com |
|
Creditworthy.com |
503-697-7659 |
www.creditworthy.com |
|
Dun and Bradstreet |
800-932-0025 |
www.dnb.com |
|
FCIB-NACM |
410-423-1840 |
www.fcibflobal.com |
|
Graydon America |
888-472-9366 |
www.graydonamenca.com |
|
J.I. International |
860-589-1698 |
www.jiintl.com |
|
Kreller Business Information |
800-745-4656 |
www.kreller.com |
|
Owens Online |
800-444-6361 |
www.owens.com |
|
Status Credit Report (U.K.) |
44-2920-544-333 |
www.statusreports.net |
|
Veritas Group |
203-781-3800 |
www.veritas-usa.com |
Table 5-3 lists several companies offering foreign credit reports on overseas customers. Each of these firms usually issues a report on a foreign customer for about US $125.
5-2c Exposure
The risk of nonpayment is the probability of not getting paid or of being paid late, and it therefore dictates the terms of payment chosen by the exporter.
However, another issue to be considered is the consequence of that loss on a company, or the exposure( of a company. At equal probabilities of loss, a small business would be much more careful in handling a US $50,000 export transaction than a large company would be. The amount is a much greater percentage of its business, and the loss of this amount could be very significant. The greater the exposure, the more secure the terms of payment should be.
5-3 Cash in Advance
5-3a Definition
In a Cash in Advance transaction, the exporter requests that the customer provide payment in advance, before shipment of the goods can take place. Payment is usually made wit an electronic SWIFT (Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication) fund transfer from the customer’s bank to the exporter’s bank.
This is the ultimate “risk-free” alternative for the exporter. The importer has to pay before the goods are released; therefore, there are no collection worries, no foreign exchange fluctuation exposure, no cash-flow problem, and only nominal fees to pay to banks.
In a Cash in Advance transaction, the risk is completely transferred to the importer. It sends cash to the exporter with the expectation that the exporter will ship the goods that were requested, in the quantity that was ordered, in due time and with the documents necessary to clear Customs in the importing country. In addition, this takes place in an atmosphere in which the exporter just demonstrated that it has no trust whatsoever in the importer since it is requesting “Cash in Advance.”
5-3b Applicability
Cash in Advance of a recommended way of conducting international transactions in countries in which fraud is rampant, in countries in which there is a substantial risk of political instability or the possibility of foreign exchange “freezes” and in countries that do not have a convertible currency. Transactions conducted in the Republics of the former Soviet Union and Eastern Europe, with the possible exclusions of Hungary and the Czech Republic, would probably best be conducted on a Cash in Advance basis.
However, this method is unsound for business conducted in developed countries and in countries in which there is a significant level of sophistication in international business. In these countries, the probability that an importer will place a Cash in Advance purchase is infinitesimally small if there are other comparable suppliers available, and insisting on this method of payment is likely to create resentment on the part of the importer rather than initiate an amicable business relationship. It should be avoided at all costs.
5-4 Open Account
5-4a Definition
In an Open Account transaction, the exporter conducts international business in a manner similar to the way it conducts business domestically. The exporter just sends an invoice to the importer along with the shipment and trusts the customer to pay within a reasonable amount of time, commensurate with the credit usually granted in the country in which the importer operates, usually thirty to ninety days. It is essentially the conceptual opposite of Cash in Advance, as the exporter shows complete trust in the importer and ships the merchandise without and\y guarantee that it will be paid. The only recourse in case of non-payment is legal action in the importing country, a time-consuming and expensive process which exporters rarely undertake.
5-4b Applicability
This term of payment should be reserved to established customers, or customers with whom the exporter expects to have an ongoing relationship. It could possibly be extended to new orders from large companies and/or companies for which commercial credit data is available, and whose credit rating is excellent. At least, that’s theoretically the way that this term of payment should be used.
In practice, however, this term of sale has become almost necessary in some markets if the exporter is to expect any sales. For example, in the European Union, it has become very difficult to conduct business on any other basis. It is to be expected that the trend will continue and expand to other market as well: for example, European Union companies offer Open Account terms of payment to 80 percent of their customers. outside of the EU. The main reason is that, historically, European exporters have often benefited from their government’s support, and were often offered free (or substantially discounted) commercial insurance on their foreign receivables. Until 1994, for example, a French exporter could obtain insurance from the COFACE-the Compagnie Francaise d’Assurance pour le Commerce Exterieur, a government-run insurance company-at a greatly reduced cost; its risk of non-payment had therefore essentially been assumed by the government. Today, COFACE and other European-based companies constitute the largest providers of international commercial credit insurance( and are present in many different countries, a position reached through many consolidations.
5-4c Commercial Insurance
In order to compete in those markets in which Open Account has become the rule, companies must offer this term of payment in their quotes to new customers. However, the risks associated with an Open Account transaction should entice an exporter to acquire credit insurance on those sales.
Therefore a commercial policy covering credit risks should be contracted, either on a “blanket” basis (i.e. covering all export transactions, up to a certain overall amount) or on a per-sale basis (i.e. each individual transaction is covered by a separate commercial insurance contract). Section 8-11 gives more detailed information on these types of coverage.
5-4d Factoring
In those cases where the importer wants credit terms that are beyond what the exporter is comfortable giving-for example, a ninety-day credit is requested when the exporter can only afford a thirty-day credit-there is the possibility of using international factoring( as a means to extend this credit. In an international transaction, factoring is much more complicated than in a domestic sale: the exporter would contact a factoring firm in the exporting country who would in turn contact a factoring firm in the importing country. Once both factoring parties agree to the transaction, the sale is completed on an Open Account basis. The exporter, once the invoice is sent, sells the receivable to the factoring house and collects its face value, from which are deducted the fees and interest charges covering the period of time during which credit is extended.
The transaction is generally without recourse (i.e. the factor is responsible for collecting the receivable and cannot turn to the exporter if it is unable to collect). This is the main reason for involving a second factoring company located in the importing country; its responsibility is to check the creditworthiness of the importer, and, in some cases, to act as a collection agent for the factoring company in the exporting country.
5-5 Letter of Credit
5-5a Definition
A Letter of Credit is a document in which the importer’s bank essentially promises to pay the exporter if the importer does not pay. The creditworthiness of the bank is substituted for the importer. However, the concept is substantially more complex than this, The promise is not made upon the exporter meeting certain conditions (or the importer not meeting certain conditions), but it is made on the documents of the transaction: this is the reason why a Letter of Credit is often called a Documentary Letter of Credit. The bank is under no obligation to pay even though delivery has been made and the importer has obtained control of the merchandise; similarly, the bank has to pay even though the merchandise may be shoddy or not fit for sale. The bank is obligated to pay only if the documents are in order. The Letter of Credit is therefore a contractual agreement between the Issuing Bank( and the beneficiary, independent of the underlying relationship between the exporter and the importer; only the documents relating to the exporter- importer transaction matter. This obviously means that extreme care must be taken in handling the documents related to a Letter of Credit; otherwise, it triggers a very time-consuming and expensive process of amendments corrections to the Letter of Credit.
A transaction conducted on a Letter of Credit basis is almost as good as made on a Cash in Advance basis in that the exporter will be paid, but it involve going through a lot more steps and paying a lot more banking fees. Figures 5-1 through 5-3 explain the process followed by a Letter of Credit transaction from issuance to payment.
5-5b Process
Issuance
●The first step in the process (see Figure 5-1) is the negotiation, which takes place between the exporter and the importer, in which it is agreed that the terms of payment will be by Letter of Credit. The exporter then sends a pro-forma invoice to the importer, which estimates the terms of the transaction as closely as possible (see Section 7-2 for further details on the elements of a pro-forma invoice).
●The second step takes place when the importer (the applicant() requests its bank (the Issuing Bank) to open a Letter of Credit on the importer’s behalf, naming the exporter as the beneficiary. Since it is promising that it will pay if the importer does not pay, the bank may request that the amount of the Letter of Credit is issued. This constraint on cash flow is one of the reasons why importers prefer other terms of payment to a Letter of Credit, although most of them request about 1.5 percent.
●In the third step, the Issuing bank send the Letter of Credit (either electronically (using the SWIFT network), by fax, or by mail) to the exporter’s bank, which acts as the Advising Bank (in this simplified example). The Advising Bank checks a number of things: first, that the Letter of Credit is drawn on a legitimate bank and that its content meets the requirements of the exporter. It also wants to make sure that the Letter of Credit is irrevocable: an irrevocable Letter of Credit cannot be modified without the express consent of both the issuer and beneficiary. All Letters of Credit issued under the Universal Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit of the International Chamber of Commerce (UCP 500) are irrevocable unless specifically marked as “revocable”. The Advising Bank finally wants to confirm that the Letter of Credit’s information matches the pro-forma invoice exactly and that the expiration date is appropriate for the transaction.
●The Advising Bank then notifies the beneficiary that the Letter of Credit is acceptable. By doing so, the bank is not engaging its responsibility; it is only acting as an adviser to the exporter and will not have to pay if the Issuing Bank does not honor its commitment.
Shipment
●The fifth step in the process of a Letter of Credit takes place when the exporter ships the merchandise to the importer. In this process, the exporter generates a lot of paperwork (an invoice, a certificate of origin, an export license, a packing list, a Shipper’s Export Declaration (U.S.), and so on) and collects a lot of paperwork, such as a bill of lading or an air waybill from the shipping company and miscellaneous certificates (insurance, inspection, and so on ) from different suppliers (for more information on all of these terms, please see Chapter7). Extreme care must be given to make sure that the paperwork matches precisely the requirements of the Letter of Credit, as the Issuing Bank’s promise to pay is contingent upon presenting the proper documents.
●After these documents are collected, the exporter will send them to its bank (the Advising Bank), which will check them against the terms of the Letter of Credit. If everything is conforming, the bank will then send the documents (sixth step) to the importer’s bank (the Issuing Bank). In some cases, depending on the working relationship between the Issuing Bank and the Advising Bank, the Advising Bank could issue a credit (payment) to the exporter at that point. However, this payment is not final and is dependent on the Issuing Bank honoring the Letter of Credit. The simplest example illustrated in Figure 5-2 does not presume such a relationship and assumes that the Advising Bank will wait until it is actually paid by the Issuing Bank before it credits the exporter’s bank account.
●After receiving them, the Issuing Bank will check the documents sent by the exporter’s bank and determine whether they are conform to the requirements of the Letter of Credit. If they are, it notifies the importer that the documents are in order and its exchanges them (concentrating on the bill of lading or the air waybill, which act as the certificate of title to the goods) against payment by the importer. The importer can then clear Customs in the importing country.
Payment
●The payment of a Letter of Credit is a fairly simple process: payment is first made by the importer to its bank, then the importing bank wires the payment to the exporter’s bank, and finally the exporter’s account is credited (see Figure 5-3).
The entire process of a Letter of Credit is shown in Figure 5-4. The reason the process is labeled “simplified” is because a number of other parties can get involved in the process.
5-5c Additional Information
Irrevocable Letter of Credit(
An Irrevocable Letter of Credit is one that cannot be canceled by the Issuing Bank for any reason, unless the beneficiary agrees to it. A Revocable Letter of Credit. The overwhelming majority of Letter of Credit are Irrevocable Letters of Credit.
A Letter of Credit issued under the Universal Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit (UCP 500)—which almost all of them are--is assumed to be irrevocable unless otherwise specified. Under the previous guidelines (UCP 400), the opposite was true; a Letter of Credit was not irrevocable unless it specifically stated so. Even though the UCP 500 replaced the UCP 400 in 1993, there seems to still be some confusion regarding this important distinction.
Confirming Bank
In some cases, the exporting company may not be comfortable doing business with the Issuing Bank, which, after all, is an unknown foreign entity. It may not know the bank is too high, or simply be quite risk averse or new to the export business. In any case, the exporter can ask its Advising Bank to confirm the Letter of Credit; it then becomes a Confirmed Letter of Credit. In the event the Issuing Bank does not honor its Letter of Credit, then the Confirming Bank will pay the exporter, as long as the documents submitted are conform to the terms of the Letter of Credit. It is a way to substitute the creditworthiness of the domestic bank for that of the Issuing Bank. Since the Confirming Bank is often also the Advising Bank, the practice is that the Confirming Bank will issue a credit to the exporter upon presentation of the documents at the time of shipment. It therefore speeds up the process of collection by a week or so.
In most cases, confirming a Letter of Credit is not a wise choice, as banks tend to be creditworthy. In addition, confirming a Letter of Credit is expensive, costing 0.5 to 1.5 percent of the amount of the Letter of Credit, a substantial cost considering that foreign banks rarely fail. Some U.S. companies have a policy of always confirming Letters of Credit, generally because they prefer dealing with a U.S. to confirm Letters of Credit drawn on extraordinary solid banks, such as Credit Suisse, with less-than-stellar U.S. banks. Then again, venerable banks have been known to fail; Barings did in 1995.
Correspondent Bank(
In some cases, a third bank can get involved in the process. Quite a few banks enter agreements in which they act as Correspondent Banks for each other. The purpose of these agreements is for each bank to have a “representation” in a foreign market. The consequence of these agreements is that the banks tend to favor their Correspondent Bank’s, and in some cases will funnel all the business they conduct in the Correspondent Bank’s country to that bank.
For the sake of example, Let’s pretend that Bank A in Germany has an agreement with Bank Z in Thailand in which they are each other’s Correspondent Bank. An exporter in Germany, doing business with Bank B, requests a Letter of Credit from its Thai customer who himself has an account with Bank Z. It is quite likely for Bank A to be part of the transaction and act as the “courier” between Bank Z and Bank B, or even Bank Z to request that Bank A become the Advising Bank. In most cases, it would be advantageous for the German exporter to have Bank A may release the funds on behalf of the Issuing Bank Z (see Section 5-5f). Payment would then be collected earlier.
Amendments
In the unfortunately fairly frequent case in which the Letter of Credit and the documents do not match perfectly, it is the role of the Advising Bank to request an amendment to the Letter of Credit from the Issuing Bank. (Although this method is in no way mandated by international conventions, it is the preferred method, as the Advising Bank is seen as a more impartial and neutral party than the exporter.) Such discrepancies can be on shipping dates, changes in the number of packages, changes in part numbers, suppliers costs (insurance, shipping charges), and so on. It is estimated that around 50 percent of all Letters of Credit have some sort of discrepancy. (
An amendment is a change, which must be authorized by both parties; the beneficiary and the importer (through the Issuing Bank) must agree to it. There is usually a fee attached to an amendment, and in some cases it can be difficult to obtain, because the importing country’s government gets involved (the import license may have to be changed) or because the change is not to the advantage of the importer (a delay in shipping date, for example). In the overwhelming majority of the cases, though, the problem can be solved to the satisfaction of both parties; one personal banking acquaintance could only recall of one “deal gone bad” in twenty years of Letter of Credit management.
Given these potential problems, it should be evident that it is crucial for the exporter to pay close attention to the terms of the Letter of Credit, and attempt to adhere to them as closely as possible. In a related manner, great care should be given to the preparation of the pro-forma invoice, as this is the document upon which the Issuing Bank relies to issue the Letter of Credit. In those few cases in which the Letter of Credit does not reflect exactly the pro-forma invoice (misspellings, for example), it is wiser to issue an invoice which matches the Letter of Credit rather than attempt to obtain an amendment. This is obviously difficult to do on an automated invoice processing system, but can quickly become an issue. Actually, many bankers have “horror stories” of Issuing Bank refusing payment on a Letter of Credit because there is a typo on the Letter of Credit—and error on their part as they miscopied the pro-forma invoice—which obviously does not appear on the commercial invoice. This can be construed as a ploy to generate additional amendment fees from a “hostage” exporter, but it is unfortunately prevalent at some banks. To their defense, though, a Letter of Credit issued by a bank in a third-world country may have been typed by a clerk with no knowledge whatsoever of the exporter’s language.
UCP 500
The UCP 500 is the Universal Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit, 1993 Revision, Publication 500 of the International Chamber of Commerce. It is publication that details the responsibilities of the applicant and of the beneficiary. It also attempts to address most of the areas in which there could be misunderstandings between the Issuing Bank, the Advising Bank, the applicant, and the beneficiary. Because of the jurisprudence that has accumulated with the almost universal usage of UCP 500, it is greatly preferable to always follow its guidelines, and request that the Letter of Credit be issued “subject to” the UCP 500.
Whenever a Letter of Credit is issued through the SWIFT network, it is by convention issued under UCP 500 guidelines otherwise noted. Since most banks belong to the SWIFT network, almost all Letter of Credit are therefore issued under UCP 500.
More Complications Yet
Things can get a lot more complicated in a Letter of Credit transaction as yet more parties can get involved; for example, the exporter’s bank may feel that it is unqualified to advise the Letter of Credit and will request that another, large or more experienced bank become the Advising Bank. In some cases, the Advising Bank and the confirming Bank are in different countries, leading to the possible situation where there are two Correspondent Banks involved. The worst-case scenario is probably much more horrid than that, and it can quickly become quite confusing.
Drafts
It is possible to add a draft (see Section 5-6) to a Letter of Credit. The draft is an instrument that legally binds the importer to pay within a certain period of time. This allows the exporter to grant commercial credit to the importer whenever it is deemed necessary. If no draft is attached to a Letter of Credit, the assumption is that the importer is not granted any credit (i.e., that the Letter of Credit is payable at sight; in other words, immediately).
Electronic Letter of Credit
Toward the end of 1999, the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT) and Imperial Bank created an electronic version of the Letter of Credit for Imperial Bank’s customers, which allows online applications, online tracking, and online dissemination of Letter of Credit to the beneficiary by the applicant. However, such a system is likely to be trumped by the TradeCard electronic system, which combines the advantages of an electronic Letter of Credit as well as electronic transfer of documents. Moreover, TradeCard already has acquired much greater banking industry acceptance.(see Section 5-8)
5-5d Stand-By Letters of Credit
A Stand-By Letter of Credit (is similar to a “simple” Letter of Credit, with a few exceptions. First, it generally has a much longer validity period, sometimes longer than a year. Second, it usually applies to more than one shipment from the exporter to the importer; under such a system, the exporter will make shipments on an Open Account basis, and will “call” on the Letter of Credit only if the importer is not meeting its obligations; for example, if it is not paying on time. These qualities make Stand-By Letters of Credit a tool of choice for handling business with a distributor, for example, or making a series of shipments to a customer.
The Stand-By Letter of Credit is an instrument that was created by United States banks as a substitute for bank guarantees, since U.S. bank are prohibited from offering them. Therefore, Stand-By Letters of Credit are often also used to secure the obligations of the seller/exporter (as in a performance bond) (see Section 5-9). The sums secured by Stand-by Letters of Credit total $700 billion, an amount roughly four times as large as the amount secured by traditional Letter of Credit.
The rules for Stand-By Letters of Credit are regulated by the International Stand-By Practices ISP98, a series of eighty-nine rules governing the language, documentation, and practices of these Letters of Credit.
5-5e Applicability
A Letter of Credit used to be the instrument of choice in international transactions, especially in those cases in which the exporter had no pre-existing business relationship with the importer, or when the importer was located in a country that was considered to be risky. It still is an outstanding means of making sure that the exporter will be paid, and is recommended in situations in which the exporter is risk-averse, new to the business of exporting, has substantial exposure in the transaction in question, or in those cases in which there is some uneasiness regarding the credit-worthiness of the importer.
However, it is often a disadvantage to request a Letter of Credit because of the costs (and the cumbersome process) associated with a Letter of Credit. It is also unwise to demand payment on such restrictive terms when other competitors can offer Open Account terms. Therefore, it may be a more sensible alternative, especially in Western Europe, to offer terms that are more favorable to the importer and use commercial insurance to cover the commercial risk.
5-5f URR 525
The International Chamber of Commerce also has published a document entitled Uniform Rules for Bank-to-Bank Reimbursements under Documentary Credits. These rules outline the responsibilities of the banks involved in an international transaction conducted under the UCP 500, and in which payment to the exporter is made directly by the Advising Bank (or by the Correspondent Bank of the Issuing Bank). The paying bank is then reimbursed by the Issuing Bank. This practice is becoming more and more common as a means to expedite the process of a Letter of Credit. The International Chamber of Commerce felt that Uniform Rules were necessary in this matter. Although these rules apply to banks rather than exporters, it might be advisable to refer to them before requesting payment from the Advising or the Correspondent Bank of the Issuing Bank.
5-6 Documentary Collection
5-6a Definition
Documentary Collection is a process by which an exporter asks a bank to "safeguard" its interests in the foreign country by not releasing the documents (specifically the bill of lading, which is the certificate of title to the goods (see Chapter 7)until the importer satisfies certain requirements, most often paying the exporter or signing a financial document (called a draft or a bill of exchange() promising that it will pay the exporter within a given amount of time. This allows the exporter, should the importer decide not to take delivery of the goods, to have them shipped back to the exporting country and to lose only the costs of shipment rather than the total value of the goods. Another possibility is to find another customer for these goods.
The exporter can set up a Documentary Collection through its own bank, who then acts as the Remitting Bank by collecting the documents from the exporter and sending them to a bank in the importing country (the Presenting Bank) along with an instruction letter (see Section 5-6e).
5-6b Sight Draft
One alternative is for the exporter to request a bank in the importing country (the Presenting Bank) to deliver the documents to the importer (also called the drawee) only after it has collected payment. This is often called either a "Documents against Payment" (D/P) or a sight draft transaction, with the latter meaning that the draft (a promissory note) is payable "at sight" (i.e., immediately). In this case, the exporter retains the title to the goods, embodied in the bill of lading or air waybill, until payment is made and the bill of lading or air waybill is given to the importer.
5-6c Time Draft
In some cases, the exporter may want to grant some credit terms to the importer but still want some means to ensure it will be paid. In that case, it can request that the bank exchange the documents against a time draft: the importer has to sign (endorse) a document promising it will pay within a certain time (generally a multiple of thirty days: 30, 60, 90 days are the most common credit terms) after the draft is endorsed. The Presenting Bank should specifically be instructed to remit the documents when the draft is signed ("Documents against Acceptance" [D/A]), or to remit them against payment (D/P), in which case the importer will not take title to the goods until after payment is made, a requirement which mostly defeats the purpose of granting credit. Specifically because of problems associated with D/P and date drafts( (specifically the custody of the goods between their arrival in the importing country and the time they become the property of the importer), the International Chamber of Commerce advises that “Collections should not contain bill of exchange payable at a future date with instructions that commercial documents are to be delivered against payment.”
A draft (or a bill of exchange) is a legal document in the importing country, in which the importer officially recognizes a commercial debt toward the exporter. This makes it easier to collect payment if the importer decides not to honor its commitment, as the default is now a domestic issue rather than an international one, a dispute over which a domestic Court would have no problem ruling. Specifically, in the instructions to the Presenting Bank, it is possible to request a protest in case of a nonpayment on a draft, which is a legal process which can have serious consequences for an importer; it may be difficult (if not impossible) for the importer to obtain credit after it has been recorded that it does not honor its debt. In some countries, such defaults are published prominently in the local business press, tarnishing the reputation of a business.
5-6d Date Draft
Another type of draft is a date draft, which is another way of granting credit to the importer. The difference is that the credit is extended to the importer for thirty, sixty, or ninety days from the shipment date rather than from the endorsement of the draft. The shipment date is determined by the main contract of carriage, generally the date at which the ocean bill of lading or the air waybill is issued. The advantage of the date draft over the time draft is that the exporter has control over the date at which shipment is initiated (and therefore over the date at which the payment is due), whereas it has no control over the date at which the importer will endorse the draft.
A date draft transaction therefore alleviates one of the problems of Documentary Collection in general, which is the date at which the importer will endorse the draft. Under the Uniform Rules for Collection, the bank must notify the importer as soon as it receives the documents. However, the importer has no incentive to come to the bank to collect them-if the draft is a sight or time draft-since delaying endorsement delays payment as well.
5-6e Instruction Letter
In addition to the "normal" documents (invoice, bill of lading, certificates, licenses, and such) and to the draft, each Documentary Collection should include an instruction letter( in which the exporter-through the Remitting Bank-tells the Presenting Bank what it is expected to accomplish.
The instruction letter is a document in which the Remitting Bank instructs the Presenting Bank on the procedures it should follow in its dealings with the importer; for example, whether the documents should be exchanged against payment (D/P) or against an acceptance of the draft (D/A), but also what the procedures should be if the importer refuses to sign the draft, if the importer refuses to pay for the fees (if any), or if the importer does not honor its signature: the Presenting Bank could be asked to file a protest, for example.
This instruction letter is the only document that the Presenting Bank will follow in a Documentary Collection: the bank does not need to find its instructions among the other documents that accompany the Documentary Collection: the International Chamber of Commerce is quite clear about this issue in its new Uniform Rules for Collections (URC 522) (see Section 5-6h). It is also preferable to mention in the instruction letter that the collection is subject to URC 522.
5-6f Trade Acceptance
The responsibilities of the Presenting Bank in the importing country generally stop at notifying the importer that the documents have arrived and at requesting that the importer endorse the draft (D/A) or at requesting payment (D/P) before releasing the documents. This process is called trade acceptance---sometimes “'trader's acceptance"----as the importer has control over the decision to accept or reject the draft and over the timing of the endorsement.
This could be somewhat inconvenient for the exporter, as the importer could delay acceptance of the draft for an inordinate amount of time a problem that can be solved with a date draft-or even refuse to sign the draft. In such a case, the exporter still has title, but over merchandise which is warehoused in a foreign country. The costs associated with warehousing goods in an unknown location, as well as the risks of pilferage and the exporter's difficulties in arranging for such storage can lead unscrupulous importers to take advantage of the situation by extorting better terms from the exporter (e.g., a discounted price, given the costs of repatriating the goods) before signing the draft.
5-6g Banker's Acceptance and Aval
The problems presented by a trade acceptance can be solved by requesting a banker's acceptance(. In this case, it is the Presenting Bank that endorses the draft on behalf of the importer. The bank will usually endorse the draft immediately upon receipt of the documents, and the endorsement of the bank engages the responsibility of the importer: it signs on behalf of the importer. The Presenting Bank is unlikely to offer a banker's acceptance unless it feels in a position to "aval" the draft.
An aval is a promise by the Presenting Bank that the importer will honor the draft, and that, should the importer default, the bank will make the payment. The bank therefore acts as a "co-signor" of the draft.
Although an aval is theoretically independent and different from a banker's acceptance, in practice the latter is often used as a substitute for “aval.” Therefore the Remitting Bank will often offer credit to an exporter based upon a "banker's acceptance" as it understands that the credit risk is now based upon the creditworthiness of the Presenting Bank, which is a situation almost as good as a Letter of Credit.
5-6h URC 522
The International Chamber of Commerce also publishes guidelines for Documentary Collections in a document called Uniform Rules for Collections (URC 522).
The main benefit of these rules is that they outline specifically the responsibilities of the Remitting Bank and the responsibilities of the Presenting Bank, as well as the limits to their responsibilities: for example, the Presenting Bank has to make sure that it promptly notifies the importer to come in to sign the draft (D/A), is responsible to make sure that the draft is signed properly (according to1ocallaws), but has no obligation to determine that the person has the authority to sign. All of these obligations (and limitations) are very well described and explained in the Commentary on URC 522.
One issue that is quite clear (and a change from the previous Uniform Rules for Collections [URC 322]) is the inclusion of an obligatory instruction letter to the Presenting Bank, which clarifies what the Presenting Bank has to do with the documents. Because the URC 522 is becoming the international standard for Documentary Collection although it has not reached the universal nature of the UCP500-it is advisable to always state in the letter of instruction that the collection is subject to the Uniform Rules for Collections (URC 522) of the International Chamber of Commerce.
5-6i Applicability
Documentary Collections are a good way to conduct international sales because they are clearly less cumbersome (and less expensive) than Letters of Credit and provide a good amount of safety. The title remains in the hands of the exporter until the importer accepts the draft (D/A) or makes payment (D/P). This risk is further reduced if a banker's acceptance is requested.
However, Documentary Collections represent more risk for the exporter than a Letter of Credit, because payment is dependent upon the primary transaction (the contract of sale); the importer could refuse to sign the draft (invoking poor quality merchandise, for example) or delay signing the draft (until it has resold the merchandise), in which cases the exporter retains title, but does not get paid. A Letter of Credit, however, is not dependent on the primary transaction, but only on the documents; it will ensure payment as long as documents are in the proper form.
A Documentary Collection could be used for customers in which there is a fair amount of trust, but for which an Open Account transaction is out of the question for whatever reason. A banker's acceptance could be used for customers who refuse to conduct business on a Letter of Credit basis and about whose creditworthiness the exporter is uncertain.
5-6j Forfaiting
In those cases where the importer wants credit terms that are beyond what the exporter is comfortable giving for example, a five-year term IS requested on a piece of machinery when the exporter can only extend a 180 day credit--there is the possibility of using international forfaiting( as a means to extend this credit. In an international transaction, forfaiting is generally achieved with the help of a series of drafts from the importer, which have been given an aval by the importer's bank. Forfaiting is used for longer credit terms than factoring, which tends to be used for credit terms for up to 180 days: in contrast, forfaiting can be used for terms as long as seven years.
The exporter, once it has obtained an agreement from the forfaiting firm, will obtain a series of drafts, all with different due dates from the importer. It will then sell this series of drafts to the forfaiting firm, at a discount. The forfaiting firm purchases them without recourse, which means it cannot hold the exporter responsible for non-payment by the importer. Forfaiting is an arrangement that usually satisfies the credit requirements of the importer at no risk-and at a fairly moderate cost to the exporter.
5-7 Purchasing Cards--Procurement Cards
A number of banks have started offering a system of credit cards for their corporate accounts; no common terminology has yet emerged for these bank cards, and each bank has given this product a different name. However, the principle is the same.
The product originates from the observation that companies purchase myriad small items, from office supplies to small maintenance parts. In most instances, the traditional process to purchase these parts is through a centralized Purchasing Department that issues a purchase order, processes a significant amount of paperwork, and then pays an invoice. The idea of a procurement card is to allow a department to make certain purchases directly from a vendor, which is a much more expedient process. The procurement card is similar in concept to a consumer's credit card; it has a certain credit limit, it is billed directly to the department (or at least can provide an itemized billing statement showing which department is responsible for a specific purchase), and most importantly, it allows transactions to be conducted extremely rapidly. Moreover, the supplier is paid immediately-minus a certain transaction percentage, in the neighborhood of 2 percent-and the customer IS billed at the end of the month.
The advantages for international purchases are evident: the exporter is essentially paid "in advance,' the exchange rate on the transaction is essentially the best one can get, and the importer has some sort of recourse (in a way similar to a VISA or American Express card) if the merchandise is defective. It should be expected that this type of transaction will increasingly take place in international business, particularly for small items (maintenance parts) and will facilitate the handling of rush orders, which will increase the level of customer service a company can offer from its home country. So far, this product seems to present only advantages and the number of banks currently offering such a service is increasing rapidly.
5-8 TradeCard
Created by the World Trade Centers Association in 1994, TradeCard is a proprietary electronic system that is gaining greater and greater acceptance in the trade community and is an alternative that combines the advantages of Letters of Credit and those of procurement cards:
-No payment is made until all the documents are in order and there are no discrepancies.
-The buyer is obligated to pay if the documents are in order.
-The system is expedient (payment is received quickly).
TradeCard also has two advantages over both of these methods of payment in that it is extremely inexpensive, charging only $150 for a transaction up to $100,000, in contrast to 1 to 3 percent for Letters of Credit and 2 to 3 percent for procurement cards, and that it combines document handling as well as payments, which gives it an edge over other electronic systems such as SWIFTrade of Imperial Bank, and the Bolero system of the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (see Section 7-6b).
TradeCard encompasses several electronic tools: first, it does have a secure system for the transmission of documents, from the pro-forma invoice to the bill of lading, packing list, and other transportation documents. It also has a system that checks the creditworthiness of the customer and, should the importer be deemed creditworthy, guarantees payment to the exporter if the documents conform. This service is offered through a partnership with the Compagnie Francaise d'Assurance pour le Commerce Exterieur ( COFACE). Finally, TradeCard has a system that automatically settles invoices once the documents have been found to be in order and without discrepancies.
5-9 Bank Guarantees
5-9a Definition
A bank guarantee( is another instrument used in international trade, but is used in different situations: a bank guarantee is usually requested to secure the performance of the seller (exporter), rather than to ensure that payment will be made by the buyer (importer). This requirement happens in cases in which the exporter is a company contracting to build a plant, establish a drilling platform, or install a sewer system; for example, companies like Bechtel and Bouygues. A bank guarantee is applicable to all long-term contracts in which the importer wants to ensure that the work will be brought to completion. Frequently, the bank guarantee is offered by a group of banks rather than a single bank, because of the amounts involved. Finally, a bank guarantee is usually for an amount which is only a fraction of the total amount of the contract.
As in a Letter of Credit, a bank guarantee is an independent contract between the bank giving the guarantee (guarantor) and the beneficiary.
5-9b Guarantee Payable on First Demand (at First Request)
A bank guarantee payable at first request is one in which the beneficiary does not have to provide any evidence that the terms of the underlying contract between the contractor and the beneficiary have not been met; the Issuing Bank has to pay at the first request of the beneficiary, solely upon the presentation of a request for payment, sometimes accompanied by a statement from the beneficiary stating that the contractor is not meeting its obligations. No other proof is necessary. This type of bank guarantee is the most common one.
5-9c Guarantees Based Upon Documents-Cautions
In some cases, a guarantee can be made conditional upon presentation of certain documents rather than "on first demand." The beneficiary must present documents which demonstrate that the contractor is not meeting its obligations; such a document may be a ruling by a Court, or some other evidence as agreed upon in the terms of the guarantee.
The International Chamber of Commerce has issued a series of conventions regarding Documentary Bank Guarantees in publication No. 325, Uniform Rules for Contract Guarantees. These rules are not widely used, primarily because documentary guarantees are rarely used.
5-9d Stand-By Letters of Credit
Because United States Law prohibits bank guarantees, American banks instead offer the same type of financial instrument through their Stand-By Letters of Credit. The only difference between a Stand-By Letter of Credit and a bank guarantee is that the Stand-By Letter of Credit is documentary (i.e., the Beneficiary must present a document before collecting from the bank). A simple statement that the contractor is not performing is usually considered sufficient.
5-9e Types of Bank Guarantees
Several types of bank guarantees or Stand-By Letters of Credit are available:
- The tender guarantee or bid guarantee is one that is requested by a beneficiary to ensure that the contractor is bidding in good faith and will enter the contract if awarded.
-The performance guarantee is the most commonly used type of guarantee, and is used to ensure that the contractor finishes the project.
-The maintenance guarantee is used to ensure that the contractor performs the services necessitated by the contract after the completion of the project (i.e., maintenance and after-sale service).
-The advance payment guarantee or repayment guarantee is used to ensure that payments made by the beneficiary in advance of the work (to enable the contractor to purchase supplies or machinery) would be reimbursed if the contractor fails to start the project.
-The payment guarantee is used in a very different context. It covers the obligations of the buyer (often a distributor) toward the exporter, and is presented in Section 5-5d.
End-of-Chapter Question
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Why is it more difficult and riskier to collect receivables from a foreign purchaser?
2. What are the differences between political risks and commercial risks of non-payment?
3. Describe the concept of “cash in advance.”
4. Describe the process of "documentary collection."
5. Describe the mechanism of a "letter of credit" from the exchange of pro-forma information to final payment.
6. What is credit insurance? Why is it associated with "open account" transactions?
7. Several people claim that letters of credit will eventually-soon-be replaced by the concept of "TradeCard." What is this product, and why do those people think it has such a bright future?
8. Describe the concept of bank guarantees. What are the different types of bank guarantees?
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Endnotes
1. Platt, Gordon, “International collection services use local presence to get results,” The Journal of Commerce, April 1, 1998, p.9C.
2. Stecklow, Steve and Jonathan Karp, “itibank in India used collectors accused of strong-arm tactics,” The Wall Street Journal, May 5, 1999, p.A1.
3. Farnsworth, E. Allan, John O. Honnold, Steven L.Harris, Charles W.Mooney, Jr., and Curtis R.Reitz, Commercial Law, Cases and Materials, Fifth Edition, 1993, The foundation Press, Inc., Westbury, New York.
4. “Getting Paid” or “What’s a transaction for?”, World Trade, September 1999, pp.42-52.
5. Reynolds, Frank, “Nigerian scam fails to pull the $25 million carpet over this importer’s eyes,” The Journal of Commerce, August 12, 1998, p.2C.
6. “Market Focus: Asia, the vital statistics,” World Trade, June 2000, pp.30-31.
7. Reynolds, Frank, “Savvy exporters do credit checks,” The Journal of Commerce, May 3, 2000, p.9
8. Barovick, Richard, “Online systems rate buyers of exports,” The Journal of Commerce, April 27, 2000, p.10.
9. Exporter’s Guide to Foreign Sources for Credit Information, Trade Data Reports, 6 West 37th Street, New York, NY 10018.
10. Guide to Agencies Providing Foreign Credit Information, Foreign Credit Insurance Association (FCIA), 40 Rector Street, New York, NY 10006.
11. Linn, Gene, “specialists rate the reliability of foreign distributorships,” The Journal of Commerce, November 24,1999,p.9.
12. Barovick, Richard, “Exporters rely more on credit reports,” The Journal of Commerce, March 4,1998,p .1C.
13. Banham, Russ, “Credit clout: Export credit insurance offers low-cost insurance that protects shippers from non-payment,” International Business, March 1997, pp.8-44.
14. Barovick, Richard, “Export credit power,” The Journal of Commerce, March 25,1998,p.1C.
15. Perreira, Ray, “International factoring: The viable financing alternative,” World Trade, December 1999, pp.68-69.
16. Maulella, Vincent, “Payment pitfalls for the unwary,” World Trade, April 1999,pp.76-79.
17. Biederman, David, “A tale of letters of credit,” JoC Week, February 12-18, 2001,p.25.
18. Mehta, Ravi and R.Singh, “Freak and faulty L/C’s from third world and Eastern Europe,” The Exporter, September 1997,pp.15-17.
19. Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits: 1993 Revision (UCP500), 1993, publication No.500 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
20. Wunnicke, Brooke and Diane B.Wunnicke, UCP500 and Stand-By Letters of Credit, 1994, John Wiley and Sons, New York, New York
21. Simpson, Paul, “What’s ahead for top trade bank?” World Trade, June 2000, pp.78-81.
22. Tyler, Joseph W. “Financing exports,” in Export Practice: Customs and International Trade Law, Terence P.Stewart, editor, 1994, Practising Law Institute, New York, New York.
23. Bertrams, R.I.V.F., Bank Guarantees in International Trade, Kluwer Law and Taxation Publishers, Deventer, The Netherlands, 1990.
24. Platt, Gordon, “Rules for standby letters of credit will be implemented January 1,1999,” The Journal of Commerce, September 16,1998,p.9C.
25. International Standby Practices, ESP98, Institute of International Banking Law and Practices, Inc., publication No.590 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
26. Uniform Rules for Bank-Bank Reimbursements under Documentary Credit (URR 525), 1995,publication No.525 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
27. Uniform Rules Collection (URC 522),1995,publication No.522 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
28. Renolds, Frank, “Use caution with semi-secured terms,” The Journal of Commerce, October 20,1999,p.10.
29. Uniform Rules Collection (URC 522),1995,publication No.522 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
30. Uniform Rules Collection (URC 522),1995,publication No.522 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
31. Commentary on the ICC Uniform Rules for Collections,1995, publication No.550 of the International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Publishing S.A.,38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing , 156 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010.
32. Levine, Daniel, “Forfaiting: an alternative financing tool,” World Trade, December 1998,p.55/
33. Platt, Gordon, “Forfaiting helps exporters to remove risks involved in selling overseas,” The Journal of Commerce, April 9,1997,p.9C.
34. Block, Valerie, “National city to use processing clout for a procurement card,” American Banker, May 19, 1995.
35. Brevetti, Francine, “Trading plastic,” Global Sales Force, date unknown, p.12.
36. Platt, Gordon, “TradeCard automates international transactions,” The Journal of Commerce,
Novermber 23,1998,p.7A.
37. Biederman, David, “TradeCard gears for growth,” JoC Week, October 16-22,2000,p.29.
38. Atkinson, Helen, “New options from TradeCard,” JoC Week, March 26-April 1,2001,p.32.
39. Bertrams, R.I.V.F., Bank Guarantees in International Trade, Kluwer Law and Taxation Publishers, Deventer, The Netherlands,1990.
40. Bertrams, R.I.V.F., Bank Guarantees in International Trade, Kluwer Law and Taxation Publishers, Deventer, The Netherlands,1990.
Chapter 6
Currency of Payment (Managing Transaction Risks)
Outline
6-1 Sales Contracts’ Currency of Quote
6-1a Exporter’s currency
6-2b Importer’s currency
6-3c Third Country’s currency
6-4d The Special Status of the Euro
6-2 The System of Currency Exchange rates
6-2a Types of Exchange Rates
6-2b Types of Currencies
6-3 Theories of Exchange Rate Determinations
6-3a Purchasing Power Parity
6-3b Fisher Effect
6-3c International Fisher Effect
6-3d Interest Rate Parity
6-3e Forward Rate as Unbiased Predictor of Spot Rate
6-3f Entire Predictive Model
6-4 Exchange Rate Forecasting
6-4a Technical Forecasting
6-4b Fundamental Forecasting
6-4c Market-Based Forecasting
6-5 Managing Transaction Exposure
6-5a Risk Retention
6-5b Forward Market Hedges
6-5c Money Market Hedges
6-5dOptions Market Hedges
6-6 International Banking Institutions
6-6a Central National Banks
6-6b International Monetary Fund
6-6c Bank for Settlements
6-6d International Bank for Reconstruction and Development—World Bank
6-6e Ex-Im Bank
6-6f Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT)
End-of Chapter Questions
Endnotes
Key Terms
Artificial currency
call options
convertible currency
currency
currency block
currency futures v options
direct quote
dollarization
floating currency
forward exchange rate
hard currency
inconvertible currency
indirect quote
outright rate
pegging a currency
points
put points
soft currency
spot exchange rate
strike price
swap rate
term of sale
term of trade
6-1 Sales Contracts" Currency of Quote
The previous chapters have shown that, for each international sale, the exporter and the importer must agree on two particular points:
● The Terms of Trade under which the sale is conducted (i.e., the costs the exporter should pay, the costs the importer should pay, and the point at which the responsibility for the cargo shifts from one to the other). These responsibilities are determined by the Incoterm chosen.
● The Terms of Sale under which the transaction is performed (i.e., at what point in the transaction the exporter wants to be paid, and what its level of confidence is in the ability of the importer to pay). The exporter and the importer can choose any number of alternatives, from "Cash in Advance" to an "Open Account" transaction to a TradeCard.
However, there is still one more issue for the exporter and the importer to consider: the currency under which this transaction is undertaken. There are three alternatives possible: the exporter's country's currency, the importer's country's currency, or a third country's currency.
In the choice of a currency for a given transaction, two factors should be considered:
● the risk of currency fluctuation. This is a speculative risk (see Chapter 8 for a complete definition) for which there is the possibility of a gain or of a loss, depending on which "way"' the exchange rate fluctuates, and depending on who, of the exporter or the importer, is holding the currency risk.
● the convertibility of the currency (i.e., the degree to which a currency can be converted into other currencies). Major countries' currencies are full convertible—they are called hard currencies—and these currencies can be freely exchanged, at a moment's notice: they are also called convertible currencies.
However, some developing countries' currencies are not readily convertible into hard currencies, because the country has few exports and its government controls which imports get paid first. The ability to convert a currency into hard currency is generally measured in "months of foreign exchange cover" or an approximation of the size of the hard currency stock a given country has, expressed in months of import activities this stock can cover. In most cases, the lack of convertibility of the currency just delays the date at which it can be exchanged for hard currency. All currencies that are difficult to convert into hard currencies are called soft currencies.
Choice of Currency
T
he choice of a currency is a fundamental aspect of the sale: it can substantially affect the profitability of a sale for an exporter. Take for example a sale for US $1,000,000 on which an exporter was expecting to generate a 10 percent profit; its total costs are therefore US $900,000.
Suppose that the exporter and importer agree to conduct this transaction in European euro, and that the exchange rate at the time of the sale is $0.8600/; the exporter therefore bills the importer for 1,162,791.
Assume now that the exchange rate between the two currencies changes 5 percent by the time the actual payment is made, about a month later, and that the exchange rate at that time is $0.8170/
The profit that the exporter was anticipating was (0.1*$1,000,000) or $1,000,000, but it actually only earns a profit of [(1,162,791*0.8170)-900,000], or $50,000, which is 50 percent less that anticipated.
The reverse can also happen: the profitability of the importer can be drastically affected by an increase in the value of the currency that it uses to pay for its merchandise.
In some rare cases, the currency is not convertible at all (i.e., the currency cannot be exchanged for any other currency, at any time). More commonly, the currency has a different exchange rate for purchases and for sales. Finally, some currencies can be purchased, but not sold. These currencies are collectively called inconvertible currencies.
The three alternative currency possibilities for an international transaction can be summarized as follows:
6-1a Exporter's Currency
In the first case, the exporter and the importer agree that the currency of the transaction will be the currency of the exporter's country. For example, if the exporter is located in Germany and the importer is located in Colombia, then the transaction takes place in euros, the currency of (most of) the European Union.
In this case, the exchange rate fluctuation risk is nil for the exporter; all of the risks are borne by the importer, and it has to determine how it will handle its transaction risks. In addition, the possible convertibility problems of the currency are to be resolved by the importer.
6-1b Importer's Currency
In this case, the exporter and the importer determine that the currency of the transaction will be the currency of the importer's country. For example, if the exporter is located in Jordan and the importer is located in the United States, then the transaction takes place in U.S. dollars, the currency of the United States.
In this case, the exchange risk fluctuation risk is nil for the importer; all of the risks are borne by the exporter, and it has to determine how it will handle its transaction risks. It is also ultimately responsible for converting the currency.
6-1c Third Country's Currency
Finally, the exporter and the importer can agree that the currency of the transaction will be a third country's currency. For example, if the exporter is located in
Thailand and the importer is located in India, they may decide to use the U.S. dollar as the currency of the transaction.
This alternative presents several advantages for both the exporter and the importer; for example, they each bear the risks of currency fluctuation of their respective country's currency against the currency of the transaction. In this example, the exporter is responsible for the fluctuations of the baht against the dollar, and the importer is responsible for the fluctuations of the rupie against the dollar.
In some cases, the exporter and the importer choose an artificial currency (a
non-circulating currency) for a transaction, such as the Special Drawing Rights
(SDRs) of the International Monetary Fund, which are sometimes used for international contracts; such is the case of the Liability Conventions of the ocean shipping industry (see Section 9-6).
6-1d The Special Status of the Euro
The euro was first created as an artificial currency; in its early years, as the European Currency Unit (ECU), its value was determined by the value of a basket consisting of the various currencies of the European Union. When it was officially unveiled as the euro in 1999, its value was fixed in terms of each of the eleven (later twelve) currencies of the participating EU countries. Only in January 2002 did it become a circulating currency, losing its status as an artificial currency.
The euro is a unique case as a truly international currency; not only has it become the official domestic currency of twelve of the European Union countries, but it is also used for all of the intra-European trade in the euro-zone, and is therefore a currency used extensively to settle international debts. The stated goal of the
European Union is to eventually transform the euro as a challenger to the U.S. dollar as the preferred third-country currency.
All three of these alternatives present challenges, and call for some form of management of the risks presented by exchange rates.
6-2 The System of Currency Exchange Rates
In order to manage the risks presented by currency exchange rate fluctuations, it is necessary to have a good understanding of the functioning of the system of exchange rates. Unfortunately, this section can only be a cursory review of the current knowledge in this area; the reader interested in obtaining a greater understanding of the field of international corporate finance should refer to any number of excellent textbooks in this field.
6-2a Types of Exchange Rates
The exchange rate of two currencies is the value of one currency expressed in units of the second. For example, on March 11, 2002, the exchange rate for the euro against the U.S. dollar was $0.8753/euro (i.e., one euro was worth US $0.8753).s As the Wall Street Journal quotes it, the exchange rate is the midpoint between the bid and offer rates for exchanges of a value greater than $1,000,000 between banks.
The Financial Times published the midpoint, as well as the bid-offer spread. The actual exchange rate offered to a company seeking to purchase euros would be different: it would have to pay more, say $0.89, for every euro purchased. Reciprocally, the exchange rate offered to a company seeking to sell euros would be lower. It would collect less, say $0.86, for every euro sold.
Traders in foreign exchange consider two ways to quote a currency:
● the first way to value a currency is the direct quote, in which the value of the foreign currency is expressed in units of the domestic currency. For example, the direct quote for the U.S. dollar and the euro would be $0.8753/~, as of March 11, 2002. This is the preferred way of quoting the euro, the British pound, the Australian dollar, and the New Zealand dollar.
● the second way to value a currency is the indirect quote, in which the value of the domestic currency is expressed in units of foreign currency.
For example, the indirect quote for the yen and the U.S. dollar would be 128.36 yen as of March 11, 2002. Many currencies are traditionally expressed as indirect quotes: the Canadian dollar, the Swiss franc, and the Japanese yen.
It should be self-evident that:
ote
Indirectqu
e
Directquot
1
=
Spot Exchange Rate
The first type of exchange rate is the spot exchange rate, or the exchange rate for a foreign currency for immediate delivery. This "immediate delivery" is somewhat subject to interpretations that vary from country to country and, within one country, from one currency to another; however, it is roughly the price of a foreign currency to be delivered within forty-eight hours.
This is the exchange rate with which most international travelers are familiar: it is the one used by foreign exchange kiosks and banks all over the world (see Table 6-1).
Forward Exchange Rates
The second type of exchange rate is the forward exchange rate, or the exchange rate for a foreign currency to be delivered 30, 90, or 180 days from the date of the quote. The parties entering into a forward currency contract are committing to purchasing (and supplying) a foreign currency at a certain price on a certain date.
The exchange rates given are the mid-points for transactions of US $1,000,000 or more that take place between banks; the actual exchange rate obtainable by a company involved in international trade would be less favorable.
In the United States, the Wall Street Journal only publishes forward rates for four currencies (see Table 6-2). However, there is a forward market for just about any currency, and many are published in the Financial Times, which covers the forward exchange rates for the Czech krona as well as the Indian rupee and the Thai bhat.
The outright rate is the rate at which a commercial customer purchases or sells a foreign currency forward. However, in the interbank market, forward rates are quoted as a premium on —or a discount from —the spot rate. Such a forward rate is called the swap rate and is expressed in points that must be subtracted or added to the spot rate in order to arrive at the forward exchange rate. A point is the unit of the last digit quoted: for example, if the spot exchange rate for the Japanese yen is $0.00791/yen, then the forward swap rate for 180 days would be expressed at 85 points premium, which converts to a 180-day forward exchange rate of $0.007876/yen.
The reason behind such a swap rate is the practice of" swapping;' or the simultaneous purchase of one currency on the spot market and the sale of the same currency on the forward market, a method used to minimize a company's foreign exchange exposure.
Currency Futures and Options
Finally, some currencies are also traded in the currency futures' market as commodities: in the United States, futures of six currencies are traded on the Chicago
T A B L E 6-1 Selected Spot Rates for Foreign Currencies, March 11,2001
|
Country |
Currency |
US $ Equivalent (Direct Quote) |
Currency per US $ (Indirect Quote) |
|
Argentina |
Peso |
0.4367 |
2.2900 |
|
Australia |
Dollar |
0.5219 |
1.9159 |
|
Brazil |
Real |
0.4244 |
2.3560 |
|
Canada |
Dollar |
0.6316 |
1.5833 |
|
Chile |
Peso |
0.001510 |
662.05 |
|
China |
RMB |
0.1208 |
802769 |
|
Czech Republic |
Koruna |
0.02772 |
36.071 |
|
Denmark |
Krone |
0.1179 |
8.48 |
|
Hong Kong |
Dollar |
0.1282 |
7.7994 |
|
Hungary |
Forint |
0.003577 |
279.53 |
|
India |
Rupee |
0.02053 |
48.710 |
|
Indonesia |
Rupiah |
0.0001006 |
9945.0 |
|
Israel |
Shekel |
0.2144 |
4.6650 |
|
Japan |
Yen |
0.007791 |
128.36 |
|
Jordan |
Dinar |
1.4104 |
0.7090 |
|
Kuwait |
Dinar |
3.2563 |
0.3071 |
|
Lebanon |
Pound |
0.0006607 |
1513.50 |
|
Malaysia |
Ringgit |
0.2632 |
3.8001 |
|
Mexico |
Peso |
0.1103 |
9.0640 |
|
New Zealand |
Dollar |
0.4238 |
2.3348 |
|
Norway |
Krone |
0.1135 |
8.8124 |
|
Pakistan |
Rupee |
0.01672 |
59.825 |
|
Peru |
New Sol |
0.2864 |
3.4555 |
|
Philippines |
Peso |
0.01961 |
51.000 |
|
Russia |
Ruble |
0.3215 |
31.100 |
|
Saudi Arabia |
Riyal |
0.2666 |
3.7506 |
|
Singapore |
Dollar |
0.5496 |
1.8194 |
|
South Africa |
Rand |
0.0868 |
11.5150 |
|
South Korea |
Won |
0.0007622 |
1312.00 |
|
Sweden |
Krona |
0.0965 |
10.3603 |
|
Switzerland |
Franc |
0.5953 |
1.6797 |
|
Taiwan |
Dollar |
0.02865 |
34.900 |
|
Thailand |
Bhat |
0.02310 |
43.285 |
|
Turkey |
Lira |
0.00000073 |
13607000.0 |
|
United Kingdom |
Pound |
1.4205 |
0.7040 |
|
Venezuela |
Bolivar |
0.001069 |
935.50 |
|
|
SDR |
1.2520 |
7.7987 |
|
|
Euro |
0.8753 |
1.1425 |
T A B L E 6-2 Selected Forward Exchange Rates for Foreign Currency, March 11, 2001
|
Country |
Currency |
Delivery |
US $ Equivalent (Direct Quote) |
Currency per US $ (Indirect Quote ) |
|
Canada |
Dollar |
Spot |
0.6316 |
1.5833 |
|
Forward 30 Days |
0.6315 |
1.5836 |
|
|
|
Forward 90 Days |
0.6312 |
1.5844 |
|
|
|
Forward 180 Days |
0.6307 |
1.5856 |
|
|
|
Japan |
Yen |
Spot |
0.007791 |
128.36 |
|
Forward 30 Days |
0.007804 |
128.14 |
|
|
|
Forward 90 Days |
0.007829 |
127.73 |
|
|
|
Forward 180 Days |
0.007876 |
126.96 |
|
|
|
Switzerland |
Franc |
Spot |
0.5964 |
1.6797 |
|
Forward 30 Days |
0.5955 |
1.6794 |
|
|
|
Forward 90 Days |
0.5957 |
1.6787 |
|
|
|
Forward 180 Days |
0.5953 |
1.6768 |
|
|
|
United Kingdom |
Pound |
Spot |
1.4205 |
0.7040 |
|
Forward 30 Days |
1.4177 |
0.7054 |
|
|
|
Forward 90 Days |
1.4131 |
0.7077 |
|
|
|
Forward180 Days |
1.4060 |
0.7112 |
|
|
Mercantile Exchange-There are two differences between a forward exchange rate and a futures' contract exchange rate:
1. The amount of the foreign currency for which a company can purchase futures is fixed; they are only available in increments of 100,000 Australian dollars, 62,500 British pounds, 100,000 Canadian dollars, 125,000 euros, 12.5 million Japanese yen, and 500,000 Mexican pesos. This is incontrast with the forward market, in which any given amount can be purchased or sold.
2. The date at which the future has to be settled (purchased or sold) is fixed: it is always the third Wednesday of the month. This is in contrast with the forward market, in which any given date can be chosen in advance.
In addition to the futures market, there is also a currency options' market, which takes place, in the United States, at the Philadelphia Stock Exchange's United Currency Options Market. To add to the complexity, there are two styles of options: the U.S.-style option gives a company the right to exercise its option at any time until the expiration date, while a European-style option only allows it to exercise that option on that date.
There are also two types of options: call options and put options. A call option is the right to buy-but not the obligation to buy—a predetermined amount of foreign currency at a predetermined price (called the strike price ) within a predetermined period (at ]east under the U.S.-style options). A put option is the right to sell-but not the obligation to sell- the same. If a company decides not to exercise its option, it only loses the amount that it paid for that option.
An option is priced by" the "market" between companies wanting to purchase options and speculators and other companies who are selling options. Several mathematical models can be used in determining the pricing of options, but their complexity is beyond the scope of this textbook.
6-2b Types of Currencies
In determining the exchange rate risks carried by a specific transaction, it is helpful to determine the type of currency with which the exporter (or importer) is dealing. There are three types of currencies.
Floating Currencies
Floating currencies are foreign currencies whose value changes (or can change) daily against other currencies. For example, the U.S. dollar changes in value all the time as it is traded between companies having dollars and companies wanting dollars; only the market determines its value.
The countries representing the greatest percentage of world trade all have floating currencies. However, not all the floating currencies represent unpredictability for a company involved in international trade: only those currencies that are floating erratically, or those currencies which are considered "volatile" (i.e., Currencies which can experience a great deal of variation in their exchange rates from one day to the next) can present significant risk.
In order to squelch some of this volatility, currencies are sometimes "assisted" by their country's government, which intervenes in the foreign exchange markets, in order to sustain the value of a currency. Such policies can be quite onerous for Countries: in order to support the value of a currency, the government must purchase it in the market, and that is only achieved by selling foreign exchange, or the proceeds of export sales.
Most of the developed countries have currencies that are stable, that is, currencies for which it is reasonable to expect a predictable exchange rate. It's only under those conditions that an international firm will accept payment or agree to pay—in that country's currency.
Pegged Currencies
A number of countries have been plagued with very volatile currencies. There are several reasons for this situation, most notably the lack of a sustained level of trade, giving rise to proportionally larger demands on the currency from one month to the next. Since it was too complicated—and expensive—for the governments of these countries to intervene in the foreign exchange markets, they decided to "peg" their currency to another, more stable currency.
Pegging a currency makes it worth a fixed exchange rate relative to another, stronger currency. The exchange rate is therefore entirely predictable at any time.
In most instances, the currency chosen is that of the greatest trading partner, and therefore it is often the United States dollar; such was the case of the Argentinian peso, which, until February 2002, was pegged to the U.S. dollar. It is now a floating currency.
In some rare cases, the country can elect to completely eliminate its currency and replace it with the currency of another country altogether. This occurred in Panama and Ecuador, which have adopted the U.S. dollar as their currency, a phenomenon dubbed the dollarization of these economies.
Floating Currency Blocks--European Monetary System
Finally, there is the case of countries that trade so much with each other that they decide to create a currency block. Such was the case of the European Monetar System (EMS), which eventually gave rise to the creation of the common currency of the European Union, the euro.
The EMS was designed in such a way that the currencies of the member countries would have to stay within a few percentage points of each other's value, a policy which was called the Exchange Rate Mechanism (ERM). In the beginning of this experiment, the maximum percentage variation allowed was 5 percent, and toward the end of the system, it was as low as 1 percent. Such variations were continuously controlled by the governments of the European countries, which intervened routinely in the foreign exchange markets. Such a system allowed the EMS currencies to float as a "block" against other non-EMS currencies, while maintaining a very stable foreign exchange environment within the European Union, a situation that greatly promoted trade among the Union members.
Eventually such a block can evolve into a fixed exchange rate between all the internal currencies. In Europe, the fixed exchange rates were established in terms of an artificial currency, whose value was determined by the values of a basket of the internal currencies. Finally, on January 1, 2002, all internal currencies were eliminated and the European euro became the only circulating currency for twelve of the European countries (see Table 6-3).
It is likely that the EMS will be resurrected as the European Union expands its membership to other countries, before these countries' currencies are replaced by the euro.
6-3 Theories of Exchange Rate Determinations
In order for a company to determine what its risks are in an international currency transaction, it is imperative to understand how exchange rates are determined.
T A B L E 6-3 Value of the Euro to Previous National Eurozone Currencies on January 1, 2002
|
These countries adopted the euro on January 1, 2002 |
|
|
On January 1 2001,1 Euro= |
|
|
Belgium(franc) |
40.3399 BEF |
|
Germany (mark) |
1.95583 DEM |
|
Spain(peseta) |
166.386 ESP |
|
France (franc) |
6.55957 FRF |
|
Ireland (punt) |
0.787564 IEP |
|
Italy (lira) |
1936.27 ITL |
|
Luxemburg (franc) |
40.3399 LUF |
|
The Netherlands (guilder) |
2.20371 NLG |
|
Austria (schilling) |
13.7603 ATS |
|
Portugal (escudo) |
200.482 PTE |
|
Finland (markka) |
5.94573 FIM |
|
Greece (drachma) |
340.750 GRD |
T A B L E 6-4 European Countries that Have Not Adopted the Euro
|
Country (currency) |
Status |
|
Denmark(markka) |
Denmark has rejected the euro |
|
United Kingdom (pound) |
The U.K. will hold a referendum later to decide on the adoption of the euro |
|
Sweden (krona) |
Sweden will hold a referendum later to decide on the adoption of the euro |
Once a company's management understands the theories behind the exchange rate fluctuations, it can then forecast them, and therefore determine what would be its best strategy for a specific transaction.
There is a total of five different, complementary theories that help explain the variations between two countries' exchange rates. After each one is presented, Section 6-3f and Figure 6-6 will summarize how these theories interact and influence the change in the spot exchange rate of two currencies.
6-3a Purchasing Power Parity
In its absolute form, the Purchasing Power Parity theory holds that exchange rates should reflect the price differences of each and every product between countries.
The idea is that exchange rates should fluctuate in such a way as to "equalize" the price differences of similar products between countries, so that a set amount of currency would purchase the same goods in any country of the world.
However, this is essentially impossible to achieve (and measure), given the disparity of goods and services that are purchased worldwide: even for a perfectly uniform good, there are wide discrepancies from one country to the next. This is illustrated very well with the Big Mac Index, published by the Economist (see Table
6-5), which observes that the price of one of McDonald's Big Mac sandwiches can vary from 33 percent (in South Africa) to 148 percent (in Switzerland) of the U.S. price. In effect, the price of a Big Mac is 4.5 times as much in Switzerland as it is in
South Africa.
Practically speaking, the absolute Purchasing Power Parity can be determined by using a "basket of goods" and calculating how much domestic currency an average person would have to spend to purchase it. The World Bank uses this version of the Purchasing Power Parity to determine the GDP per capita (PPP adjusted) of all the nations of the world.
T A B L E 6-5 The Big Mac Index
|
In this famous study from The Economist, the Purchasing Power Parity of worldwide currencies exemplified by the cost of a McDonald’s Big Mac. |
|||||
|
Country |
In Local Currency |
In U.S. Dollar |
Country |
In Local Currency |
In U.S. Dollar |
|
United States |
$ 2.49 |
2.49 |
Malaysia |
M$5.04 |
1.33 |
|
Argentina |
Peso 2.50 |
0.78 |
Mexico |
Peso 21.90 |
2.37 |
|
Australia |
A$3.00 |
1.62 |
New Zealand |
NZ$3.95 |
1.77 |
|
Brazil |
Real 3.60 |
1.55 |
Peru |
New Sol8.50 |
2.48 |
|
Britain |
_1.99 |
2.88 |
The Philippines |
Peso 65.00 |
1.28 |
|
Canada |
C$3.33 |
2.12 |
Poland |
Zolty5.90 |
1.46 |
|
Chile |
Peso 1,400 |
2.46 |
Russia |
Ruble 39.00 |
1.25 |
|
China |
Yuan10.50 |
1.27 |
Singapore |
S$3.30 |
1.81 |
|
Czech Republic |
Koruna56.28 |
1.66 |
South Africa |
Rand 9.70 |
0.87 |
|
Denmark |
DKr24.75 |
2.96 |
Sweden |
SKr26.00 |
2.52 |
|
Eurozone |
€2.67 |
2.37 |
Switzerland |
SFr6.30 |
3.81 |
|
Hong Kong |
HK$11.20 |
1.40 |
Taiwan |
NT$70.00 |
2.01 |
|
Hungary |
Forint459 |
1.69 |
Thailand |
Bhat 55.00 |
1.27 |
|
Indonesia |
Rupiah16.000 |
1.71 |
Turkey |
Lira4,000,000 |
3.06 |
|
Israel |
Shekel 12.00 |
2.51 |
Venezuela |
Bolivar2,500 |
2.92 |
|
Japan |
¥262 |
2.01 |
|
|
|
In its relative form, as used in international finance as a determinant of changes m exchange rates, the Purchasing Power Parity theory holds that exchange rates should reflect the differences in inflation rates between countries. In other words, if the inflation rate is higher in one country, then its currency should decrease in value relative to other currencies. This can be illustrated mathematically as:
t
t
F
country
in
rate
lation
D
country
in
rate
lation
D
country
in
attime
F
currency
of
value
spot
D
country
in
attimet
F
currency
of
value
spot
)
inf
1
(
)
inf
1
(
0
+
+
=
or
t
F
t
D
t
e
S
e
S
)
inf
1
(
)
inf
1
(
)
(
)
(
0
+
+
=
and schematically as shown in Figure 6-1.
6-3b Fisher Effect
The Fisher Effect is the observation that a country's nominal interest rate (what a borrower actually has to pay for a loan) comprises both the inflation rate in that country and the real interest rate that borrowers are paying. This real interest rate is expected to be "uniform" throughout the world. In other words, the theory holds that people, expect the same real interest rate in every country all points in time. Therefore, countries with high inflation rates should expected to have high nominal interest rates. The mathematical representation of this phenomenon is:
(1 + real interest rate) x (1 + inflation rate) - 1 + nominal interest rate
or
(1 + rir)(1 + inf) = 1 + nir or nir= inf + rir + (inf*rir) ≈ inf + rir
and schematically as shown in Figure 6-2.
6-3c International Fisher Effect
The International Fisher Effect is the observation that exchange rates reflect the differences between nominal interest rates in different countries. It posits that, if nominal interest rates are higher in country F than in country D, then country F' currency should be expected to decrease in value relative to country D's currency.
Conceptually, the expected spot rate reflects the fact that an investor would get the same yield on an investment, whether it is made in country D or country F.
Mathematically, this can be described as:
F
country
in
rate
erest
al
no
D
country
in
rate
erest
al
no
D
country
in
t
time
at
F
currency
of
value
spot
D
country
in
t
time
at
F
currency
of
value
spot
int
min
1
)
int
min
1
(
)
1
(
+
+
=
+
or
)
1
(
)
1
(
)
(
)
(
1
F
D
t
t
nir
nir
e
S
e
S
+
+
=
+
and schematically as shown in Figure 6-3.
6-3d Interest Rate Parity
The Interest Rate Parity theory links the forward exchange rate of a foreign currency to its spot rate, using the differences in nominal interest rates between the foreign country and the domestic country. The principle is that the forward exchange rate should be expressed as a discount if the foreign country is experiencing higher nominal interest rates than the domestic country, and should reflect a premium if the foreign nominal interest rates are lower.
In other words, at time t, the forward exchange rate
)
(
1
t
t
e
F
+
for delivering currency F n days from t—that is, at time t+l— reflects the difference between the nominal interest rate in country D and the nominal interest rate in country F, adjusted for the length of n days.This relationship translates mathematically as:
F
D
t
t
t
n
nir
nir
n
e
S
e
S
e
F
-
=
-
360
*
)
(
)
(
)
(
and schematically as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Interest Rate Parity
6-3e Forward Rate as Unbiased Predictor of Spot Rate
This theory holds that forward exchange rates for currencies are good predictors of the future spot exchange rates of that currency. In other words, if the forward rate for a currency shows a discount of 2 percent for a maturity date of n days, then the spot rate in n days should be 2 percent lower than it is today.
Conceptually, the relationship is that the forward exchange rate of currency F
at time t in country D for delivery at time t+l is the expected (average) spot value of currency F at time t+l in country D.
This can be expressed mathematically as:
)
(
)
(
1
1
+
+
=
t
t
t
e
S
e
F
and schematically as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Forward Rates as Predictors of Spot Rates
6-3f Entire Predictive Model
The five relationships can be combined to understand how each can be used to forecast expected spot exchange rates, as shown in Figure 6-6.
6-4 Exchange Rate Forecasting
It should now be evident that forecasting exchange rates is difficult. In addition to the five theories mentioned in the preceding section, there are always political changes, unpredictable economic variations, and the occasional natural catastrophe that influence the exchange rate of a given currency. Figure 6-7 illustrates the exchange rate of the Japanese yen with the U.S, dollar over the past thirty years; it has been altogether very unpredictable, although reasonably stable in the short run. Historical exchange rates can easily be obtained, for any currency, from the Bank of Canada and from the Pacific Exchange Rate Service at the University of British Columbia.
There are three general methods that can be utilized for forecasting exchange rates, and, again, the reader should refer to textbooks dealing with forecasting specifically in order to understand these techniques better. Only a cursory review is made here.
6-4a Technical Forecasting
The so-called technical forecasting methods are essentially all based upon time series analysis, from simple moving averages (something that can be done easily on a spreadsheet) to sophisticated ARIMA (Auto-Regressive Integrated Moving Average) —also called Box-Jenkins—methods and neural-network models which require dedicated software packages and pretty powerful computers. Several possible sources on technical forecasting exist.
Figure 6-6 Understanding How Exchange Rates Change
Technical forecasting is based on the premise that future movements in the value of a currency are "mathematically" linked to its past movements, and use techniques that extract patterns in the historical data. These patterns are then duplicated with very recent data to forecast the future exchange rates of the currency.
Such technical forecasts are valuable in determining the possible variations of a currency's exchange rate in the short run. In the long run, they tend to accumulate errors fairly quickly, as they ignore the economic fundamentals of exchange rate determination.
6-4b Fundamental Forecasting
The idea behind fundamental forecasting is to integrate all of the theories presented in Section 6-4 into a mathematical, causal model that would use the exchange rate of a specific currency as the dependent variable and the expected inflation rates, nominal interest rates, forward interest rates, and real interest rates as the independent variables. Fundamental forecasting is "just" the use of a large multiple linear regression and of ANOVA Analysis of Variance techniques, and it can be done with any good spreadsheet program. However, there are several pitfalls with causal models, and a good survey of such models should be undertaken before they are used. A good source of information on causal models is a text by Neter, Wasserman, and Kutner.
The problem with causal models in general, and especially in the case of foreign exchange forecasting, is the difficulty in accounting for all of the possible influences on a given currency's exchange rate—it is impossible to isolate its movements to a single pair of currencies—and, at the same time, limit the inevitable collinearity of the independent variables. Novices tend to increase the number of independent variables, as it increases the R2, but often overlook the problem of collinearity that this strategy brings along.
6-4c Market-Based Forecasting
Market-based forecasting is based on the premise that "the market knows best" and that, therefore, the forward exchange rate of a given currency is the best unbiased predictor of the future spot rate of a particular currency.
Since it is very likely that speculators have conducted their own analytical and mathematical forecasts for a given currency, it is quite logical to conclude that the forward exchange rate includes the entire wisdom of the market, and that, therefore, !t is the best predictor of the future value of a currency.
However, this assumption may be incorrect, as forward rates often reflect the futures' contract rates, which are set by speculators who may include people motivated by entirely different motives than the actual purchase and delivery of a currency. Such was the case with George Soros in 1992 when he decided to "bet" against the British pound, driving the government of the United Kingdom to spend a large amount of foreign currency to sustain its value, and eventually forcing the pound out of the Exchange Rate Mechanism (ERM) of the European Union.
Moreover, the forward rates do not account for government interventions, which can wreak havoc on the actual spot rates of currencies. For example, in the spring of 2002, the Japanese government consistently kept the value of the yen down, in order to boost the Japanese economy through undervalued exports. The forward rates also do not reflect the possibility of an unexpected change or a currency crisis; such was the case when the Argentinian peso, which was pegged to the U.S. dollar, suddenly was allowed to float on January 6, 2002, and reached $0.25 on March 25, 2002.
6-5 Managing Transaction Exposure
Whenever a company is engaged in an international transaction and agrees to use a foreign currency to conduct this transaction, it is then exposed to a certain amount of risk, due to possible fluctuations m currency exchange rates. Such risk is called transaction exposure and can be handled in one of two ways: it can be retained by the firm, or it can be "hedged;' or reduced, by using one of three possible techniques.
Under these general guidelines, firms can pursue two strategies:
1. Determine what its decision should be on an invoice-by-invoice basis, depending on the currency at stake, the amount of the invoice, and its forecast of the currency's exchange rate.
2. Set a policy that the firm follows for all of its foreign currency receivables and payables.
In either case, the choice of the strategy should be dependent on the forecast that the company makes of the exchange rate at stake; it also depends on the size of the firm and of its ability to weather a currency risk--on the size of the invoice, and on the company's degree of sophistication in terms of international finance. In general terms, it is almost always better for a firm to hedge its foreign exchange risks, with only a few exceptions; however, certain firms choose to retain their currency fluctuation risks instead.
6-5a Risk Retention
The strategy of risk retention is fairly simple; the company decides that it is best to retain the risk of currency fluctuation. There are three different types of companies that will decide to systematically retain their currency risks:
● Very large traders—importers and exporters, often in the same currency—which simultaneously carry risks on the "up" side--they can earn additional income because of a favorable exchange rate change and on the "down" side—they can lose money for exactly the same reason. Overall, for these firms, transaction exchange rate risks are a zero-sum game, and it is not necessary to hedge, as the positions they hold offset each other. Nevertheless, those firms tend to be very sophisticated in international finance, and they would actually hedge their positions, and even speculate in the currency markets.
●Exporters or importers that have little exposure (i.e., which are shipping for buying goods of fairly small value, in fairly small shipments, and therefore for which a currency loss would not have substantial financial consequences). Often, for these firms, the costs of hedging, or of determining whether they should hedge, exceed the benefits that they would accrue.
●Firms that do not evaluate the international currency transaction risks clearly; they are not following a specific policy: they just have no policy, or have a management that is not well versed in the intricacies of international trade. Those firms are also often the ones that cannot afford not to hedge, as they tend to be smaller, and therefore more susceptible to a partial loss due to exchange rate fluctuations.
6-5b Forward Market Hedges
The first of the strategies that a company can follow to protect itself from currency fluctuations is a forward market hedge. This strategy involves selling forward a future receivable in a foreign currency, or purchasing forward the currency necessary to cover a foreign payable. This strategy varies in its implementation for each situation. Two examples will make this strategy much clearer:
● A U.S.-based company is selling a product to an Italian firm on March 1,
2000; the invoice is payable in euros on June 1, 2000 (ninety-day credit).
The amount that the firm would like to collect is U.S. $200,000. If it used the spot exchange rate U.S. $0.9709/€—the firm could then bill the customer for €206,000. However, as of March 1, 2000, the ninety-day forward exchange rate for the euro is U.S. $0.9580/€, indicating that the market is expecting a decrease in the value of the euro against the U.S. dollar. The firm therefore decides to invoice its customer for $200,000/0.958 = € 208,770. A forward market hedge, in this case, would consist of the U.S. firm entering a forward contract with a bank, in which it would promise to sell €208,770 to the bank on June 1, 2000, at a predetermined (forward) exchange rate of U.S. $0.958/€. On that date, the U.S. company presents €208,770 to the bank and collects U.S. $200,000. The U.S. firm is unconcerned about the spot exchange rate of the euro on June 1, 2000.
● A German firm is purchasing a product from a British firm for ₤250,000. The machine is delivered on May 31, 2001, and payment is expected (in pounds) on August 31, 2001. On May 31, 2001, this amount was equivalent to €419,127.19 The German firm can use a forward market hedge by entering into a contract with a bank in which it promises to purchase₤ 250,000 on August 31, 2001, at a predetermined (forward) exchange rate of €1.597/£. On that date, the German firm hands €399,250 to the bank and obtains in exchange the £ 250,000 that it needs to pay its British supplier. The German firm is unconcerned about the spot exchange rate of the
British pound on August 31, 2001.
In either of these cases, the firm has eliminated its currency fluctuation risk by using a forward market hedge; it knew, with total certainty, at the time it entered the forward contract with the bank how much it would collect (U.S. firm) or how much it would have to pay (German firm).
6-5c Money Market Hedges
A money market hedge consists of using the banking system of the country of the currency in which the receivable or the payable is going to be paid. This can again be explained best with two illustrations:
●A firm located in Switzerland sells a piece of machinery to a firm located in Japan, for the equivalent of SwF 150,000; it will bill in Japanese yen, though. The transaction takes place on October 5, 2001, with a payment date of December 5, 2001. The transaction amount is expressed in Japanese yen, for a total of yen 11,145,105 since the exchange rate on that date is ¥74.3007/SWF. To protect itself from currency fluctuations, the Swiss firm can use a money market hedge, by borrowing from a Japanese bank the present value (as of October 5, 2001) of ¥11,145,105 on December 5, 2001. Supposing that the commercial lending rate in Japan was 3 percent per annum, the amount the Swiss firm would borrow would be ¥ (1-0.005) *
11,145,105 =11,089,379; it will pay the bank back on December 5, 2001, using the payment made by its customer. On October 5, 2001, the Swiss firm would then exchange those yen for SwF 149,251. The Swiss firm is unconcerned about the spot exchange rate of the yen on December 5, 2001.
● On June 28, 2001, a firm located in Denmark purchases raw materials from a firm located in Australia, which insists on being paid in Australian dollars. The amount of the invoice is A$ 20,000,000, payable on December 28, 2001. The Danish firm can use a money market hedge by investing a sum in an Australian bank that will mature to A$ 20,000,000 on December 28, 2001. Assuming an annual interest rate of 4 percent paid on deposits in Australia, the Danish firm would have to invest A$ 20,000,000/(1+0.02) = 19,607,850 to have enough to cover its obligation on December 28, 2001.On June 28, 2001, the Danish firm then converts DKr 88,070,620 into Australian dollars, The Danish firm is unconcerned about the spot exchange rate of the Australian dollar on December 28, 2001.
The money market hedging strategy is effective since it allows the firm to use the exchange rate as of the date of the transaction rather than speculate on the value of the exchange rate at the date of payment. In that respect, it is a strategy that minimizes the risks of currency fluctuations; the only cost to the Swiss firm is the interest it has to pay to the Japanese bank, in addition to the fees that will be charged. However, the amount of interest it pays should be the same as what it would have paid by borrowing the same amount in Switzerland, at least if the Interest Rate Parity holds. Similarly, the only cost to the Danish firm in addition to the fees is the opportunity cost of the investment, from which the interest earned in Australia must be deducted.
6-5d Options Market Hedges
It is also possible to hedge a foreign currency fluctuation risk with options. This is a yet more sophisticated alternative, which is essentially equivalent to remaining unhedged retaining the risk-and to purchasing an insurance policy to protect against unfavorable exchange rate fluctuations. If the exchange rate turns unfavorably, the firm can exercise its option its insurance policy-and is covered. If the exchange rate turns favorably, the firm can still benefit from this situation by not exercising its option, albeit while losing the cost of the option.
This strategy involves purchasing put or call options, or the option to sell or purchase certain currencies at a certain exchange rate on (European-style options) or before (U.S.-style options) a certain date. This agreed upon exchange rate is called the strike price, Here again, two examples will illustrate the concepts better than an abstract description:
●A company located in the United States sells a large piece of equipment to a firm located in the United Kingdom, and agrees to be paid in pounds. The invoice, for £ 1,000,000, was issued on November 1, 2001, but is not payable until March 1, 2002. The exporting firm can minimize its currency fluctuation risk by using an option hedge; it will purchase a put option-the right to sell £1,000,000—at an exchange rate of U.S. $1.4050/£. If the spot exchange rate on March 1, 2002, is lower than U.S. $1.4050/£, then the American firm will exercise its option and sell the currency at that price. If the spot rate is higher than .that, then the firm will let its option lapse and will sell the currency it received at the spot market rate. Since the exchange rate was U.S. $1.4188/£, the firm sold its pounds without using its option. The firm still incurred the cost of the option, which was approximately 1.25 percent of the contract amount, or about U.S. $17,562.50.
● A company located in Spain purchases a plant located in Canada. The contract is signed on August 1, 2001, and the firm has agreed to pay in three installments of CanS 1,000,000 each on November 1,2001, February 1, 2002, and August 1, 2002. In order to minimize its currency risks, the Spanish firm can use an option hedge by purchasing call options-the right to buy Cans 1,000,000—at exchange rates of € 0.7150/Cans$ for November 1,2001, € 0.7130/Can$ for February 1, 2002, and € 0.7090/Can$ for August 1, 2002. Since the spot exchange rate for the Canadian dollar was € 0.6949/Can$ on November 1, 2001, the Spanish firm did not exercise its option, and purchased the Canadian dollars on the spot market. Or February 1, 2002, the spot market was € 0.7297/Can$, and therefore the Spanish firm exercised its option and purchased the Canadian dollars at € 0.7130/Can$. As for its August 1, 2002, payment, the firm still has the possibility of saving money if the spot rate is lower than its option rate; if not, it will exercise its option. The cost of these successive options for the Spanish firm was approximately 1 percent, 1.5 percent, and 2.5 percent of the contract amounts for November, February, and August, respectively, for a total of Can$50,000.
The main problem with option hedging is that options are very expensive, which is somewhat understandable as they are only covering the "down side." The second issue is that options are only commonly traded for a limited number of currencies, and that the amounts are not as flexible as in forward markets. Nevertheless, some banks will write options that are tailored to their customers' needs.
For the sophisticated firm involved in international trade, this strategy has great potential.
For further information on this hedging strategy, the other hedging strategies described in this section, as well as additional strategies, the reader is referred to a number of textbooks in international finance or to textbooks on options and futures.
6-6 International Banking Institutions
There are several institutions that are involved in international banking; however, only a few of these have a function that is linked to international payments. A brief synopsis of each of these institutions is given in this section. The reader interested in gaining more information on these institutions should consult a textbook in
International Economics or International Banking.30'31
6-6a Central National Banks
In every country in the world, there is a Central Bank, or some institution which acts as a Central Bank: Great Britain has its Bank of England, the European Union has its European Central Bank (ECB), and the United States has the Federal Reserve System which, although not technically a Central Bank, fulfills the role of one. Each of the countries of the European Union has also retained its Central Bank, since only the control of the monetary supply is in the hands of the ECB;
France has its Banque de France and Germany has its cherished Bundes Bank.
Central Banks provide several services to the domestic banks of their respective countries. Their first role is the creation and control of the monetary supply, through market operations and the control of currency. This role can be one of maintenance or a more active role, such as executing monetary policy operations. Their second role is their function as a check clearinghouse where accounts regarding checks written on different domestic banks' accounts are settled. In some countries, they also "manage" if conceivable-the exchange rate of the national currency and the national foreign exchange reserves.
6-6b International Monetary Fund
The International Monetary Fund (IMF) was created in 1944 at the Bretton-Woods Conference; it was designed to oversee the fixed exchange rate system that the Conference had started. When exchange rates started to float in 1971--the end of the gold standard--the IMF changed its focus to helping countries manage their balance of payments. In particular, the IMF lends money to countries that experience difficulties with their balance of payments. These loans are usually accompanied by a number of conditions to which the country has to agree: inflation control and money supply growth are often on the list. The funds necessary for those loans are collected from the countries that become members of the IMF; they are assessed a "quota" that is determined by the country's economic size.32
The IMF is also the curator of an artificial currency called the "Special Drawing Rights" (SDR), which was designed to supplement the U.S. dollar in its role as the international currency. The SDR's value is determined by a basket of four currencies (U.S. dollar, European euro, British pound, and Japanese yen). Although the SDR is not often used by businesses, it is often used_ by governments to settle their debts with each other. It is also used in the settlement of disputes under the liability conventions of ocean cargo shipping (see Section 9-6).
6-6c Bank for International Settlements
The Bank for International Settlements was created after World War I to manage Germany's war reparation payments. Since then it has evolved into a major inter- national institution, providing support to Central Banks —which constitute its membership and particularly recently providing guidance to the new Central
Banks of the former Eastern Block Countries)3 Although membership was originally limited to European Central Banks, the United States' Federal Reserve System joined in 1994.
6-6d International Bank for Reconstruction and Development--World Bank
The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development known as the World Bank was created in 1945 after the Bretton-Woods Conference. Its purpose was to help countries rebuild their infrastructure after World War II, and it has slowly changed to become the bank in charge of financing large infrastructure projects. The government borrowing the funds must be a member of the IMF and the loan is usually repaid as a long-term loan.
6-6e Ex-lm Bank
The Export-Import Bank (Ex-Im Bank) is a federal agency of the United States' government. Its purpose is to provide assistance to U.S. exporters in the form of loans (only available to large exporters), loan guarantees (available to banks who finance exporters), or in the form of political risk insurance policies available through the Foreign Credit Insurance Association (FCIA). See Section 8-10c for further details.
6-6f Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial
Telecommunication (SWIFT)
The Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT) is a corporation supporting an Electronic Data Interchange network that was created by banks to obtain a secure and reliable means of transferring financial information internationally. In particular, it allows the communication of Letters of Credit and miscellaneous fund transfers. Because of the high level of security that the network enjoys, documents transferred through the network have the same value as original paper documents.
End – of – Chapter Questions
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. What are three of the possible choices that an exporter can make (in term of currency) for a specific transaction?
2. Explain the three different types of exchange rates. Find the three exchange rates for a currency of your choice and explain the values you find.
3. Explain the three different types of currencies. Give an example of each.
4. Choose two of the theories of exchange rate determination and explain them.
5. What does it mean for a firm to retain its currency fluctuation risk in a transaction?
6. There are three types of hedges that a firm can use to protect itself against transaction exposure. Choose one of them and explain it.
Endnotes
1. Baker, James C., International Finance: Management, Markets, and Institutions, 1998, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
2. Eiteman, David K., Arthur I. Stonehill, and MichaelH. Moffett, Multinational Business Finance, 1998, Eighth Edition, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Reading, Massachusetts.
3. Madura, Jeff, International Financial Management, 1998, South-Western Publishing, Cincinnati, Ohio.
4. Shapiro, Alan C., Multinational Financial Manage-ment, 1996, Fifth Edition, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. New Jersey.
5. "Currency Trading;' The Wall Street Journal, March12, 2002, p. C17.
6. "Currencies and Interest Rates;' Financial Times, U.S. Edition, March 12, 2002, p. 25.
7. Eiteman, David K., Arthur I. Stonehill, and MichaelH. Moffett, Multinational Business Finance, 1998, Eighth Edition, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Reading, Massachusetts.
8. Shapiro, Alan G., Multinational Financial Manage- ment, 1996, Fifth Edition, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
9. Peck, Earl, "Prices, interest rates, and exchange rates in equilibrium, unpublished research paper, Baldwin-Wallace College, Berea, Ohio.
10. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter); Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
11. Antweiler, Werner, "Pacific exchange rate service;'http://pacific.commerce.ubc.ca/xr/, March 23, 2002.
12. Bowerman, Bruce l. and Richard L. O'Connell, Time Series Forecasting, 1987, Second Edition, Duxbury Press, Boston, Massachusetts.
13. Box, George E., Gwilym M. Jenkins, and Gregory C. Reinsel, Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control, 1994, Third Edition, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
14. Makridakis, Spyros, Steven C. Wheelwright, and Victor E. McGee, Forecasting: Methods and Applications, 1983, Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, New York.
15. Masters, Timothy, Neural, Novel and Hybrid Algorithms for Time Series Predictions, 1995, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York, New York.
16. Neter, John, William Wasserman, and Michael H. Kutner, Applied Linear Statistical Models, 1985, Second Edition, Irwin, Homewood, Illinois.
17. Weiss, Gary, "George Soros, all warm and cuddly",Business Week, March 4, 2002, reporting on Michael Kaufmann's Soros: the Life and Times of a Messianic Billionaire 2002, Alfred A. Knopf, New York.
18. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter)" Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
19. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter),' Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange- convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
20. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter)" Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
21. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter)" Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
22. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter)" Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
23. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter)" Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
24. "Exchange rate look-up (historical currency converter)" Bank of Canada, http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/exchange-convert.htm, March 14, 2002.
25. Baker, James C., International Finance: Management, Markets, and Institutions, 1998, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
26. Eiteman, David K., Arthur I. Stonehill, and Michael H. Moffett, Multinational Business Finance, 1998, Eighth Edition, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Reading, Massachusetts.
27. Madura, ]eft, International Financial Management, 1998, South-Western Publishing, Cincinnati, Ohio.
28. Shapiro, Alan C., Multinational Financial Management, 1996, Fifth Edition, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
29. Edwards, Franklin R. and Cindy W. Ma, Futures and Options, 1992, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, New York.
30. Caves, Richard E., Jeffrey A. Frankel and Ronald W. Jones, WorM Trade and Payments: An Introduction, 1996 Seventh Edition, HarperCollins CollegePublishers.
31. Kim, Taeho, International Money and Banking, 1993, Routledge Publishers, London and New York, New York.
32. Daniels, John D. and Lee H. Radebaugh, International Business: Environments and Operations, 1992, Sixth Edition, Addison-Wesley Publishing, Reading, Massachusetts.
33. Siegman, Charles J., "The bank for international settlement and the Federal Reserve;' Federal Reserve Bulletin, October 1994, pp. 900-906.
Chapter 8
International Insurance
Outline
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8-1 Introduction
8-2Insureance Glossary
8-3 Perils of the Sea
8-3a Cargo Movements
8-3b Water Damage
8-3c overboard losses
8-3d Jettison
8-3e Fire
8-3f Sinking
8-3g Standing
8-3h General Average
8-3i Theft
8-3j Piracy
8-3k OTHER Risks
8-4 Peris Associated with Air Shipments
8-5 Insurable Interest
8-6 Risk Management
8-6a Risk Retention
8-6b Risk Transfer
8-6c Mixed Approach
8-7 Marine Insurance Policies
8-7a Marine Cargo Insurance
8-7b Hull Insurance
8-7c Protection and Indemnity
8-8 Coverages under a Marine Cargo Insurance Policy
8-8a Institute Marine Cargo Clauses-Coverage A
8-8b All Risks Coverage
8-8c Institute Marine Cargo Clauses-Coverage B
8-8d Institute Marine Cargo Clauses-Coverage C
8-8e With Average Coverage
8-8f Free of Particular Average Coverage
8-8g Strikes Coverage
8-8i Warehouse-to-Warehouse Coverage
8-8j Difference in Conditions
8-8k Other Clauses of a Marine Insurance Policy
8-9 Elements of an Airfreight Policy
8-10 Lloyd’s
8-10a Principles
8-10b Current Status
8-11 Commercial Credit Insurance
8-11a Risks Involved
8-11b Risk Management Alternatives
8-11c Insurance Policies Available
End-of- Chapter Questions
Endnotes
Key Terms:
average
barratry
classification society
franchise
general average
hazard
jettison
name
objective risk
particular average
peril
Protection and Indemnity Club (P&I)
Pure risk
Risk
Speculation risk
Subjective risk
Syndicate
underwriter
8-1 Introduction
One of the most complex issues in international logistics is the field of international insurance. Not only is the topic difficult to understand, but it also involves a plethora of vocabulary exclusively used in the marine cargo insurance field and nowhere else: jettison,' "barratry,' and “inchmaree”. In addition, the term "Average" denotes something else other than the arithmetic mean. The difficulty is compounded by the fact that there are centuries-old traditions and concepts, some of which have essentially not changed for that long, which can be interpreted either the British way or the United States way.
Nevertheless, the topic is of utmost importance: shipping goods abroad is fraught with perils. A company has to knowingly accept these risks or transfer them onto an insurance company. This chapter will first present some of the terms used in international insurance, then explain the risks associated with shipping goods internationally by ocean and by air and introduce possible strategies for dealing with those risks, and finally conclude with more details on the elements of a marine cargo insurance policy, which is the name used for this type of policy, whether the goods actually travel by ocean or by air.
Eventually, another form of insurance will be presented: commercial credit insurance, which is one of the alternatives available to cover one of the other great risks of international trade: the possibility that the importer will default on an "Open Account" transaction. For details on this and other terms of payment, see Chanter 6.
8-2 Insurance Glossary
Insurance uses a precise terminology linked to risks and it makes sense to understand this terminology before using it to develop risk management strategy.
Average A loss incurred on an ocean voyage by a cargo owner. It can be further qualified as a Particular Average or as a General Average.
Barratry An act of disobedience or willful misconduct by the captain or the crew of a ship that causes damage to the ship or the cargo.
General Average A loss incurred on an ocean voyage that involves all of the cargo owners on board, such as the case where the captain of the ship tosses overboard some of the cargo (see Jettison) to save the ship and the remainder of the cargo, or when the captain decides to ground the ship to prevent a total loss. The owners of the cargo saved by this action are indebted to the owners of the cargo sacrificed and to the owners of the ship.
Hazard A situation which increases the probability of a peril and therefore of a loss. For example, a hazard would be a storm, which increases the probability of the peril of water damage, or a poorly trained crew, which increases the probability of the peril of grounding.
Jettison The act of throwing overboard part of the cargo of a ship (or the fuel of an airplane) in an attempt to lighten the ship. The purpose of such an action is to save the ship, the remainder of the cargo, and the crew.
Particular Average A partial loss incurred on an ocean voyage; the cargo may have become wet from seawater, or may have been damaged by rough seas.
Peril The event that brings about a loss. For example, a fire, a collision, and a flood are perils.
Risk The chance or the probability of a loss. There are different types of risks:
Speculative Risk The chance or probability of a loss or a gain (i.e., an investment in the Stock Market).
Pure Risk The chance or the probability of a loss only. Pure risks can be insured against (i.e., transferred to an insurance company).
Objective Risk The chance of a loss that can be accurately calculated, because ample empirical data is available (probability of a fire causing a total loss on a residence) or because a good mathematical model has been developed.
Subjective Risk The perceived risk of a loss by an individual or company. Whether this perception is correct can only be settled by calculating the objective risk.
8-3 Perils of the Sea
A shipment by ocean is subject to a large number of risks, most of which are only vaguely familiar to a land-based exporter accustomed to shipping by truck or rail to its customers. However, these risks are frequent, with losses in the billions of U.S. dollars every year. The trade magazine Marine Digest and Transportation News lists incidents occurring every month in the territorial waters of the United States, and it is rare that there are fewer than fifteen reports per month of fires, groundings, or capsizings. Since the United States has pretty stringent policies for safety and sea-worthiness, it is not an exaggeration to estimate that it experiences fewer incidents than the rest of the world. Assuming a 5 percent "market share" of incidents worldwide, there are conservatively 300 maritime losses every month. Each of these involves cargo.
The perils of transporting cargo by ocean and to a lesser extent by road, rail, and air evidently have implications on insurance coverage. However, they also influence the way a company packages its products for export and the way it packs them in containers. Chapter 12 will specifically address the packing choices available to a shipper.
8-3a Cargo Movements
A shipment by ocean is subjected to numerous cargo movements, many more than during a strictly land-based domestic shipment. In the case of containerized cargo, the goods are placed in the container at the exporter's facility and loaded onto a truck. Generally, this is done carefully as the employees of the exporter are aware of the contents and of their value. However, once it has left the exporter's shipping dock, the goods are in the care of less scrupulous hands. The goods are unloaded in the port, placed in a holding area, handled a couple of times, then loaded onto the ship by a stevedore in a hurry, handled again several times in the same manner in the port of arrival, then loaded onto a truck for final delivery. A typical container will be handled four to six times in each of the ports of departure and destination. In some cases, the goods are loaded onto another ocean shipment as the container is transited though a port before being sent, by ocean, to its final destination.
However, it is on the ship that the cargo is subjected to the greatest number of shocks and movements. A ship moves in six directions at once, often in an irregular fashion, and repetitively, even during a voyage with good weather. If the weather is stormy, the cargo is shaken in often inconceivable ways: "boxes (containers) stowed on the outside, on either side of the bows, endure sixty-foot elevator drops. Plus, they are tossed in an arc, up and over, as the ship tilts to starboard.
8-3b Water Damage
Obviously, bad weather also affects the cargo in another way. As the ship tosses and shakes in a stormy sea, waves wash overboard and can slowly infiltrate the cargo containers or the break-bulk cargo on board. Pacific Ocean storms produce seventy-foot swells a couple of times a year, which submerge the decks of many containerships. At times, the ship can avoid such storms, but at other times, because they are on tight schedules, they choose not to, or because the storm is moving too fast, they cannot. The end results are that there is a strong possibility of water damage to the cargo on those ships unless the cargo is very well packed and protected.
While it is traditional for a shipper of higher value merchandise to request that the cargo be stored "under deck" (i.e., inside the ship) rather than "on deck" (outside, exposed to the elements), the way a container or cargo is actually stowed is mostly out of the control of the shipper. In addition, on very modern container-ships equipped with stack bars (see Figure 9-5), the concept of deck has disappeared, making the distinction moot and increasing the possibility that a cargo will be exposed to serious quantities of sea- and rainwater.
Another possibility is that the storm will cause cargo to shift on board and to damage the ship to the point where water seeps in the hull: "At some point in the storm, a bulldozer fell off its carriage (a flat container, called a half-rack), and punched a hole in a fuel tank... (and) split a seam in the hull. Some 15 feet
(4.5 meters) of water and fuel oil subsequently flooded a container-laden hold."
Yet another peril is water damage from the rain, as well as water damage caused by having a container sit in a low area in a port which floods during a rainstorm. During Hurricane Georges in September 1998, several ports reported substantial flooding: all of the ports operated by the State of Alabama, including Mobile, and all of the ports in the State of Mississippi were extensively flooded, particularly in the container staging areas.
Finally, cargo can be damaged by container "sweat": some containers are pretty tightly closed, and no air circulation takes place. If some of the cargo inside the container has a high moisture content (agricultural or forestry products, for example) on if the cargo was loaded in a hot and humid area than the humidity can condense on the inside walls of the container and damage the remainder of the cargo. A similar problem can happen for break-bulk merchandise placed in a tight cargo hold, as the ship "sweats" as well. These humidity problems can be solved by proper packaging and the use of desiccants.
8-3c Overboard Losses
Another common problem for cargo is the fact that it can be lost overboard in a storm; two American President Lines (APL) ships were caught in a storm in November 1998. They lost a combined 270 containers overboard and an additional 550 were damaged.6 (see Figure 8-2). It is not uncommon for ships to lose containers overboard: actually, worldwide, it is a daily occurrence. The containers placed on top of the ship's deck are lashed down with bars holding them to the deck and to each other. However, the cargo inside a container can shift, causing the container's balance to change, or the container can be improperly tied down, or the cleats holding the container can be damaged, and therefore the lash bars break or become loose, allowing some containers to fall overboard. The remainder of the container stack usually collapses as well, a situation which leads to crushed and damaged cargo. During the month of October 1998, four of the world's largest containerships experienced a deckstow collapse and lost some containers over-board .Sometimes, the containers that fall overboard float for weeks on end, and end up being hazards to navigation before washing up on some shore.
8-3d Jettison
In some cases, a container lost overboard is not an accident: the captain of a ship is allowed, if s/he thinks that this action will save the ship and the remainder of the cargo, to toss containers or cargo overboard to lighten the ship or to remove a container that may have become dangerous because it became loose. Such an act is called jettison or jettisoning and it is a fairly common occurrence. When this is the case, an old maritime tradition, called "General Average," dictates how the owners of the jettisoned cargo are compensated (see Section 8-3h); all parties on board pay for this loss.
8-3e Fire
Fire is also a fairly significant peril of shipping by ocean cargo containers. Since all dangerous cargo can only legally travel internationally by ocean—and not by air—such cargo is often present on board; fireworks, explosives, compressed gases, Legendary Container Losses
Although a major loss for any company whose container falls into the sea, a couple of container spills in the trade lanes of the North Pacific have allowed geo-scientists to develop better models of currents in the North Pacific.
The way geo-scientists traditionally trace currents is by releasing drift bottles at certain points in the ocean and nothing where these bottles land on beaches. Generally, these releases are small in the number: for example, the Project North Pacific released 34,000 bottles between 1956 and 1959 in increments of 500 to 1,000 bottles.
A container spill in May 1990 included 80,000 Nike shoes, most of which were eventually recovered by beachcombers on the North West Coast of the United States and West Coast of Canada. Scientists asked beachcombers—who were holding swap meets to find matching pairs—to report where they had found these shoes. From these data, and using models of the North Pacific, scientists were able to improve their knowledge of ocean currents in that region of the world.
However, the most notorious of all spills used for scientific purposes was the loss of twelve containers, one of which was owned by a company shipping plastic bathtub animals, or "rubber duckies." Some 29,000 toys spilled in the ocean in January 1992, and some ten months later, they landed on the beaches of Alaska. Scientists were able to develop a model simulate the currents that brought these toys back to shore and some good came out of this loss. These also were quite a few grins about the methodology, including an article in the Journal of Irreproducible Results.
ammunition, and chemicals of all sorts are crowded on deck. If these items happen to be poorly stowed, or are damaged in a storm, they can leak and mix with one another, resulting in fires or explosions .According to John Waite, Chief. Surveyor of the Salvage Association, the most pressing issue for container vessels is fire, since "there is no effective measure by which crews can fight a deck fire on a modern container ship." Moreover, he notes that almost all cargo carried above deck is flammable, and that chemical products account for 10 to 25 percent of it.9
For example, the containership Harmony was the victim of an explosion on
November 16, 1998, which triggered a fire that was not extinguished until four days later. The ship lost 85 to 90 percent of its cargo in this fire, or approximately 1,100 containers. The shipping line declared a "General Average," which is to sag that this incident's costs will be borne by the owners of all of the cargo on board.
8-3f Sinking
One of the other consequences of bad weather is the possibility of sinking: while not common for modern containerships, the possibility of sinking is always present. While most of the ships lost every year to sinking are older bulk ships flying third-world countries' flags (i.e., not always very well maintained), even the most modern ships can fall prey to a rogue wave and be lost or seriously damaged at sea.
The newly formed International Underwriting Association (formerly the Institute of London Underwriters) reports on the number of ships lost at sea as well as the human casualties. In 1999, there were 175 ships lost at sea, with 500 crewmembers dead or missing.
8-3g Stranding
Another peril facing cargo is the possibility of stranding, which also happens fairly frequently. Mechanical breakdown, stormy weather, and sometimes incompetent crews are responsible for a significant number of grounded ships every year. The improvements made on navigational technologies, such as the Global Positioning
System, have improved the precision with which ships operate. Moreover, they can now rely on precise maps: nevertheless, a combination of bad luck and a partially inaccurate map caused the stranding of the Queen Elizabeth 2 ocean liner in August 1992 in Martha's Vineyard Sound, off the coast of Massachusetts, It shows that strandings can still occur in well-traveled shipping lanes and with exceptional crews. She damaged part of her hull, passengers had to be evacuated, and Cunard Lines had to put the ship in dry dock for repairs. The cruise ship Royal Caribbean Monarch of the Seas, a four-year old ship equipped with the most modern of technologies, struck a reef in Saint-Maarten in December 1998 and had to be beached to avoid sinking.
The MSC Carla’s Christmas Cargo Loss
O
n November 24, 1997, the containership MSC Carla, designed to hold approximately 3,300 containers, was traveling from Le Haavre, France, to Boston. About 300 kilometers (200 miles) north of the Azores Islands, the ship was caught in a storm and hit with a very large wave, estimated to be 30 meters (100 feet) high, which split the ship’s hull in half. The bow section of the ship, while it stayed afloat for a few days, finally sank with 1,000 containers on board. The stern, after being heroically kept afloat by its crew, was eventually towed by a high-sea tugboat to the Canary Islands, a couple of weeks later. Fortunately, there was no loss of life.
The cargo losses included a lot of goods destined for American consumers for Christmas: in particular, several hundred cases of rate wines, old Cognacs, and irreplaceable Armagnac bottles, some of them valued at $700 per bottle. Unfortunately ,the goods sank in such deep waters (3,000 meters or 10,000 feet) that they could not be rescued. Even for those goods that were “safe” in the Canaries, a lot of them were damaged and unsellable: frozen foods had thawed—all the electrical power on board been used to operate the pumps—and other cargo was heavily water damaged. “High-quality slabs of architectural stone were reduced to a ‘pile of shattered granite granite and small lumps of marble’.”
The task of sorting out the responsibilities and setting the insurance claims is a job that will take a couple of years since the Mediterranean Shipping Company has declared a “General Average,” which means that the cost of the accident will be shared by all the cargo owners on the ship.
Direct damage to the cargo is not very likely when a ship is stranded. Nevertheless, since stranded vessels can take days or weeks to be freed, the cargo on board can be damaged while it waits; it is obviously the case for refrigerated or produce cargo. In addition, when the ship is freed, cargo is often "lightered" onto another ship, with all the perils associated with a transfer of cargo in less-than-ideal conditions. If the ship's hull is damaged, there can also be significant water infiltration and the cargo can be flooded. In other cases, part of the cargo is simply jettisoned.
8-3h General Average
The concept of General Average is exclusively used in marine insurance. It predates the concept of insurance, and was the idea that, when there is an "Average"— a term derived from the French word avarie, which means "damage to a ship or its cargo"—or a major loss on a ship, all cargo owners and the ship owner share in the loss. In other words, a General Average is a general loss, or a loss affecting all the parties involved in an ocean voyage. It is based on the principle that the owner of the ship and the cargo owners all share the goal of a successful completion of the voyage and that therefore all share in the risks and the costs of the venture.
The concept is applied in a very unusual fashion; when a portion of the cargo is lost in bad weather (see the case of the MSC Carla in the preceding box), or when there is a major fire on board (see the case of the MV Harmony in Section 8-3e), or when a portion of the cargo is jettisoned to save the ship, all of the owners of the cargo and the owner of the ship (or their insurers) pay for the lost cargo if a "General Average" is declared by the ship owner.
It's probably best to explain how this works with a specific example; assume a bulk cargo ship, valued at $1,070,000 loses power to its rudder and becomes stranded in shallow waters. It is carrying a shipment of iron ore in its fore holds (front of the ship) valued at $100,000, and a shipment of coal in its aft holds, valued at $80,000. In order to free the ship, the captain calls on a tug, and the decision is made that a portion of the ore will have to be jettisoned to allow the bow of the ship to get flee. The ship is then towed to a port where several repairs are made to make the ship seaworthy again. After this adventure, the owner of the ship declares a General Average and an adjuster is called to settle the claims.
First, the adjuster calculates the market value of the jettisoned cargo; in this case, the ore that was jettisoned would have been sold for $10,000. Second, the cost of the salvage operation, including the damage done to the ship while freeing it, is added up: the tug charged $45,000 and damage to the hull, engine, and propeller shaft ended up costing $20,000. Finally, the ratio of the losses to the combined value of the cargo and the ship is calculated.
The adjuster then uses this ratio to calculate the liabilities of the cargo owners and of the ship owner:
percent
6
06
.
0
000
,
250
,
1
000
,
75
)
000
,
80
000
,
100
000
,
070
,
1
(
)
000
,
20
000
,
45
000
,
10
(
=
=
=
+
+
+
+
●The company shipping the iron ore cargo has a liability of $100,000 x 6 percent = $6,000. However, since it had a loss of $10,000 for the jettisoned cargo, it collects the difference of $10,000- $6,000 = $4,000 from the adjuster. Realistically, if the cargo owner is insured, it will collect $10,000 from its insurer and, eventually, the latter will collect $4,000 from the adjuster.
●The company shipping the coal has a liability of $80,000 ~ 6 percent
= $4,800, which it (or its insurance company) pays to the adjuster.
●The company owning the ship has a liability of $1,070,000 x 6 percent
=$64,200. Once the direct costs are deducted, though, it ends up collecting $65,000- $64,200=$800. Most likely, its hull insurance coverage would have covered the remainder.
For at least a portion of the owners of cargo on board, General Average means that the owners of the goods that arrive safely have a liability toward the owners of the goods that did not arrive. Companies which had sufficient insurance have only their goods to worry about; companies with no insurance will have to place a cash deposit with the adjuster of roughly one-third of the value of the goods on the
ship.17 .Because of its complexity-imagine a ship such as the Carla with 3,000 containers aboard, most likely owned by a similar number of different owners—the settlement of a General Average situation can take years to complete. Every year, there are approximately three situations in which a shipping company declares a
General Average involving cargo from United States shippers.18
8-3i Theft
Cargo theft is yet another concern for companies shipping by ocean: while the risks are much greater on shore, or specifically in transit to the port of departure and from the port of arrival, it is becoming a major concern of exporters and importers of cargo that is easy to resell, such as athletic shoes, cellular telephones, or computer equipment. The total value of cargo thefts is difficult to pinpoint, as the police often tally these data together with other types of thefts, but it is estimated to be at least US $10 billion per year in the United States and US $30 billion worldwide.
To protect itself from theft, a company can take several measures, Most try very hard to ship through unmarked containers and unmarked pallets, most try to restrict to an absolute minimum the number of people who have access to the documents related to the cargo (bill of lading, packing list, manifest), and all use some form or another of seals and items that show evidence of tampering. A few adopt original methods: New Balance Athletic Shoes Inc. of Boston claims that it separately ships left and right shoes to Brazil and Argentina for its top-of-the-line models.20 Although this is an ongoing rumor, the logistical nightmare and costs of reuniting shoes in the country of destination seem too high for it to be justified, In addition, at one point in the country of destination, the shoes are once again reunited before transiting in pairs to the retail establishments, negating some of the benefits of such an approach. Finally, should a container of left shoes be stolen—worthless to the thieves—it instantly renders its complementary container of right shoes equally worthless for the manufacturer. This strategy nevertheless could be effective because it could act as a deterrent.
However, the leg of the trip during which the cargo is most at risk is its inland portion: several firms, after having suffered substantial losses on their shipments to Mexico because of truck hijackings, have taken the unusual step of transporting their goods by armored tractor-trailers. It is estimated that there were approximately 1,000 armored tractor-trailers in Mexico as of October 2000.
8-3j Piracy
Piracy is the last of the major risks associated with shipping by ocean; although the mention of this term always raises a chuckle in any audience, consider that the
International Chamber of Commerce reported a total of 285 separate attacks on ships at sea or in port for 1999 (an increase of 40 percent over 1998), 22,459 attacks for 2000 and 335 attacks for 2001.The problem has grown so significant that the
ICC created the Piracy Reporting Centre in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, in October
1992, which issues a weekly piracy report.
Most of the piracy incidents involve thugs attacking a ship and stealing the crew's possessions. However, on a number of occasions, the ship's crew is transferred to a small boat and left adrift, while the pirates take the ship and its cargo. Still at sea, the ship is renamed, all evidence of its former identity is destroyed, a complete makeover is executed—including a new paint job—and a new set of paperwork is created. Although it may sound impossible to "pull this off," the reality, is that it is a strong possibility, especially for bulk cargo shipped on relatively small ships; there are roughly 40,000 such ships, none of which are particularly distinct from one another, and who change legal ownership fairly frequently. In addition, in those parts of the world where most of these attacks occur—South—East Asia, particularly the straight of Malacca, India, South America and China—the police are either too busy with other pressing matters or cannot be bothered. Despite those odds, in the last two years, the Piracy Reporting Centre has helped recover nine of the ten hijacked ships that were reported.26
This increase in piracy attacks has prompted several shipping lines to train their crew in anti-piracy techniques, specifically by increasing the number of crewmembers on watch in sensitive areas. It also prompted ship owners to invest in satellite tracking systems and other security measures. One company even offers the services of former British Commandos (Gurkhas) as on-board ship escorts, while another has a "rapid response team" that it can fly by corporate jet to any area of the world to recover a hijacked ship.
8-3k Other Risks
Numerous other risks exist in shipping by sea:
●The risk of collision at sea is not substantial, but is still present. Collisions usually happen in crowded shipping lanes, such as the Channel or the Strait of Gibraltar. Thanks to radar equipment, this risk has been minimized, but it still happens. In August 1999, the Ever Decent, a modern containership, collided with the Norwegian Dream, a newly built cruise ship in the English Channel.29 One of the possible reasons for the collision was the poor training of the crews of both ships; both ships were flying convenience flags, one Panamanian, one Bahamian, and these countries are much more lax on crew training requirements (see Section 9-4).
●There is also the risk of collision with non-vessels; floating or sunk containers or debris are present in shipping lanes as well, and represent some degree of risk for ships, but little for cargo. Oddly enough, there is still the possibility of collision with icebergs, including very large ones from Antarctica (see Figure 8-3). Iceberg A22B, a mass of ice 22 km by 63 km (14 by 39 miles) has been drifting in the Antarctic Ocean since October 1986 and entered shipping lanes of the South Atlantic in early 2000. Its progress, and that of other very large Antarctic icebergs, is monitored by the National Ice Center.
● Other collisions can happen as well: in May 1980, a freighter hit the Skyway bridge in Tampa, Florida, United States, and caused the collapse of a 420-meter (1,400-foot) span of the bridge,31 damaging part of the ship and its cargo. In February 1997, in the port of San Francisco, an indisposed pilot left the bridge of the Orion for a few minutes and the ship ended up crashing into the pier, causing US $250,000 worth of damage to a gantry crane.32
●The risk of having a cargo contaminated or affected by other cargo is also present. It is always possible for a cargo to be contaminated by residues of the cargo that was previously in the same container or in the same ship, particularly foodstuffs contaminated by chemical products. A shipper importing rice found that it was unsellable due to the smell it acquired in the cargo hold of the ship.33 Another found that its cargo of 2,500 tons of vinyl pellets was contaminated by a few pounds of styrene left in the hold Refining costs amounted to US $188,000.34
●In some cases, other cargo on board can be a hindrance to a shipper: for example, a ship was recently carrying a cargo of wheat to the Dominican Republic and stopped in Dakar, Senegal, to pick up an additional load of groundnuts. The nuts eventually proved to be infested with khapra beetles. After the beetles were discovered in the port of destination, the ship was fumigated twice, which nonetheless failed to rid the cargo of the pests. The ship was then ordered to dump all of its cargo—including the wheat—in the sea.35 The owners of the wheat cargo had done nothing improper; they just happened to have loaded it on the "wrong" ship.
●For some ships sailing out of impoverished countries, another increasing problem is stowaways: young men sneak in the cargo holds, or in containers, and hide until they are discovered at sea. In most cases, the stowaways only are a problem at the port of destination where police and immigration officials fine the ship and question the crew. In 1999, there were 200 stowaways found in the Pacific Coast ports of the United States and Canada. Many more were not discovered; the United States Immigration Service estimates that 10,000 stowaways entered the country between 1997 and 1999. In most instances, there is a slight delay in the schedule when stowaways are discovered. In a few instances, the fear of these delays and fines leads the crew to get involved in criminal behaviors, such as killing the stowaways or sending them adrift at sea on a makeshift raft.
The consequences for the cargo beyond the delay are many; most of the time, the cargo is damaged by the stowaways while they are living with the merchandise from a few days to a couple of weeks. Approximately 2 percent of all vehicles going from Mexico to the United States by rail are damaged by stowaways who sleep, eat, and defecate in the cars. Sometimes, the stowaways hide in cargo holds that are closed and where the cargo is often laden with toxic chemicals or fumigated with insecticides. The stowaways die and the cargo is then considered unfit for consumption and destroyed in the country of destination. There are unfortunately no practical ways to prevent this type of occurrence.
●In some cases, and for whatever reason, a government may decide to arrest a ship (i.e., keep it in port rather than let it sail away). Such was the case for five Yugoslav ships that were held in United States ports for more than five years, when the U.S. government seized all Yugoslav assets during the Bosnian civil war. The cargo destined for the United States was unloaded, but the cargo loaded for the return trip was on board for the entire duration of the ordeal.
●In other cases, the owners of a ship declare bankruptcy while the ship is away, or they just decide to abandon the ship and its crew for economic reasons. In 1998, there was a substantial number of ships, most of them from the former Soviet Union, the "East Block," or flying convenience flags, which had been abandoned by their owners. The crew of the Delta Pride was abandoned by its Karachi owners in the waters of Mexico; fourteen months later, the men finally made it to the United States and were flown home after a Pakistani charity got involved and the ship and its cargo were sold at auction.42 The Oituz, one of twenty-two Romanian ships abandoned by its owners, waited with its cargo of 14,000 tons of sugar for nine months off the coast of Mexico.43 The current whereabouts of the ship, its crew, and its cargo are unknown. There were a total of 3,500 seafarers abandoned by shipowners between 1995 and 1998, according to the International Transport Workers Federation.44
●In ports where the equipment is inadequate, or in ports where equipment is in short supply, some of the cargo may be unloaded from the ship by taking apart the crates and the merchandise, and reconstructing the goods and the crate on the quay. This can be quite damaging to the cargo. In Chapter 14, this issue, as it relates to packaging and packing the goods, will be discussed. Cigna, the insurance corporation, publishes a guide to the equipment in place in all the ports worldwide, called Ports of the World, 45 so that a firm may plan the size of its shipment accordingly.
●Some ports have a history of social unrest, and are shut down for several days by strikes or other civil disturbances. During the summer of 2000 French fishermen and French truckers blockaded the ports and then the refineries of the country" to protest high diesel fuel prices. The government eventually lowered taxes on that fuel. Soon, their counterparts in Spain, Britain, Italy, and Germany followed suit and, for about a month, all cargo traffic in Europe was affected. Time-sensitive cargo was delayed, and transportation costs increased. Strikes in the ports of Japan occur almost annually to force negotiations of higher wages for dockworkers.46 All of these actions affect cargo movements in many ways; even if cargo going from
Cairo to Bombay is not specifically caught in an Italian strike, it is delayed because the containership on which it was supposed to sail is delayed. The possible perils that cargo can encounter at sea and on its way to and from a seaport are many; this list illustrates the point that many of the risks that are associated with a sea voyage may be easily underestimated by an exporter or an importer arranging for ocean cargo services. The importer or the exporter, whichever is responsible for the cargo, must be quite alert in its management of these risks.
8-4 Perils Associated with Air Shipments
Compared to what can happen to an ocean shipment, the perils to which an air shipment is exposed are minimal, a situation mostly due to the fact that air transport is, by nature, less perilous than ocean transportation. In addition, the airline industry is still dominated by companies located in, and therefore regulated by, developed countries' governments, which tend to have stringent rules regarding safety, pilot training, and maintenance. Despite the large number of aircrafts in operation there are approximately 13,670 commercial airplanes in the world, including 1,680 freighters47 and the correspondingly high number of voyages, the number of accidents per year is very small, reflecting the emphasis on safety of the entire industry.
The risks of fire and explosion are greatly diminished, mostly because countries routinely prohibit shipments of dangerous goods by air. The risks of total loss to cargo due to aircraft crashes is essentially nil, as are the risks of losses while the aircraft is aloft. The two biggest concerns for shippers should be:
Cargo movements While in the aircraft, the cargo is subjected to rough weather and sudden and quick accelerations and decelerations. Since freighter airplanes do not have to worry about passenger comfort, their pilots do not fly around turbulences the way passenger airline pilots do, and the cargo on board can be subjected to sudden and fairly violent "bumps." In a similar fashion, the aircrafts will brake faster on landing, bank at a wider angle on approach, and altogether be less gentle than with passengers on board. However, a good percentage of cargo also moves in passenger airplanes. Nevertheless, the greatest hazards are still in the shipping and handling that precedes the flight: in the truck on the way to the airport, in the warehouse, and in their counterpart activities in the transit airport and the airport of arrival.
Theft and pilferage While airports tend to have a fairly good handle on controlling theft while the goods are on the airport premises, it is not often the case in the vicinity of the airports, where problems abound in warehouses, truck terminals, and other satellite locations. Since most cargo sent by air has a high value, it is interesting to thieves, and since it tends to be packaged in cardboard boxes and not palletized, it is somewhat more easily pilfered and stolen. The key to controlling losses in these instances is to make sure that the cargo documents are handled by as few people as possible and that the boxes are not marked in any way to indicate their content.
There are a number of other risks associated with air shipment, particularly the cold and the changes in air pressure that can be found in some freighters.
Cargo tends to be kept at lower temperatures and at lower air pressure during the flight than what is practiced in passenger airplanes, for obvious reasons of cost.
For most cargo, these slight differences may not be significant but, for some cargo, it can be a problem. Since, by definition, sensitive cargo moves by air, care should be exerted in making sure that perishable cargo is not kept at temperatures than it cannot handle or that live cargo and sensitive mechanical instruments are not subjected to air pressures that are too low. For temperature, though, the greatest risk is usually not while the airfreighter is in flight, but while the cargo is on the tarmac, waiting to be loaded, or already loaded and waiting to take off :it can be exposed to extremes of temperatures as some air cargo hubs are located in pretty challenging locations (Anchorage, Alaska, for example).
8-5 Insurable Interest
There are several parties interested in the safe arrival of an international cargo shipment. The first, obviously, is the owner of the goods. Whether the owner is the exporter or the importer is dependent on a number of factors, principally the
"Terms of Payment" of the transaction (see Chapter 5). However, there are many cases in which non-owners are interested in making sure that the goods arrive safely to their destination. The Terms of Trade or Incoterms used in the transaction between the exporter and the importer (see Chapter 4) determine the cases in which the exporter is responsible for the goods before the title transfers to the importer. However, even if the importer is not responsible for the goods while they are in transit, it still has an interest in making sure that the goods arrive safely to their destination.
All of these situations illustrate the concept of "insurable interest":
An insurance contract is legally binding only if the insured has an interest in the subject matter of the insurance and this interest is in fact insurable. In most instances, an insurable interest exists only if the insured (were to) suffer a financial loss in the event of damage to, or destruction of, the subject matter of the insurance.
The use of Incoterms helps the exporter and the importer determine where their respective responsibilities start and end. It should therefore follow that the insurable interest of the exporter ends when possession shifts to the importer, at which time the importer is the party with an insurable interest; unfortunately, while this is correct, it is not that simple.
The issue is, once again, muddied by several factors. Several examples can be used to illustrate them:
Foreign exchange exposure An exporter in a developing country sells to an importer in a developed country on a CIF basis: responsibility transfers once the merchandise crosses the ship's rail (see Section 4-9), but the exporter is responsible to provide minimum cover insurance (i.e., Coverage C of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses—see Section 8-8d). Assuming that the importer is in agreement with such minimum coverage, there is still the problem that, should there be a loss, the importer would have to file a claim with the insurer in the developing country, or, at least, an insurer not chosen by the importer. It is possible that the claim processing will take a few months, leaving the importer with the risk of foreign exchange devaluation. Since the terms are CIF, the exporter delivers the goods as agreed—when the goods cross the ship's rail—and therefore the invoice has to be paid by the importer, causing a cash-flow problem as well. In this case, the importer has an insurable interest and can obtain coverage in its country to minimize its foreign exchange risk exposure. A similar situation can arise in a CIP shipment.
Trust An exporter may sell FCA to an importer in a country that mandates that the importer buy insurance in the importing country. The exporter usually ships without evidence of coverage, and correctly so, since the responsibility shifts to the importer as soon as the goods are in the carrier's care. However, should they be damaged in transit, the importer may refuse payment, despite the fact that the accident happened under its responsibility. The exporter has therefore an insurable interest in the completion of the trip: note that the problem would be avoided if the exporter sold on a Letter of Credit basis, as the documents for the shipment, including the intermodal bill of lading, would be in order, and the Issuing Bank would have to pay (see Section 5-5a). The same situation would arise in FAS, FOB, CFR, CPT, and DAF shipments; it could also happen in an EXW transaction.
Insufficient coverage An exporter agrees to sell to an importer on a CIF basis. The importer requests that the terms be modified to "CIF maximum cover" (i.e., Coverage A of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses, see Section 8-8a) but, since it is an Open Account shipment, it does not obtain evidence of this coverage. The goods are slightly damaged in transit by condensation, and the importer seeks to collect compensation under the terms of the insurance policy provided by the exporter. However, the claim is turned down because the exporter did not contract for Coverage A, but for Coverage B or C, which do not allow claims for such damage. Clearly, the importer has an insurable interest in this cargo and can obtain coverage in its country to protect itself from such losses.
While the owner of the goods has a clear insurable interest in the merchandise while it is in transit, non-owners, such as the buyer in the first and third example above, have an insurable interest which is less direct; it is usually qualified as a "contingent" insurable interest.
8-6 Risk Management
There are three ways in which a company can manage its risks, whether they are international cargo insurance or any other type of risk: it can retain the risk, it can transfer the risk, or it can take a mixed approach and retain some risks and transfer others.50 This section will concentrate on the management of international logistics risks, mainly the risks associated with transporting goods from one country to another.
8-6a Risk Retention
The strategy of risk retention is fairly clear; the company decides that it is more economical to not purchase insurance for those risks. In general, there are four reasons for which a company will decide to retain its international logistics risks:
1. Very large international traders—importers or exporters—are likely to follow this strategy as they act somewhat as an insurance company in some respect: they have a lot of merchandise in transit, and therefore would have to pay large premiums, but would only occasionally collect on a loss. Therefore, the many savings incurred by not paying premiums end up covering the few losses they experience. Those firms have decided to "self-insure," which is the euphemism for acting as an insurance company and pay all risks with current cash flow.
2. Exporters or importers which have little exposure: they are shipping or buying goods of fairly small value, in fairly small shipments, and therefore a loss would not have substantial financial or cash-flow consequences.
3. Exporters or importers which have little relative exposure because international transactions represent such a small percentage of their business. The individual amount may be large, but relative to the size of their domestic sales, it is insignificant.
4. Firms which did not evaluate the international transaction risks clearly.
They are not insuring because they do not insure their domestic transactions or, for whatever reasons, think that the risks of shipping internationally are not very high. Generally, the firms that are choosing to retain these risks by ignorance are also the ones that are more likely to incur losses because of improper packing or improper security measures for the same reasons. Relying upon the liability coverage provided by the shipping line is also imprudent; the current liability for shipping lines under U.S. law—the Carriage of Goods by Sea Act (COGSA)—provides a maximum coverage of US $500 per package, which is often interpreted as a "container," and the shipping lines have seventeen specified defenses they can invoke, essentially shielding them from liability except in the most egregious cases.
8-6b Risk Transfer
The strategy of risk transfer is also fairly clear: the firm decides to transfer all of its risks to an insurance company. In exchange for paying a premium, the firm is certain to be covered against losses experienced during international shipments. This strategy is followed for three reasons:
1. Firms may have a lot of exposure. The value of the goods they ship or import is high, and the loss of some or all of these shipments would be a substantial financial blow to their operations. In those cases where goods are expensive, though, the insurance companies often request, in cooperation with the firms, to restrict the total amount at risk on any single shipment. Usually this is achieved by having the shipment split over several carriers.
2. Firms may have a relatively high exposure. Even though the amount may be small, it ends up being relatively high for the firms. A perfect example of such a situation is found in personal effects shipments, which generally are worth fairly small sums, but are relatively quite valuable to their owners.
3. Firms that lack experience in international trade will insure because they are uncomfortable with the risks involved or because they are unable to properly assess their exposure.
8-6c Mixed Approach
The mixed approach is one where the firm decides to retain some of the risk and transfer the rest. This strategy can be achieved in two different ways:
1. The decision is made based upon the maximum amount of exposure that a firm is willing to risk: this objective is traditionally achieved with the use of a deductible. A deductible can be managed on a per-claim basis—the insurance company is responsible for the portion of a given loss which is greater than the deductible and the firm is responsible for the amount of the deductible, as well as all losses which have a value lower than the deductible. It can also be a cumulative deductible, where the firm pays for losses until the cumulative deductible amount is reached, and the insurance company pays for the losses incurred beyond the amount of the deductible.
2. The decision is made based on the types of risks that the firm is willing to take, and those that it would rather transfer to an insurance company. For example, a firm may choose to insure using Coverage B of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses (see Section 8-8c) and retain the risks not covered by this policy, among which are condensation, pilferage, leakage, and breakage.
Either of these strategies can be followed for a number of reasons as well: however, while the choice of a monetary deductible is essentially based upon the maximum amount of exposure that a firm is willing to bear, the strategy of splitting risks between the firm and an insurance company is a much more difficult strategy to implement, as it involves identifying risks, determining whether they are significant enough to transfer, and negotiating with an insurance company a specific contract of insurance, taking advantage of the fact that" customize cargo policies are limited only by the imagination of the carriers offering them."51
8-7 Marine Insurance Policies
An international trading firm—exporter or importer—intent on transferring all or part its international shipping risks is generally only interested in purchasing
Marine Cargo Insurance, since it just needs to protect itself from damage to the cargo as well as from its liability toward the ship owners and the rest of the cargo in a General Average case. However, there are a couple of additional insurance coverages available in international shipping that should be mentioned: they pertain mainly to vessel or aircraft owners, but, on rare occasions, those policies matter to an exporter or importer chartering an entire ship for a bulk shipment.
8-7a Marine Cargo Insurance
Marine Cargo Insurance can be purchased either under an open ocean cargo policy or under a special cargo policy:
Open Policy
An open policy is an insurance contract with which a firm insures every international shipment it makes for a fixed period of time. Such a policy is formally known as an Open Ocean Cargo Policy and it automatically covers all the shipments of the insured, as long as the firm reports every shipment to the insurance company. This reporting is done using a set of declaration forms, either every time an export shipment is made—or an import shipment is received—or on a monthly basis. There is a presumption of goodwill on the part of the firm in that the insurance company will cover damage to an undeclared shipment, as long as the firm intended to notify the insurance company. Since the premiums are based upon the value of the shipments made under such a policy, it presents one great advantage: the firm knows the costs of its insurance coverage and can easily incorporate it in its pro-forma invoices without having to request a quote for each shipment.
Special Cargo Policy
The second alternative is for the exporter or importer to purchase an individual policy, called a Special Cargo Policy, for each of its shipments. This alternative allows a firm to specifically purchase coverage that pertains best to a shipment. However, it tends to be cumbersome to enter a contract every time the firm gets involved in an international transaction, and this method is not very commonly used.
Obtaining Insurance Certificates
On a large number of occasions, the exporter is requested to provide a Certificate of Insurance to the importer and its bank, usually as this Certificate is required by the Letter of Credit. This requirement is usually not a problem under a Special Cargo Policy, since there is evidence from the insurance company that a specific shipment is insured.
Under an Open Ocean Cargo Policy, however, this requirement used to present some difficulties until recently. The practice used to be that the insurance company would provide the exporter with a Certificate of Open Insurance; however, this certificate did not specifically address the insurance status of a given shipment, and some (few) banks did not accept evidence of an open policy as a proot of insurance as required in the terms of the Letter of Credit. Therefore, the practice is now for the insurance company to give the insured a supply of blank Special Cargo Policy forms, which are then filled by the exporter to show that a specific shipment is covered. These forms appear—to the Issuing Bank—as if a special Cargo Policy has been contracted for the shipment, even though it is covered under an open policy.
Purchasing Marine Cargo Insurance
Marine Cargo Insurance can be purchased from two sources:
1. An insurance agent, who can assist the firm in obtaining the most appropriate coverage, given its product mix and its risk management strategy; as such, agents sell most open ocean cargo policies.
2. A freight forwarder, who can provide "generic" coverage for a given shipment almost immediately; as such, freight forwarders sell a lot of special cargo policies.
8-7b Hull Insurance
Hull insurance is contracted by the ship owners to cover the risk of damage to their ship when it is involved in a peril, such as grounding or fire. It also covers the owner in case of a complete loss, such as a sinking. This policy also covers the owners' liability toward the cargo owners in the case of a General Average and its damages in the event of a collision with another ship. An equivalent hull insurance is available to owners of aircrafts.
Hull insurance rates are dependent on the seaworthiness of a ship, the way it is maintained, and the equipment it has on board, all three of which are appraised by Classification Societies. Ships are placed in different classes and hull insurance rates are dependent on the class of a ship. The Lloyd's Register of Ships—in its 236th year, and now available on CD-ROM—keeps information on almost all ships in the world and their classification. Hull insurance is effectively paid indirectly by the cargo owners, as the cost of the insurance is included in the freight rates quoted.
8-7c Protection and Indemnity
Protection and Indemnity is yet another form of insurance for a ship owner; it is a protection against liability to other parties when a ship sinks or is damaged. In the last few decades, it has meant liability for oil spills—specifically cargo spills, but also ship fuel spills—on beaches, and their extensive clean-up costs. However, it also includes the ship owners' liability toward the crew (injury, death) or in repatriating stowaways.
Protection and Indemnity insurance is not a traditional insurance, as it is a mutual P&I Club to which ship owners contribute, and which absorbs the costs of one of the owners' mishaps. The liability of a single P&I Club is limited to an amount of US $5,000,000; for claims that are higher than that, the fourteen P&I Clubs form an alliance and mutually insure each other, up to a limit of approximately US $78,000,000.56 Claims beyond this amount usually involve a cargo of crude oil and are covered by an international fund, called the International Fund for Oil Pollution Compensation.57 If it is not a claim involving oil cargo, the p & I Clubs are reinsured through Lloyd's for the remainder of the claim.
8-8 Coverages under a Marine Cargo Insurance Policy
There are two major groups of policies that can be purchased in order to protect cargo during an ocean or air shipment. The first group is governed by British Law and was completely rewritten in 1982. This group of insurance policies seems to have become the standard for other countries as well. They are known as the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses, Coverage A, B, or C.
The second group is older, with some antiquated clauses and more modern ones, and is mostly written by U.S.-based insurance companies, although some of the coverage can be written using older British clauses. These traditional policies are known as "All Risks;' "General Average,' and "Free of Particular Average."
To make things more interesting, these six general policies can be modified to add coverage that is not included in the original contract, such as the risks of strikes and civil unrest. However, none of the policies will cover five specific risks, against which it is impossible to find insurance:
Improper packing The goods must be adequately packed for an ocean voyage and be well protected against shocks and water damage, as well as well secured in the container or the crate. Chapter 12 discusses this issue in depth.
Inherent .vice The goods shipped have a natural propensity to be affected In a certain way; for example, steel will exhibit surface rust after being exposed for some time to air and moisture, agricultural product shipments will foster insects and rodents, and wood will warp and split. None of these "inherent vices" are insurable.
Ordinary leakage Also known as "ordinary loss in weight and volume" and "ordinary wear and tear;' this states that several products, when shipped, will leak or lose weight; for example, any agricultural product, such as wool, will lose some weight as its moisture content decreases; petroleum oil trans- ported in bulk will partially evaporate; and an automobile carried on a roll-on/roll-off ship will show additional mileage. Again, none of these risks are insurable.
Unseaworthy vessel This exclusion is not a problem for goods shipped by regularly scheduled container or break-bulk ships; however, it puts a burden of care on the shipper in the case of a shipment going by bulk ship, as the shipper must make certain that the ship is classified by a Classification Society as seaworthy.
Nuclear war This risk is always specifically excluded from policies. Note that the risk not covered is the direct result of nuclear war, such as irradiation or destruction. However, should a shipment be damaged by a fire caused by nuclear war, the shipment is covered-if the risk of fire is covered in the policy---because the fire was the peril that caused the loss.
8-8a Institute Marine Cargo Clauses---Coverage A
The first general policy is referred to as Coverage A of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses. Coverage A is quite similar to a traditional "All Risks" policy (see Section 8-8b), in that it covers "all risks of loss or damage to the subject-matter insured; yet it is not identical to one. For one, it is written in plain English, which makes it much simpler to decipher. Moreover, unlike traditional "All Risks" policies, which can be written with U.S. or British clauses-and the different interpretations they imply—a policy written with Coverage A of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses is identical in all countries.
Despite its name, a Coverage A policy-and an M1 Risks policy is not truly an All Risks policy, as it covers all perils except the ones mentioned earlier (improper packing, inherent vice, ordinary leakage, unseaworthy vessel, and nuclear war), as well as a number of risks for which specific additional coverage must be purchased separately as endorsements to the main policy: strikes and other civil disturbances (see the Strikes, Riots, and Civil Commotions clause in Section 8-8g) and acts of war and seizure by a government (see the Free of Seizure and Capture clause in Section 8-8h).
Nevertheless, Coverage A of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses is the maximum coverage that an exporter or an importer would need to purchase in the case of a shipment for most trade lanes in the world, specifically from a developed country to another, as long as the route does not cross a particularly hot spot of the world.
8-8b All Risks Coverage
An "All Risks" policy is an older-but still very commonly used, particularly in the United States type of policy. Since an M1 Risks policy can be written as an American contract or as a British contract, it will contain different wordings of the clauses and other relatively minor changes, which will make an American policy different from a British policy on a few points; therefore, careful reading of such policies should always be done to ensure that there is a proper match between the risks that the shipper., exporter or importer-is willing to assume and the ones that the policy excludes.
For a United States All Risks policy, the goods have to be shipped "under deck" which means that the goods must be stowed inside the ship, for the obvious reason that goods inside a ship are exposed to fewer perils than goods stowed "on deck" However, this presents a practical problem since the shipper usually is unaware of the way the goods are stowed in a ship, and since some containerships no longer have a deck and are instead equipped with stack bars. The problem is solved by requesting that the insurance company cover the goods based upon the Shipper's Letter of Instruction, which requests that the goods be shipped under deck, and not based upon the way the goods are actually stowed by the steamship line. Such coverage can be obtained as an endorsement to the main policy, usually at no additional charge.59 Once this endorsement has been granted, the All Risks policy is even more similar to a Coverage A policy, and therefore an All Risk poticy is also quite appropriate for shipments of any nature between two developed countries.
8-8c Institute Marine Cargo Clauses--Coverage B
Another general policy is referred to as Coverage B of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses. It is also called a "named perils" policy, as it lists specifically the risks that it will cover. The list of covered perils includes fire, stranding, sinking, collision, jettison, washing overboard, water damages, and total losses during loading and unloading; however, losses due to bad weather are not covered, and neither are partial losses happening during loading and unloading of the ship. For a complete list, please refer to Table 8-1, where a comparison is given for all six standard coverages.
Coverage B of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses is appropriate for goods that have a good tolerance for bad weather, such as bulk raw materials including coaliron ore, polymer pellets, and lumber. It would not be appropriate for machinery; paper, and any type of finished goods, unless they were particularly resilient.
8-8d Institute Marine Cargo Clauses---Coverage C
The last of the general Institute Marine Cargo Clauses is Coverage C. It is also a "named perils" policy, as it lists specifically the risks that it will cover. The list of covered perils is limited to fire, stranding, sinking, collision, and jettison; it does not include washing overboard, rough weather damages, water damages and losses during loading and unloading. For a complete list, please refer to Table 8-1, where a comparison is given for all six standard coverages.
Coverage C is the minimum coverage required by the Incoterms CIF and CIP
It is minimal enough as to be inappropriate for most goods, and companies doing business on CIF or CIP term should definitely extend this coverage to "maximum cover" (i.e., Coverage A of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses), or, if they are importing on those Incoterms, purchase Difference in Condition Insurance (see Section 8-8J).
Coverage C is generally insufficient for most containerized goods, with the possible exception of goods that are unlikely to be affected by an international voyage in any way, and, if lost overboard, would not be a major loss. There are few cargos that fit this description, with the possible exception of scrap merchandise, such as scrap metal or recyclable paper. Coverage C is appropriate for bulk cargo, as it is unlikely to experience a loss unless there is major damage to the ship.
TABLE 8-1 Marine Insurance Coverage Summary
Perils Covered Against A B C AR WA FPA
Fire × × × × × ×
Explosion × × × × × ×
Stranding × × × × × ×
Sinking × × × × × ×
Collision × × × × × ×
General average × × × × × ×
Jettison × × × × × (*)
Loss overboard × × × × (*)
Seawater damage × × × × (*)
Lightening × × × × (*)
Condensation × ×
Improper stowage by carrier × ×
Theft × ×
Pilferage × ×
Leakage × ×
Breakage × ×
Damage while loading/unloading× × × ×
Damage on land before loading × × × × × ×
(*)Under an FPA policy, any partial loss incurred would not be covered unless it is due to a ship sinking, burning, becoming stranded, or being involved in a collision; a total loss would be covered.
A Coverage A of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses
B Coverage B of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses
C Coverage C of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses
AR All Risks Coverage
WA With Average (Typical Coverage)
FPA Free of Particular Average (Typical Coverage)
Note: Since so many different types of WA and FPA policies exist; the table is only indicative. Please refer to the actual policy for definitive coverage.
8-8e With Average Coverage
The "With Average" policy is generally written to include coverage in between an "All Risks" policy and a policy with Coverage B of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses. A With Average policy is also named a "named perils" policy, as it lists specifically the risks that it will cover. Again, since a With Average policy can also be written as an American contract or as a British contract, care should be given to ensure that the shipper is not unwillingly accepting a risk that it does not want to retain.
A With Average policy covers risks such as fire, explosion, stranding, collision, and so on (see Table 8-1), but covers damage to cargo from heavy weather, as well as partial losses while loading and unloading the vessel, and the bursting of boilers, none of which Coverage B provides.
The way a With Average policy insures partial losses is through the use of a franchise, which is to say that for partial damage below a certain percentage—say 3 percent of the value of the merchandise, the goods are not covered. For partial losses greater than this franchise, the entire loss to the insured is covered. A franchise is therefore different from a deductible, which would consider that, if a loss of 10 percent of the value of the merchandise occurred, the insured would be responsible for the first 3 percent and the insurance company would be responsible for the remaining 7 percent. In a With Average policy with a franchise of 3 percent, the insurance would cover the entire 10 percent.
A standard With Average policy is appropriate for some percentage of the merchandise shipped internationally; however, since some other coverages such as fresh water damage, condensation, or breakage and pilferage are often added, it seems that shippers use a With Average policy to tailor their coverage to include those perils to which the merchandise they export or import is sensitive.
8-8f Free of Particular Average Coverage
The last general policy is referred to as a "Free of Particular Average" policy, which is also a "named perils" policy. A "Free of Particular Average" policy is a policy that will cover total losses, but will only cover partial losses in some circumstances. The major issue is whether the policy is a "Free of Particular Average-English Conditions" policy or a "Free of Particular Average-American Conditions" policy. Under an American Conditions policy, partial losses are covered only if they result directly from a fire, a stranding, a sinking, or a collision. Under an English Conditions" policy or a "Free of Particular Average-American Conditions" policy. Under an American Conditions policy, partial losses are covered only if they result directly from a fire, a stranding, a sinking, or a collision. Under an English Conditions policy, the partial losses are covered if they occur on the same voyage that a fire, a stranding, a sinking, or a collision occurs, without these perils having directly caused the loss.
A "Free of Particular Average" policy is even more restrictive than Coverage C of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses. It does not cover many of the risks associated with an international shipment and it is rarely sufficient or appropriate for an international shipment of containerized or break-bulk cargo, unless the cargo considered is particularly inexpensive and a loss would be no substantial problem for the shipper. It would be appropriate (with some reservation, since no partial losses are covered) for some bulk cargo of minimal value.
Finally, a Free of Particular Average' policy would not be enough to cover the minimum Insurance requirements of a CIF or CIP shipment, which both require the minimum cover" of Coverage C of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses.
8-8g Strikes Coverage
All the previous standard policies include a clause, called the "Strikes, Riots, and
Civil Commotions" (S.R. & C.C.) clause in the American policies and the "Strikes Exclusion" clause in the Institute Marine Cargo policies, which excludes coverage of damage to cargo due to strikes and other civil disturbances.
Should a shipper be concerned about the possibility of such problems in a specific port or during a specific period, a possible amendment to include such coverage can always be added, generally called an S.R. & C.C. Endorsement. However, the coverage would include only direct physical damage to the goods or the additional costs incurred in storing the goods during the strike, but would not include incidental damage caused by delay to market, nor the financial losses that accompany a delay in the sale of a cargo.
8-8h War and Seizure Coverage
All the previous standard policies also include a clause, called the "Free of Capture and Seizure" (EC. & S.) clause in the American policies and the "War Exclusion" clause in the Institute Marine Cargo policies, which excludes coverage of damage to cargo due to war and war-like situations, such as the seizure of a ship by a foreign government or the accidental collision of a ship with a mine.
It is possible for a shipper to insure its cargo against war damages, but it is through an additional policy, called the "War Risks Only" policy, which would cover hostile acts by a foreign government or by an organized power. For obvious reasons, a war risks policy is cancelable by the insurance company with forty-eight hours' notice; however, it cannot be canceled for cargo that is in transit (i.e., that has already left the port of departure), which is really the coverage that any shipper would want. Most open cargo policies are accompanied by a separate war risks policy, according to Cigna Insurance Companies.63
8-8i Warehouse-to-Warehouse Coverage
Another common additional coverage to an open cargo policy is the "Warehouse-
to-Warehouse" coverage, which covers the goods from the time they leave the exporter's warehouse until the time they arrive at the importer's warehouse, or fifteen days after they arrive m the port of destination, whichever occurs first.. The Warehouse-to-Warehouse coverage grew from the demands of shippers who were tired of only finding coverage for the ocean portion of the voyage.
First, the All Risks and With Average insurance policies added a "Shore Perils" endorsement to include the perils occurring while loading and unloading ships; this clause was also made part of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses. Finally, a true
"Warehouse-to-Warehouse" clause was added to most open cargo policies. In addition, in some policies, there is also a "Marine Extension Clause," which essentially expands the Warehouse-to-Warehouse coverage to ensure unforeseen changes in the voyage and unexpected transshipments. Such a clause was developed during World War II to account for unusual and unknown transshipments, since all shipping data was classified. It fulfills few practical purposes today
The Warehouse-to-Warehouse coverage is an extension to the traditional All
Risks, With Average, and Free of Particular Average policies, but it is an integral part of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses policies, for Coverages A, B, and C, in which it is called a "transit clause?'
8-8j Difference in Conditions
Another addition of significance to open cargo policies would be "Difference in Conditions" coverage. Difference in Conditions coverage is designed to fill the gap between what an importer would like to have covered under its open cargo policy and what is covered under its supplier's CIF or CIP coverage.
Since the International Chamber of Commerce only requires Coverage C of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses for a CIF or CIP shipment, it can be difficult to ensure that a supplier will actually cover the shipment more fully, even though the importer may request maximum cover. In those cases, it is simpler for the importer to purchase a Difference in Conditions endorsement and not have to worry about what the supplier will provide.
8-8k Other Clauses of a Marine Insurance Policy
There are many other clauses in a marine insurance policy, either as a part of the general policy or as an endorsement to the general policy. This section will give a brief overview of some of them.
General Average Clause
All insurance policies contain a "General Average" clause, which specifies that the insurer will cover the General Average responsibilities of a shipper.
Constructive Total Loss Coverage Clause
All insurance policies contain a "Constructive Total Loss Coverage" clause, which essentially specifies that the insurer will reimburse the shipper for goods that have been abandoned after a stranding or a sinking, as long as the costs of recovering the goods and making them marketable is greater than their value. If it is possible to recover the goods at a cost lower than their value, then the insurance company pays for these costs.
Sue and Labor
All traditional insurance policies—All Risks, With Average, and Free of Particular
Average--have a clause called "Sue and Labor" (policies written under the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses have similar wording but do not use this clause name), which direct the shipper to act in the best interest of the insurance company when a loss occurs. The principle is that, after a loss, the insured should protect the cargo from further damage, as it would if it had not been insured, in order to keep the loss to a minimum.
Inchmaree Clause
One of the quaint vestiges of the old marine insurance policies is the "Inchmaree" clause, so named after a lawsuit between the owners of the Inchmaree, a vessel, and the insurers of its cargo, which determined that damage caused by a burst boiler (steamship engine) was not covered by the traditional marine insurance policy Of the time. Insurers quickly added this coverage to their policy and it has remained to this date m the All Risks, With Average, and Free of Particular Average policies. The Inchmaree clause also covers cargo owners in the event that the ship owner is guilty of errors in navigation and seamanship.
Coverages A through C of the Institute Marine Cargo Clauses do not include the inchmaree clause and do not mention coverage of poor navigation. An analysis of the American Carriage of Goods at Sea Act, in Chapter 9, will cover this issue of seamanship further.
8-9 Elements of an Airfreight Policy
Fortunately, airfreight policies tend to be much less complicated than ocean marine cargo insurance policies: they are all written as "All Risks" policies, with the exclusions already described in Section 8-8:
Improper packing The goods must be adequately packed for an air shipment and be reasonably protected against shocks and rainwater damage, as well as well secured in the container or the crate. The standards for airfreight packing are much less stringent than for an ocean shipment.
Inherent vice This problem is essentially moot in an air shipment as the goods are in transit a much shorter period of time. Nevertheless the risk is specifically excluded from coverage.
Ordinary leakage Also known as "ordinary loss in weight and volume; and "ordinary wear and tear,' this is also much less of a concern for air shipments as transit times are much shorter.
Unairworthy aircraft This exclusion is not a problem for goods shipped by air; governments do extend much greater efforts to the oversight of aircrafts than they do for ships. The absence of" flags of convenience" is also a positive factor.
Nuclear war This is a traditional exclusion.
In addition, policies will also exclude war coverage and S.R. & C.C. coverage, as they are for an ocean cargo policy, as well as two risks inherent to air travel: damage caused by cold and changes in atmospheric pressure. All of these risks can be covered, however, by purchasing additional coverage.
Practically speaking, most air cargo policies are included as a clause in the open cargo policy of a firm, which allows the firm to manage its shipping risks with a single document, whether its goods are moving by ocean or by air.
8-10 Lloyd's
Lloyd's of London is the oldest insurance market in the history of shipping.
Although it is commonly perceived as an insurance company, that perception is incorrect. Since its humble beginnings in Lloyd's coffee shop, the company has acted as an intermediary between people who wanted insurance and those willing to provide it. Lloyd's does not provide insurance coverage; when one hears of an athlete whose legs are insured "by Lloyd's of London,' it is an inaccurate statement: the athlete's legs are insured through Lloyd's.
8-10a Principles
Before explaining how the functioning of Lloyd's is different from the functioning of an insurance company, it seems relevant to explain how the latter works. An insurance company attempts to strike a balance between the collection of a large number of premiums, each of a moderate monetary amount, and the payment of a few claims, each of a large monetary amount. The correct calculation of a premium relies upon the determination of the expected monetary value of claims (their probability multiplied by their expected costs) divided by the number of policyholders. Over time, the law of averages arithmetic averages allows an insurance company to be profitable.
Lloyd's of London acts as a market through which unusual risks are insured, unusual risks are those that a traditional insurance company would not consider covering because there is no way to collect a large number of premiums and therefore the law of averages does not apply. For example, consider a firm that would like to insure the launching of its communication satellite. Although there may be as many as fifty satellite launches worldwide every year, the number of companies launching a satellite-the possible number of premiums, to collect- is too small to spread the high expected monetary value of a single loss. Therefore the firm would be faced with a series of years m which it would collect premiums without a loss, and then would have one or two losses in a single year, which would have a substantial adverse effect on its income.
Lloyd's of London is the place where companies and people wanting to have such risks insured find a group of individuals willing to assume (insure) this risk.
These individuals are called Names and are organized in a Syndicate. Each Name is actually "wagering" that the loss will not happen, and collects a portion of the premium that the Name shares with the remainder of the Syndicate. This share of the premium is therefore income to the Name. Should a loss occur, the Name is then asked to pay his or her share of the loss, along with every other Name in the remainder of the Syndicate. This payment comes out of the Name's income or assets. The Names, organized in a Syndicate, are the Underwriters of the insurance.
From a Name's perspective, participation in a Syndicate can be quite a profitable venture. It is not truly an investment, since the Name only collects premiums (additional income) while a portion of his or her assets can continue to be invested in other vehicles on which he or she collects market rates. However, since each Name has unlimited liability on his or her personal assets, this can also be an extremely risky venture. Because of this risk, each Name must have substantial personal assets as of October 2000, the required net wealth was £ 350,000, only
50 percent of which have to be invested with Lloyd's in order to be allowed to participate in a Syndicate.
Over the years, the type of insurance coverage provided through Lloyd's has increased to include more traditional risks, such as automobile and home insurance. However, most of the Lloyd's Syndicates will cover risks that a traditional insurance company will not consider. As of 1999, there were 139 underwriting Syndicates.65
8-10b Current Status
Some of the risks that Lloyd's Syndicates covered in the last few decades included the risk of asbestos product liability: such was the extent of the liability, though, that many Names were brought to personal bankruptcy, despite efforts by Lloyd's to spread the risk to more Syndicates than had originally been involved. The number of Names soared from 14,000 in 1978 to 34,000 by the end of the 1980s. Some of the Names who joined in the 1980s claim to not have been informed of the extent of the liabilities that Lloyd's Syndicates faced, and filed lawsuits alleging fraud In November 2000, Lloyd's was found not guilty of fraud by the British courts, but the language used by the judge in its decision was quite strong, calling
Lloyd's "grossly negligent."67 Some criminal lawsuits against Lloyd's are still pending as of November 2002.
In 1994, Lloyd's decided to allow Corporate Names (i.e., allow corporations to
become Names), These Corporate Names were given the advantage of having limited liability and joined Syndicates in which individual Names retained unlimited liability. This decision, which allowed the Syndicates to have more capitalization, also created some friction, as individual Names—"bespoke Names" in Lloyd's vernacular— resented the creation of two classes of Names and responsibilities. Today, it is estimated that 75 percent of Lloyd's underwriting ability is provided by corporations By 1999, the number of individual unlimited liability Names had dropped to 4,712, with 668 Corporate Names.
From the perspective of an exporter or importer, the Lloyd's market would only be used for some of what is referred to as "project cargo" or cargo of exceptional dimensions which would not fit in a traditional container or would need special arrangements with the shipping line. An example of such extraordinary project cargo would be a firm shipping several large pieces of equipment to a customer or a subsidiary overseas. Since such cargo may not be insurable by a traditional insurance company, it could be insured through Lloyd's.
8-11 Commercial Credit Insurance
Another area where a firm involved in international matters can transfer some of its risks is in the commercial credit area.
Increasingly, competitive pressures are pushing firms to sell on an "Open
Account" basis, as customers try to acquire the best possible payment alternatives. Several countries used to offer subsidized terms on export insurance to their exporters and, although these practices have officially ended with the creation of the World Trade Organization (WTO), which prohibits export subsidies, the mindset was established. In France, for example, nearly 25 percent of all export sales are insured by the Compagnie Francaise d'Assurance pour le Commerce Exterieur (COFACE), which was privatized in May 1994, but was still heavily subsidized by the French government, to the tune of FFr. 2.5 billion US $500 million in 1996.
A firm may have to cover several types of transactions for which it feels uncomfortable:
●A sale to a foreign customer on an "Open Account" basis, where the firm is concerned about its exposure, or the amount of money it has at stake in the sale.
●A sale to a foreign customer on credit terms: the customer has requested that payments be extended over a period of several months. The terms are also "Open Account" since the seller's competitors have offered this alternative to the customer. The exporter is concerned about its exposure to this stream of payment.
●A construction firm retained by a foreign customer to build a plant; however, in order to earn the contract, it must post a number of performance bank guarantees (or performance bonds). It is concerned about its exposure in the case of unexpected delays, such as if the customer calls on the bank guarantee. For more information on bank guarantees, please refer to Section 5-9.
8-1 la Risks Involved
In each of these transactions, there are two components to the risk of non-payment:
Political risk This is the risk presented by the country in which the transaction takes place. This risk can take many forms. The country s government can decide to increase tariffs on certain imports and the customer refuses delivery, the country's government can decide to freeze accounts held in foreign currencies and the customer cannot pay, the country's government can decide to prohibit the sale of a particular product, the country's government can commit a political faux pas and an embargo is declared by the remainder of the world, which means that no payments can be forwarded by the customer, and so on.
Commercial risk This is the risk presented by the customer defaulting on its obligation to pay, for whatever reason. Generally, the customer encounters financial difficulties or the customer has a complaint about the product which it cannot resolve any other way in its management s mind, at least than by withholding payment to the exporter.
8-11b Risk Management Alternatives
As in the case of international cargo insurance, the firm exposed to these risks has three alternatives available to manage them: it can decide to retain the risk, it can. decide to transfer the risk to an insurance company, or it can follow a mixed strategy of retaining some of the risks and transferring others.
There are many different reasons for choosing one strategy or another, most of which were covered in Section 8-7, so they will not be repeated here.
8-11c Insurance Policies Available
Should a company decide to cover its risk with insurance coverage, there are many alternatives available, which can be obtained from a large number of insurance companies and governmental or quasi-governmental agencies. Most of these sources have multiple programs, presenting a dizzying array of possible contracts. Most companies interested in such programs should contact an insurance agency specializing in these types of policies, as well as contact their banks or govern mental export support agencies in their country for further and more specific information.
A quick summary of the programs available in the United States gives an example of what is possible:
Government Programs
There are three government-related organizations in the United States that provide exporters with commercial and political insurance coverage:
The Ex-lm Bank The Export-Import Bank was created as an independent government agency in 1934. Its mission is to help create jobs in the United
States by supporting export sales. It has a very large number of programs, from political and commercial credit insurance to loan guarantees (for banks lending money to an exporter) and loans extended to foreign purchasers of American products. For years, the Ex-Im Bank was the only provider of political risk insurance in the United States.
There are two difficulties in dealing With the Ex-Im Bank. The first is the lengthy delays that usually accompany an application which means that an exporter involved in a negotiation with a foreign customer should attempt to secure coverage very early. The second is that it is an arm of the U.S. government and therefore subject to political pressures, such as abrupt cancellation of, coverage, for certain countries of the world. In addition, the product sold abroad must have at least 50 percent American content. Nevertheless, the Ex-Im Bank provides programs that are extremely popular with exporters and their bankers, such as the Ex-lm Bank Guarantee, which covers loan repayments by foreign purchasers. The complete program of the Ex-lm Bank is available at its website (www.exim.gov.)
OPIC The Overseas Private Investment Corporation is also a governmental agency, created in 1971 with the purpose of encouraging private investments in developing countries. Its purpose is quite political, as it seeks to further U.S. values overseas, but it offers several programs of loans, political insurance, and private equity investment funds, all quite advantageous to corporations interested in investing in developing countries. As of October 2002, there were more than 140 countries eligible for its programs, details of which can be found at www.opic.gov.
Unfortunately, OPIC presents the same challenge as the Ex-Im Bank—long processing times—but, because the products it offers cover long-term investments owned by U.S. firms, these delays are less critical.
SBA The Small Business Administration has created a couple of programs designed to help exporters finance their sales abroad: working capital loans and long-term loans for capital investments. However, the SBA does not pro- vide insurance of any sort for exporters.
Private Insurance Companies
There has recently been a substantial increase in the number of programs offered by private insurance companies in the United States, but it still is a business restricted to a few players. The practice of insuring a company's foreign receivables is still not as well established in that country as it is in many European countries.
In the United States, there are few insurance agencies specializing in this field, with approximately twenty of them underwriting most of the business.
The insurance companies that dominate the market are:
FCIA The Foreign Credit Insurance Association was created in 1961, primarily to offer products that combined the Ex-Im Bank's political insurance coverage and commercial credit insurance products. Today, many of the Ex-Im Bank products that contain credit insurance are using the FCIA for that portion of the coverage. The FCIA, though, is not a government agency, but is owned by Great American Insurance Company, a conglomerate of insurance companies. The FCIA products are mostly commercial credit insurance products, ranging from short-term to medium-term coverage for receivables. More information on the company's products can be found on its website (www.fcia.com).
Euler-ACI American Credit Indemnity is the other large player in the field, offering a similar array of commercial credit insurance products. It was recently purchased by the Euler Group, a French insurance conglomerate. More information on ACI's products can be found on its website (http://www.aciins.com).
American International Group American International Group (AIG) is the largest U.S.-based provider of commercial credit insurance, a product it calls Trade Credit Insurance; more information is available on its website (www.aig.com).
Lloyd's Certain Lloyd's Syndicates have added coverage of political risks to their underwriting portfolio and present the advantage of offering insurance for countries for which the United States' government will not provide any, such as Afghanistan, Albania, or Belarus. Although the United States government allows trade with any of these countries, it will not provide political insurance coverage; however, a Lloyd's Syndicate will.
End – of – Chapter Questions
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Describe some of the risks that an ocean shipment faces.
2. Describe some of the risks that an air shipment faces,
3. Explain the concept of General Average, and explain, with a numerical example, how it is utilized,
4. Explain the concept of "insurable interest." Explain who has an insurable interest in three different transactions conducted under three different Incoterms.
5. What possible risk management strategies can an exporter/importer follow? Explain each strategy's advantages and disadvantages from the perspective of a small exporter.
6. What insurance coverage is required under CIF or CIP Incoterms? Explain which risks are not covered, and how an importer can still protect itself against them.
7. Choose three possible Marine Insurance clauses and describe their usefulness.
8. Explain the concept of International Credit Insurance and explain how it is possible to contract a policy covering commercial and political risks.
Endnotes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Mongelluzzo, Bill, "Ports looking inland for success" The Journal of Commerce, March 17, 1998, p. lB.
2. Baldwin, Tom, "It's time to inspect the containers.., (Don't attempt this one at home, folks)" The Journal of Commerce, November 13, 1997, p. 2B.
3. Baldwin, Tom,"Container industry braces for law-suits,' The Journal of Commerce, November 12, 1998, p. 1A.
4. Baldwin, Tom,"Container industry braces for law-suits," The Journal of Commerce, November 12, 1998, p. IA.
5. Hall, Kevin G. and Rip Watson, "Georges makes waves on Gulf Coast" The Journal of Commerce, September 25, 1998, p. 14A.
6. Baldwin, Tom, "Container industry braces for law-suits," The ]ournal of Commerce, November 12, 1998, p. I A.
7. Baldwin, Tom, "Storm-tossed boxship splits: Crew rescued" The Journal of Commerce, November 26, 1997, p. 12A.
8. Cottrill, Ken, "A Poseidon adventure,' Traffic World, January 20, 1999.
9. Journal of Commerce Staff, "Complexity, speed of modern ships increases risks," The journal of Cornmerce, November 19, 1999, p. 9.
10. Baldwin, Tom, "Ship hit by fire and explosion has lost 85% to 90% of its cargo" The Journal of Commerce, November 25, 1998, p. 16A.
11. Jowit, Juliette, "Inspection plan ordered for tankers" The Financial Times, May 5, 2000, p. 8.
12. International Underwriting Association, http://www.iua.co.uk,
13. aldwin, Tom, "Salvors struggle to stabilize the Carla in stormy Atlantic," The Journal of Commerce, December 2, 1997.
14. Baldwin, Tom, "Storm-tossed boxship splits: Crew rescued," The Journal of Commerce, November 26, 1997.
15. Baldwin, Tom, "The case of the reappearing rock, and other unchartered navigational hazards," The Journal of Commerce, April 30, 1998, p. 2B.
16. Associated Press News Release, "Cruise ship hits caribbean reef, December 15,1998.
17. Hastings, Warren, Marine Insurance Compendium, 1999, General Management Services, Inc., Publisher, 76 Mamaroneck Avenue, Suite 6, White Plains, NY10601, USA.
18. Fabey, Michael, "Remember the Titanic? Your business does not have to sink, even if your cargo does" World Trade, January 1998, p.54.
19. Barth, Steve and Michael D. White, "Hazardous cargo" World Trade, November 1998, pp. 46-48.
20. Barnett, Chris, "Taking steps to trip cargo thieves,' The Journal of Commerce, April 3, 1998, p. 1A.
21. McCosh, Daniel J., "Theft drives firms to armor trucks,' The Journal of Commerce, August 30, 1999, p. 1.
22. "Piracy report reveals major increase in attacks in1999," Press Release of the International Chamber of Commerce, January 24, 2000, http://www.iccwbo. org/home/news _archives, October 5, 2000.
23. "Organized crime takes to the high seas," Press release of the Piracy Report Center, February 4, 2002,
http://www.icwbo.org/home/news_archives/2002/piracy_report.asp, October 13, 2002.
24. "Weekly Piracy Report, International Chamber of Commerce--International Maritime Bureau, Piracy Reporting Centre, http://www.iccwbo.org/ccs/imb_
piracy/weekly. Piracy. report.asp, October 8, 2000.
25. Bangsberg, P. T., "Crew rescued, ship missing in latest attack" The Journal of Commerce, November 12, 1999, p. 15.
26. "Piracy Reporting Centre foils another hijack on the high seas," Press Release of the Piracy Reporting Centre, June 16, 2000,
http://www.iccwbo.org/ccs/news\_archives, October 5, 2000.
27. Bangsberg, P. T., "Gurkhas offered for on-board protection" The Journal of Commerce, February 28, 2000, p. 19.
28. Mullins, Ronald Gift, "Now there's a lojack for ships,'The Journal of Commerce, July 13, 1998, p. lB.
29. Richardson, Paul, "A marine accident just waiting to happen; The Journal of Comnmerce, August 30, 1999.
30. Kaser, Tom, "Iceberg ahead! Mariners alerted" The Journal of Commerce, October 2, 1998, p. lB.
31. Associated Press News Release, "Skyway disaster lives remembered" May 8, 2000.
32. TirschweU, Peter,"Pilot's trip to restroom leads to expensive damage to crane" The Journal of Commerce, February 19, 1997, p. 3B.
33. Motley, Robert, "Shippers' Case Law" American Shipper, February 1999, p. 36.
34. Motley, Robert, "Shippers' Case Law" American Shipper, March 2000, p. 46.
35. Motley, Robert, "Shippers' Case Law" American Shipper, June 1998, p. 40.
36. Mongelluzzo, Bill, "Lines face higher costs, possible delays;' The Journal of Commerce, January 14, 2000, p. 1.
37. Paton, Dean, "Immigrants take ever-more perilous routes to America" The Christian Science Monitor, January 25, 2000, p. 3.
38. Malcomson, Scott L., "The Unquiet Ship,' The New Yorker, January 20, 1997, pp. 72-81.
39. Hall, Kevin G., "Free rides have big price tags" The Journal of Commerce, March 11, 1997, p. 1A.
40. Bunce, Matthew, "Stowaway deaths haunt ship industry in Africa" The Journal of Commerce, March 13, 1997, p. 3B.
41. Associated Press, "Yugoslav ship may be set free" The Journal of Commerce, March 31, 1997, p. 4B.
42. Scherer, Ron, "Abandon ship: New law of sea" The Christian Science Monitor, December 29, 1998, p. 2.
43. Associated Press News Release, "Romanian sailors abandoned on decaying ship" April 8, 1998.
44. Associated Press News Release, "Abandoned crews victiros of politics; June 22, 2000.
45. Ports of the World, Fifteenth Edition, Cigna Insurance Corporation, available from Publisher, Ports of the Cigna Companies, EO. Box 7716, Philadelphia, pennsylvania 19192, USA..
46. Kutoba, Coco, and Bill Mongelluzzo, "Japanese dock strike disrupt carriers" The Journal of Commerce, March 12, 1997, p. 1A.
47. "The freighter forecast" Boeing: Current market outlook demand for airplanes, Boeing Corporation, http://www.boeing.com/commercial/cmo/4da09.html, October 16, 2000.
48. Vaughan, Emmett J. and Therese M. Vaughan, Fundamentals of Risk and Insurance, Eighth Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New York, New York, USA, 1999.
49. Marine Insurance: Notes and Comments on Ocean Cargo Insurance, Cigna Property and Casualty Specialty Insurance, P.O. Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
50. Vaughan, Emmett J. and Therese M. Vaughan, Fundamentals of Risk and Insurance, Eighth Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New York, New York, USA, 1999.
51. Banham, Russ, "They've got them covered," The ]ourhal of Commerce, February 23, 1998, p. 6A.
52. Marine Insurance: Notes and Comments on Ocean Cargo Insurance, Cigna Property and Casualty Specialty Insurance, P.O. Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
53. Marine Insurance: Notes and Comments on Ocean Cargo Insurance, Cigna Property and Casualty Specialty Insurance, P.O. Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
54. Ocean Cargo Handbook, Chubb Group of Insurance Companies, Warren, New Jersey 07059, USA.
55. The Register of Ships on CD ROM, Lloyd's Register, available at http://www.fairplay-publications.co.uk/
56. Santi, Pascale, "Bien assure, TotalFina ne devrait theoriquement rien payer;' Le Monde, December 25, 1999.
57. "Explanatory note prepared by the 1992 Fund Secretariat" International Oil Pollution Compensation Fund, http://www.iopcfund.org/gennote.htm , October 13, 2000.
58."Institute marine cargo clauses A," found at http://www.jus.uio.no/lm/institute.marine.cargo. clauses.a. 1982/doc.html, October 13, 2000.
59. "Risk management and audit techniques: Ocean cargo," excerpted from Risk Management and Audit Techniques, Revised Edition, Standard Publishing Corp., Boston, Massachusetts, USA, and reprinted at http://www.poulton.com/carginf2.htm, October 2, 2000.
60. Ramberg, Jan, 1CC Guide to lncoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No. 620, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert l er, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
61. Marine Insurance: Notes and Comments on Ocean Cargo Insurance, Cigna Property and Casualty SpevaniaCialty Insurance,19192, UsA.P'O" Box 7716, philadelphia, Pennsvylvania 19192,USA
62. Ramberg, Jan, ICC Guide to Incoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No. 620, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
63. Marine Insurance: Notes and Comments on Ocean Cargo Insurance, Cigna Property and Casualty Specialty Insurance, P.O. Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
64. Ocean Cargo Handbook, Chubb Group of Insurance Companies, Warren, New Jersey 07059, USA.
65. Leonard, Adrian, "Another drop in ranks of Lloyd's 'Names'," The Journal of Commerce, January 7, 1999, p. 6A.
66. McClintick, David, "The decline and fall of Lloyd's of London" Time, European Edition, February 21, 2000.
67. Redman, Christopher, "For whom the bell tolls;' Time, European Edition, November 13, 2000, p. 42.
68. Holmes, Sarah, "Names fight to keep position at Lloyd's;' The Journal of Commerce, July 28, 1998, p. 5A.
69. Leonard, Adrian, "Another drop in ranks of Lloyd's 'Names"' The Journal of Commerce, January 7, 1999, p. 6A.
70. Yvon, Laurent, "COFACE: les outils pour equilibrer vos risques," Le MOC1 (Moniteur du Commerce International), September 28, 1995, pp. 116-125.
71. Barovick, Richard, "Brokers sit in catbird seat,' The Journal of Commerce, September 24, 1997, p. 1C.
Chapter 9
International Ocean Transportation
Outline
9-1 Types of service 9-3d Combination Ships
9-2 Size of Vessels 9-3e LASH Ships
9-2a Dead-Weight Tonnage 9-3f Crude Carriers
9-2b Registered Tonnage 9-3g Dry-Bulk Carriers
9-2c Displacement 9-3h Gas Carriers
9-2d Plimsoll lines 9-4 Flag
9-2e Size Categories 9-5 Conference
9-3 Types of Vessels 9-6 Liability Conventions
9-3a Containerships 9-7 Non-Vessel-Operating Common Carriers
9-3b Roll-On/Roll-Off Ships End-of-Chapter Questions
9-3c Break-Bulk Ships Endnotes
KEY Terms
bunker post-Panamax
cabotage product carrier
conference secondary registry
dead-weight tonnage(DWT) stores
displacement tonnage tariff
flags of convenience tramp
gross registered tonnage(GRT) trot-on/trot-off
Hague Rules tweendeck
Hague-Visby Rules
Hamburg Rules
laker
LASH barges
LASH mothership
light tonnage
lightering
liner
nautical fault
net registered tonnage
open registry
Panamax
In order to manage international logistics, it is fundamental to have a good understanding of the transportation alternatives open to an international shipper. The next three chapters provide an overview of the many options given to an exporter or an importer interested in making transportation arrangements for a given shipment.
The first chapter(Chapter 9) deals with the alternatives available in ocean transportation and the complexities of the international framework of rules that enable shipping lines to operate. The second chapter(Chapter 10) deals with air transportation and its rules and regulations. The third chapter(Chapter 11) deals with land transportation—rail and road—but also covers multi-modal transportation, which is not really a mode of transportation, but a shipping alternatives that simplifies the work of the shipper—exporter or importer—by allowing it to send its freight with only one shipping company. It also covers pipelines and several other unusual modes of transportation, mostly used in very limited markets.
9-1 Types of Service
The first differentiation to be made is the one between inner and tramp ships.
Liner ships travel on a regular voyage, following a pre-established schedule, and with determined ports of call. A scheduled voyage may include only two ports(Santos, Brazil to Miami, USA, and back) or, more commonly, a series of ports in one region of the world(for example, Bremerhaven, Germany; Rotterdam, The Netherland; Felix towe, Great Britain) to another (for example, Boston, USA, Baltimore, USA; Nassau, Bahamas). Quite a few liners follow” round the world”(RTW) schedules, either eastbound, or westbound, passing through the Panama Canal and the Suez Canal. There are many types of liner ships, a large number of which are adapted to specific routes, their size and equipment dependent on the ports of call they visit, and on the specific types of cargo that their trade route entails.
Unlike liners, tramp ships operate wherever the market dictates. They do not operate on a regular schedule but travel wherever the company using the vessel wants the cargo delivered. Because of the way they operate, tramp ships usually carry only one type of cargo at a time, for one exporter or importer. Most tramp ships therefore are designed for one type of cargo exclusively, even if they carry several “dry” cargoes or several gredes of petroleum products. A possible analogy is that a tramp vessel is a taxicab, whereas a liner ship is a public bus.
Liner A ship that operates on a regular schedule, traveling from a group of ports to another group of ports.
Tramp A ship that does not operate on a regular schedule and is available to be chartered for any voyage, from any port to any port.
9-2 Size of Vessels
Ships are also often categorized by their size, which is expressed in tons. Unfortunately, there are several ways of evaluating the tonnage of a vessel, and the “tonnage” of a vessel can bu used for very different purposes. All of this leads to some differentiations which are pretty difficult to comprehend.
9-2a Dead-Weight Tonnage
The dead-weight tonnage(DWT) is the total capacity of the ship(i.e., the maximum weight of the cargo that a vessel can carry) expressed in long tons(2,240lbs) or in metric tons(2204.6lbs).It is the measurement used by companies interested in shipping cargo, and is often just called” tonnage.” It is measured using the weight of the difference in water displacement when the ship is empty and when it is fully loaded to its maximum. The dead-weight tonnage of a ship includes the fuel that the ship needs to travel—called bunker—and the supplies that it needs to function—called stores—therefore, it is more the theoretical capacity of the ship than its actual capacity. A vessel, when loaded with a very dense material such as iron ore-can utilize its weight capacity before it reaches its volume capacity; conversely ,it can reaches its volume capacity before it reaches its weight capacity if it is loaded with a light but voluminous cargo, such as timber.
dead-weight tonnage(DWT) The maximum weight that a ship can carry.
bunker The amount of fuel that a ship carries on board and that it needs to travel.
stores All the supplies that a ship carries and that it needs to function.
9-2b Registered tonnage
The gross registered tonnage (GRT ) is the total volume capacity of the ship, expressed in hundreds of cubic feet (2.83 cubic meters), It only measures the capacity of the ship below its deck, so this measurement is not appropriate for determining the cargo-carrying capacity of a ship since a good number of vessels carry cargo above deck .This measurement is used to determine how much tax a ship owner will have to pay to the country in which the ship is registered, or to the authorities of the ports it visits or the canals it uses. Once the volume occupied by the engine room, the crew, and other space necessary for the good operation of the ship is removed, the net registered tonnage is obtained.
9-2c Displacement
The displacement tonnage is the total weight of the ship , when fully loaded ,measured by the weight of the volume of water it displaces. The light tonnage is the weight of the ship, measured the same way, when the vessel is empty .Both are generally measured in long tons, and are used for naval architecture in order to determine the vessel’s stability , the stress it endures ,and other engineering issues
gross registered tonnage(GRT) The total volume of a ship’s carrying capacity, measured as the space available below deck, and expressed in hundreds of cubic feet.
net registered tonnage The net registered tonnage of a ship is obtained by subtracting the volume occupied by the engine room and the spaces necessary for the operation of the ship from the gross registered tonnage.
displacement tonnage The total weight of the ship, when fully loaded, measured by using the weight of the water being displaced.
light tonnage The total weight of the ship , when empty, measured by using the weight of the water being displaced.
9-2d Plimsoll lines
One more difficulty arises when one understands that ships are considered “fully loaded” at different drafts(how deep they sit in the water) in function of the season in which they are operating, of the latitudes under which it plies its trade , and of the density of the water, The deepest a ship can sit is called the “tropical line”, followed by the “summer line,” the ”winter line,” and the “winter-North Atlantic” line. A “flash water” line is also present, as fresh water density is lower; a ship will sit lower in fresh water than it would in saltwater with the same quantity of cargo, All of these lines are painted on the hull and form a diagram called the plimsoll mark (see Figure 9-1). The dead-weight tonnage is generally determined at the summer line or at the line that represents accurately the conditions under which a ship is used .For example,a vessel used consistently in the Caribbean would have its DWT calculated with the tropical Plimsoll mark.
Figure 9-2
A Panamax Containership in the miraflores locks.
Photo courtesy of Maersk Sealand.
9-2e Size Categories
One of the biggest distinctions made on ships’ sizes is the one made between the ships that can travel through the locks of the Panama Canal and the ones that can not. A ship of the maximum size that can possibly fit through these locks is called a Panamax ship; such a ship can have up to 75,000 tons of dead-weight tonnage and its outside dimensions allow it to barely fit within the locks, with only a few inches of clearance between the locks’ walls and the ship(see Figure 9-2). The locks are 1,000 feet long and 110 feet wide. The longest ship to cross the Panama Canal is the Marcona Prospector, which is 973 feet long and 106 feet wide. The widest is the USS New Jersey, which is 108 feet wide. All ships built that are larger than this size are called post-Panamax ships. Other terminologies used are:
· Suez-Max ships: This term is used to describe ships sized at roughly 150,000 dead-weight tons and which are of the maximum size that can fit through the Suez Canal(about 285 meters long,35 meters wide, and 23 meters of draft).In 1996,the Suez Canal was deepened and widened, so the Suez-Max terminology is losing some of its validity.
· Capesize ships: This term is used to describe large dry-bulk carriers of a capacity greater than 80,000 dead-weight tons.
· Very large crude carrier: This term is used to describe an oil tanker of up to 300,000 dead-weight tonnage, which is about 350 meters long,55 meters wide, and has 28 meters of draft. That’s 1,150 feet long,180 feet wide, and 92 feet of draft.
· Ultra large crude carrier: This term describe an oil of more than 300,000 dead-weight tonnage. One of the largest ULCCs built, the Sea Giant, is of 555,000 dead-weight tonnage, is 415 meters long,63 meters wide, and has a draft of 35 meters. That represents a surface of 2.5 hectares, which translates to 1,360 feet long,207 feet wide, a draft of 115 feet, and an area of 6.5 acres. Such ships generally are unable to go into traditional ports and remain in deep sea at all times: their cargo is removes using a process called “lightering”(see Section 9-3f).
Panamax A ship of the maximum size that can enter the locks of the Panama Canal.
post-Panamax A ship whose size is too large to enter the locks of the Panama Canal.
For comparison purposes, one of the largest containerships, the Regina Maersk, is 302 meters long, 43meters wide, has a draft of 12 meters, and has a dead-weight tonnage of 65,600 tons.
9-3 Types of Vessels
Even thought there are around 45,000 commercial ships worldwide, almost every single one of these ships is designed differently. It is therefore difficult to classify them much better than in broad-based groups, with many ships not fitting neatly into one category.
9-3a Containerships
The containerized is growing rapidly: approximately 60 percent of the world trade is containerized, and container transportation volume is growing by 9 percent per year. Even in trade lanes where containers are solidly implanted, such as Asia-North America or Europe-North America, the growth in the volume of shipment is estimated at 6-8 percent.Given the fact that goods that traditionally traveled in bulk are now shipped using containers-for example, forestry products or grain-and given the fact that intermodal transportation is responding well to customer needs, it seems that the container, which was created in 1956, will dominate international trade yet further.
Containerships, also known as “box ships,” carry containerized cargo on a scheduled voyage. Vessels dedicated to the container trade can carry up to 6,600 TEUs—twenty-foot equivalent unit, or the space equivalent of a twenty-foot container—but there is a large number of mixed-cargo ships that can also carry containers, sometimes as few as 100 TUEs. Most containerships rely upon the port cranes to unload their cargo, but some do have cranes on board. All containerships used to be capable of going through the Panama Canal and carried around 3,000 containers. When the first post-Panamax containerships were delivered, they carried upward of 4,500 TUEs and forced some substantial changes in ports. For example, they were so wide and so high that some ports had to upgrade their crane equipment (see Figure 9-3). Moreover, some ports became entirely inaccessible; some of the post-Panamax ships cannot enter some of the ports on the East Coast of the United States, as they do not “fit” under the bridges or the channels are not deep enough (for example, the Port of New York-New Jersey).
As there ate plans to build yet larger ships, there will be additional demands made on port infrastructure, and it will certainly reduce the number of alternative ports from which to ship. While 8,000 TUEs ships are expected to be common place in the next decade, some call for ships as big as 18,000 TUEs, which will reduce the number of ports to which these giant ships can berth to a handful worldwide. The trend in the industry is therefore seen as the creation of a system of large “hubs,”to and from which the mega-ships would travel, coupled with a number of smaller ships, called “feeder ships,” which would travel between these giant hub ports and smaller ports. Those feeder ships would cause transshipments to occur, it is estimated that it would lower transportation costs.
Traditional containerships hold containers “under deck” as well as “on deck.” Some containers are first loaded in the holds of the ship, then the hatch covers (the deck) are put in place, with the remainder of the containers are placed on top of that. Containers placed under deck are usually held in place by vertical guides, along with the crane operator slides them. On-deck containers are usually stacked on top of each other, and latched to each other with metal bars and twistlocks .since the early 1990s, several shipping lines have tried to speed up the process of loading containers by equipping their ships with vertical guides for on deck containers as well, and eventually some have eliminated the deck altogether , simply choosing t equip the vessel with much larger bilge pumps (the pumps that remove the water from the inside of a ship). Eventually, it is conceivable that the concept of “deck” will no longer exist in the container trade.
Another possible change in the container industry would be the creation of fast ships, or ships capable of crossing the Atlantic Ocean in 3.5 days, a project pursued by a company aptly named FastShip. Those ships would carry 1,500 TUEs and travel between two specifically equipped ports—Philadelphia, USA, and Cherbourg, France—reducing the transit time from supplier to customer to seven days, or somewhat similar to the six days that an airline can achieve. While the costs of shipping would be 60 percent higher than for a traditional trans-Atlantic crossing, the founders of the venture estimate that some time-sensitive cargo could benefit from their service. skeptics abound, but there is certainly a trend toward faster transportation and reduced inventory costs. In addition, it is likely that it will reduce the costs of airfreight as it increases competition, so most shippers should benefit.
9-3b Roll-On/Roll-Off Ships
Roll-on/roll-off (RORO) ships were created to accommodate cargo that was self-propelled, such as automobiles or trucks, or cargo that could be wheeled into a ship, such as railroad cars. They are essentially floating parking garages.
The concept is fairly straightforward. Since it takes a long time to load such vehicles “over the rail” (i.e., by using a crane), it is preferable to load them by rolling them onto the ship. RORO ships therefore have a portion of their hull that opens up and acts as a ramp on which the vehicles are driven before being parked on the many decks of the ship and secured with chains. The hull opening is either on the side of the ship or on its stern(rear).
RORO ships have an advantage in that specialized lifting equipment is not required, even for the heaviest of loads, since the cargo rolls under its own power or is pulled by a tractor. It therefore only needs some docking space and a substantial number of dock workers to load or unload its cargo. There are distinctions between apure car-carrier (PCC) ship, which loads only cars and has decks with only five feet of overhead clearance, and other, more versatile, “true” RORO ships which can accommodate larger cargo. Many RORO ships are equipped with adjustable decks, which allow them to transport any sort of rolling cargo.
As the number of cars manufactured worldwide increases, it seems that the future of the RORO concept is secure.
Becoming a” Master Unlimited”
Maneuvering an ultra large crude carrier (ULCC) is a job that few people can handle, but it is the daily responsibility of captains who have reached the prestigious title of “Master Unlimited”-there are only about 3,000 of them world-wide and they are the only ones accredited to command ships of more than 5,000 tons GRT. It can be quite a hair-raising experience. Consider that a ULCC can be as long as four football fields, and that, at cruising speed and fully loaded, it stops in a mere six miles if its engine is stopped. If put in full reverse, the distance “shrinks” to two miles.
In order to learn how to pilot these behemoths, captains either practice on computer simulations or travel to the unusual training camp of Port revel in the foothills of the Alps in France, where they are placed in models of large shops, Like their real-life equivalent, these model ships are extremely underpowered: a ship of this size is “like a large lorry (truck) with a moped engine and no brakes” says an instructor at Port Revel, nothing that the forty-foot-long model Europe, weighing 41,000 lbs, has a motor of less than one horsepower with which the skipper has to maneuver it. After a few days on the pond at Port Revel, these gifted sailors are capable of maneuvering these ships so well that they can squeeze a 700-foot behemoth in the 750-foot space left between two other ships in port without the help of a tug. In other words, simple parallel parking.
There is a specific group of dry-bulk carriers that serve the ports of the Great Lakes, between the United States and Canada, called lakers.(Their characteristics are determined by the size of locks of the Welland Canal, which gives them long and narrow hulls, Lakers trade mostly in three commodities: iron ore and iron ore pellets, coal, and finished steel. They are not true” ocean-going vessels,” but fit the general description of dry-bulk carriers.
Although not altogether the same as dry-bulk carriers, there is also a large number of ships that carry specialized cargoes that can be considered as dry bulk. Examples are refrigerated ships—also called” reefer ships” –which are slowly being replaced by refrigerated containers aboard containerships, which therefore carry liquid bulk cargoes such as molasses and vegetable oils; chemical tankers, which carry liquid chemicals; and cement carriers.
9-3h Gas Carriers
Another important bulk trade is the transportation of liquefied natural gas (LNG) and of liquefied petroleum gas ( LPG). These types of carriers have a very distinctive shape. These ships hold several spheres of compressed gasses, only part of which are visible above their main deck (see Figure 9-12). The LNG and LPG trades tend to be slightly different than the average bulk transport, as they are used in a particular trade for long periods of time, on long-term contracts—called time charter parties (see Section 7-5e) –and therefore nearly have a sailing schedule, not unlike liner ships.
The End of the Shipping Line
Most ships, after a mere twenty-five years at sea, end up so damaged by the sea and the elements that they are no longer economically viable vessels (it costs too much to maintain then). In addition, as the size of ships increases, shipping lines have a surplus of capacity that they are loathe to sell, as they do not want to encourage new competitor
Where do all of these old ships end their lives?
Many of them end up on the beaches of Pakistan, Bangladesh, or India, where they are dismantled, by hand, into sellable chunks of scrap steel and other metals. At the present time, 90 percent of older ships end their lives in these countries, and half of them die in Alang, a beach in the Indian State of Gujarat where 600or so scrap business dismantle 400ships every year. These are dangerous and poorly paid jobs, but it is estimated that they provide direct and indirect employment for at least 200,000 workers.
Despite governmental protests about the impact of this business on India’s image and its workers’ health, more and more ships are dismantled in this area of the world, and, as the world fleet ages and is replaced with more modern and technologically advanced ships, this trend shows no sign of abating.
9-4 Flag
By international convention, each vessel engaged in international trade must be registered in a specific country, and therefore” flies” a specific country’s flag. In many ways, the vessel is an extension of the territory of this country, and all its laws and regulations apply on board the ship. In addition, the vessel must pay the taxes that this country imposes. There is one significant caveat to this situation: with very few exceptions, a ship owner can choose the country in which its ship is registered, or choose the flag that it flies.
The flags of developed countries tend to impose very substantial regulations on the way a ship is operated in such areas as the composition of the crew on board, its minimum training requirement, its nationality (since it is a country’s extension of its territory, its immigration rules apply), the work rules on board (such as the number of hours worked per day and week, before overtime pay is earned), the vacation time earned by the crew, and so on. In addition, taxation can be significantly higher. However, regulations and taxes for some developing countries are minimal. It is estimated that flying an American flag rather than a developing country’s flag can add at least 30 percent to the operating costs of a vessel. A 1997 Maritime Administration study showed that a break-bulk ship flying the U.S. flag required a crew of thirty-four and cost US $13,300 per day, whereas the same ship flying a developing country’s flag would require a crew of twenty-four and cost US $1,400.
A small number of countries have created what is called an open registry(, which means that any ship owner can choose to have its vessel fly this flag. There are no requirements regarding the citizenship of the owners of the ship. Since these countries tend to have minimal on-board requirements and taxes, many ship owners decide to fly such countries’ flags, which have been derisively called flags of convenience. Most of these open registries emanate form developing countries, but, fairly recently, some developed countries established their own versions of open registries, which are called secondary registries,( with much less stringent requirements than their “normal” registries in order to prevent their merchant fleet from being entirely registered with flags of convenience. Norway, Denmark, and France are three notorious examples. Table 9-1 shows the largest fleets in the word, a list dominated by ships flying open registry flags with minimum requirements such as Panama, Liberia, and the Bahamas—Greece is an exception.
It should be noted that the choice of a flag regulates the qualifications of the crew, its compensation, and the amount of the taxes that the ship owners pay. It does not influence the seaworthiness of the vessel, which is evaluated by Classification Societies and determines the insurance premiums (hull insurance and P&I insurance) that the vessel owners have to pay (see Section 8-7). A competent crew and a seaworthy vessel are guaranteed if the vessel is registered in a developed country, if it is operated by a reputable shipping company, or if it is classed with one of the major classification societies; however, problems are more likely to arise with vessels registered under a flag of convenience.
TABLE 9-1 Major Merchant Fleets of the World, July 1, 1999
|
Country |
Dead-Weight Tonnage (in 000s of tons) |
Rank by Dead-Weight |
Number of Ships>=1,000 DWT |
Rank by Number of Ships |
|
Panama |
152,308 |
1 |
4,615 |
1 |
|
Liberia |
96,365 |
2 |
1,657 |
2 |
|
Greece |
42,841 |
3 |
702 |
10 |
|
Bahamas |
41,593 |
4 |
1,365 |
6 |
|
Malta |
41,293 |
5 |
1,044 |
7 |
|
Cyprus |
35,408 |
6 |
1,365 |
6 |
|
Singapore |
33,012 |
7 |
883 |
8 |
|
Norway |
30,279 |
8 |
657 |
12 |
|
China |
22,238 |
9 |
1,457 |
4 |
|
Japan |
19,419 |
10 |
682 |
11 |
|
United States |
16,286 |
11 |
285 |
25 |
|
The Philippines |
11,646 |
12 |
517 |
14 |
|
Saint Vincent |
11,182 |
13 |
811 |
9 |
|
Marshall Islands |
11,129 |
14 |
129 |
37 |
|
India |
10,856 |
15 |
295 |
24 |
|
Total worldwide |
780,361 |
|
28,600 |
|
Source: U.S. Maritime Administration Annual Report, 1999.
Countries attempt to influence, as much as possible, the flags of the ships that enter their ports. Although they cannot outright ban certain nationalities, they can prevent ships not registered in their country from carrying certain freight. For example, the Cargo Preference Act of the United States requires that at least 50percent of U.S. government cargo be carried by U.S.-flagged ships. The Jones Act requires that that cargo transported from one port in the United States to another port in the United States—a trade called cabotage(—must be carried exclusively on U.S.-flagged ships. This is the case for cargo going from the West Coast to Hawaii, for example. Finally, all cargo in trade supported by the Ex-Im Bank must be shipped though U.S.-flagged ships.
The United States’ situation is yet more complicated. It compensates ship owners who elect to flag their vessels with the stars- and-stripes to the tune of $2.1million per year per vessel, but not just because it is more expensive to run a U.S.-flagged ship. The reason is purely military; because of its geographic situation, the United States would need a lot of ship transport capacity to ship troops and military materials abroad in the case of a conflict. In that eventuality, the U.S. government can then requisition all merchant ships registered with the U.S. flag. in order to ensure that it does have some requisition, the U.S. government subsidizes ship owners who choose this alternative. In 1997, two large shipping companies re-flagged some of their ships with the U.S. flag—Maersk and APL—because of this incentive.
Flying the Flag
The choice of a flag has many consequences beyond the crew’s training and the taxes that the ship owners have to pay:
*Cabotage rules require that American flags and crews be used for ships traveling from one port in the United States to another port in the United States. Cruise ships, not one of which flies the U.S. flag, therefore cannot travel between two U.S. port. Cruise ships destined for Alaska leave from Vancouver, Canada, and cruise ships destined for Hawaii leave from Ensenada, Mexico.
*Most of the cruise ships fly flags of convenience, such as the Bahamas, or secondary registries, such as that of Norway. Because those registries do not exert much oversight over working conditions on their vessels, working cruise ship crews are generally employed for substandard wages and in miserable jobs. Very low wages are commonplace, and so are twelve- to fifteen-hour days. Passengers are usually oblivious to the discrepancies between their lifestyle on board and that of the crew around them.
*when Hong Kong rejoined the People’s Republic of China in July 1997, a flag issue surfaced. Since it is common courtesy to fly a host port’s flag on a ship, it meant that Evergreen’s (a Taiwanese shipping company) ships would have had to fly the PRC’s flag when they called on the port of Hong Kong, and that Hong Kong ships would have had to fly the Taiwanese flag when they were in Taipei. Neither alternative was welcome; the issue was finally resolved when both sides decide not to fly any flag in each other’s ports.
*During the conflict between Iran in the Persian Gulf, several Kuwaiti ships were temporarily placed under the U.S. flag so that they could gain the protection of the U.S. Navy, a protection it refused to extend to U.S. owners of tankers flying flags of convenience. The U.S. Navy finally relented, and all crude carriers were temporarily re-flagged as American while they were in the Persian Gulf.
9-5 Conferences
One of the unusual characteristics of international liners is that they often (used to) operate within the confines of a conference(, or a legal cartel within which all shipping line members of the conference operate. Conferences are organized on trade routes, usually a series of ports in one country and another in another country; for example, a conference will cover the trade between United States’ Atlantic ports and European ports. Within the conference, the prices charged by the shipping lines are identical by commodity, for the same volume and the same weight. All of these rates are called tariffs( and are published. The complexity of such arrangements is extraordinary: there are some auditing firms whose sole job is to make sure that the shipping lines charged the proper amount for a given shipment .shipping lines, on the other hand, try to flight the purposeful misidentification of cargo by shippers who try to get a lower rate.
Additional enforcement of such standardized prices on some government agency; in the United States, it is the responsibility of the Federal Maritime Commission. It may seem paradoxical that the United States’ government has an agency in charge of preventing cartels and collusions (the Federal Trade Commission), while at the same time it has one in charge of enforcing some, but this is nevertheless the case.
The reason behind the existence of conference is that the liner trade is extremely capital intensive, and that most costs for a liner ship are fixed costs. It is estimated that they can amount to 80 percent of the costs of a shipping company,
Leaving only20 percent of the costs dependent on the weight of the cargo. The existence of regulated conferences prevent shipping lines from competing on price, potentially a very detrimental behavior, as was observed in the 1980s in the ernment which would want its economy to have access to reliable ocean transportation ,there are other reasons for the existence of conferences: it is also a way to ”move” cargo expeditiously from a given port and free it from clutter. Since all rates paid on conference ships are the same, no shipper will wait for the next cheaper ship, and this will increase the probability that the cargo will just take the next available ship to that destination.
On May1,1999,the Ocean Shipping reform Act(OSRA) took effect in the United States, and it brought many changes to the conference system. Although conferences are not eliminated, and although shipping lines retain their antitrust immunity, the creation of private, confidential price agreement between large shippers and shipping lines is now authorized. Since this date, several shipping lines have left conferences and negotiated private, confidential contracts with their coustomers, At the date of this writing, the future of the conference system in the United States is in doubt, although the concept is still alive and well in other countries—China just proposed to institute one.
The impact of OSRA is not yet fully known, although it seems to have had a similar impact on the market as deregulation: tremendous uncertainty in an industry that was used to “business as usual” for a number of years. Undoubtedly, OSRA has had a positive impact for large shippers and, specifically, for companies making a lot of multi-modal shipments. It may also have lessened the competitiveness of smaller shippers, which are not large enough to negotiate rates below the ones published by the shipping lines. OSRA has also triggered a call forr reform—or abolition—of the antitrust immunity of shipping lines in the United States and the rest of the world.
9-6 Liability Conventions
The Ocean Shipping Reform Act also seems to have had one significant impact: it brought yet one more level of complexity to the conventions regulating the liability of shipping lines by allowing private, confidential contracts between shippers and shipping lines, where traditional liability constraints are replaced by negotiated ones. But, first, a review of the complex array of alternatives is necessary.
In 1924, an “International Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules of Law relating to Bills of Lading” was adopted by twenty-six participating countries. This convention, known as the Hague Rule , limits the liability of a ship owner toward the cargo owners to US$500 per package “or customary freight unit, ”and it allows ship owners to escape liability in seventeen specified cases—called the seventeen “defenses”—including the infamous nautical fault , or errors of the crew of the ship in its management or navigation. In1936, the United States adopted the Hague Rules by incorporating them in the Carriage of Goods by Sea Act(COGSA).
The US$500 limit per package became a problem with the advent of containers, when shipping lines began claiming threat they were ”freight units” and attempting to limit their liability to US$500 per container. The Hague Rules were therefore revised in 1968 to clarify the definition of “package” to the units listed on the bill of lading. It also increased the liability of the carrier to US$666.67 or US$2 per kilogram, whichever was higher. These revised rules are known as Hague-Visby Rules . The United States has not ratified this treaty, although it has been ratified by all of all of its major trading partners. In 1979, the Hague-Visby Rules were amended to reflect the declining value of the U.S. dollar, and the liability limits were expressed in Special Drawing Rights(SDR), the artificial currency of the International Monetary Fund(IMF), and set at SDR 666.67 per package or SDR 2 per kilogram, whichever was highest.
The advent of better navigational equipment and the annoyance of shippers at the continuous of the nautical fault defense triggered yet another round of international negotiations led by the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law(UNCITRAL), which abolished the seventeen defenses of the Hague and Hague-Visby Rules and replaced them with only three: (1) damage the carrier took all reasonable steps to avoid, (2) damage by fire, and (3) damage due to an attempt by the carrier to save life or property at sea. It also increased liability limits to SDR 835 per package and SDR 2.5 per kilogram. These rules are known as the Hamburg Rules and have only been ratified by a small number of countries, only a handful of which are significant international traders. A complete list of which countries have adopted which rules is available on the Internet.
Since the United States has not ratified either the Hague-Visby Rules or the Hamburg Rules, the COGSA is still in effect, even though it is grossly outdated with its limit of US $500. Several efforts have been made to attempt to revise COGSA, but none of them has been successful to date. However, with the advent of OSRA and of private contracts between shippers and shipping lines, it seems that the liability limit has been lifted in many contracts, and that all but a handful of defenses have been eliminated. Therefore, the revision of COGSA may become moot in the near future.
There is still a problem with liability in intermodal freight; that is, freight that is shipped through several means of transportation using only one bill of lading. The liability limits are different for domestic transport in the exporting country, international transport by ocean (and they depend further on the nationality of the carrier), and domestic transport in the importing country. When cargo is damaged in transit without the possibility of tracing where specifically in the voyage the peril occurred, which liability limit is applicable? This is a question that the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) answered in 1980, in a treaty that was proposed but never ratified. These rules, though, form the basis for the guidelines developed by the International Chamber of Commerce. In June 2000, the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL) started the process of creating a formal multi-modal liability framework.
Not only are these issues of interest to insurance companies, but they also are of interest to any shipper who decides to retain its shipping risks and decline insurance coverage. As the liability of the carrier is very difficult to engage, even in the case of navigational errors or negligence, it may make more sense to purchase insurance coverage (see Section 8-6).
9-7 Non-Vessel-Operating Common Carriers
Non-vessel-operating common carriers (NVOCC) make up another type of ship-ping company, but with the caveat that they do not own and operate ships. Nevertheless, NVOCCs are regulated by the Federal Maritime Commission (FMC). The way an NVOCC operates is by purchasing space on a ship on a given voyage and by selling this space to companies that need to ship cargo. The shipping line gets paid for the space-and weight-whether or not the NVOCC fills its allocation. The NVOCC only makes money by reselling the space at a higher rate than the one at which it purchased it. In most instances, an NVOCC also acts as a freight consolidator and aggregates less-than-container-load (LCL) freight from several customers into a full container. This allows small shippers to benefit from the protection of a container and allows them to ship without the extra packing protection that break-bulk demands.
The NVOCC system was the basis for the model followed by consolidators in the air passenger business. These consolidators purchase a block of seats on an airplane and resell them to individuals, generally through discount travel agencies.
End – of – Chapter Questions
1. What two different types of ocean cargo services are there?
2. Describe three different types ships used in international ocean transportation. What type of cargos are they used for?
3. Explain the concept of a “flag.” Why does a ship need a flag? Why would an owner choose to fly a “flag of convenience?”
4. What is a Conference? What is a Revenue Pool? Explain both terms
Endnotes
1. The Panama Canal, November 1987, a publication of the Panama Canal Commission Office of Public.
2. Marcus, Amy Dockser, “Egypt fights to pump up Suez revenue,” The Wall Street Journal, July 25,1996,p.A19.
3. “Glossary of shipping terms,” Frontline Limited, Bermuda, http://www.frontmgt.no/org/glossary.html , November 8,2000
4. “The various types of tankers,” Elf Corporation http://www.elf.fr/odyssee/us/trans/703.htm , November7,2000
5. “Standard tanker voyage chartering questionnaire,” 1988, http://www.frontmgt.no/pdf/Sea_Giant.pdf, November7,2000
6. “Great ships: Regina Maersk,” www.marinelink.com/dec96/gshis/regina.html , November7,2000
7. Tower, Courtney, “Mega-ships drive freight is future,” The Journal of Commerce, October 22,1998, p.1B.
8. Freudmann, Aviva, “Big ships, new problems,” JoCWeekly, June 5-11, 2000,p.22.
9. Machalabam, Daniel, “Maersk is ready to start on giant port,” The Wall Street Journal, June 5, 2000,p.A4
10. Richardson, Paul, “The 18000-TEU ship,” JoCWeekly, June 5-11 2000,p.19.
11. Richardson, Paul, “The 18000-TEU ship,” JoCWeekly, June 5-11 2000,p.19.
12. Lucentini, Jack, “FastShip makes progress, but who can afford it?” The Journal of Commerce, August7, 1998, p. 1A.
13. Rapoport, Carla, “Hyudai is car carrier unit aims for bigger cargo,” The Journal of Commerce, May6,1998,p.1B
14. Porter, Janet, “Can one size really fit all?” The Journal of Commerce,July 14,1997,p.1C
15. Richardson, Paul, “The 18000-TEU ship,” JoCWeekly, June 5-11 2000,p.19.
16. The Journal of Commerce Staff, “Specialty carriers thrive in midst of container age,” The Journal of Commerce September 22,1997,p 5C.
17. The Journal of Commerce Staff, “Specialty carriers thrive in midst of container age,” The Journal of Commerce September 22,1997,p 5C.
18. “LASH barges,” Forest Lines, International Ship holding Corporation, http”//www.forest-lines.com/FLI_LASHbarge.htm, November7,2000
19. Plume, Janet, “LASH vessels still providing snappy service,” The Journal of Commerce, September 22, 1997, p.7C.
20. Gottschalk, Arthur, “Summer to remember,” The Journal of Commerce, September 8,1997,p.1B
21. Sullivan, Allanna, “A 700-ft tanker just does not handle quite like a Hnoda,” The Wall Street Journal, April 14, 1989,p.1.
22. Wells, Ken, “Captain is course: Life on a Supertanker mixes tedium, stress for Kenneth Campbell,” The Wall Street Journal, September 11,1986,p.1.
23. Mcphee, John, “The ships of Port Revel,” The Atlantic Monthly, October 1998,pp.67-80
24. Knee, Richard, “Many owners of aging vessels would rather scrap than sell,” The Journal of Commerce, May 7, 1998,p.13A.
25.LangeWiesche, William, “The shipbreakers,” The Atlantic Monthly, October 1998,pp.67-80
25. “India bars dismantling of US ships that held hazardous materials,” The Journal of Commerce, Reuters News Release, August 7,1997,p.2B.
26. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “Boxships buck currents,” The Journal of Commerce, December 15, 1997,p..1B
27. Lesher,DAVE, “Sailing through the school of experience,” Los Angeles Times, July 30,1997.
28. Roberts, Michael G., “Do not touch the Jones Act,” The Journal of Commerce, August7, 1998, p. 1A.
29. Sansbury, Tim, “Exporters assail US cargo policy,” The Journal of Commerce,
30. October23,1998,p.1A.
31. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “Boxships buck currents,” The Journal of Commerce, December 15, 1997,p.1B.
32. Sneider, Daniel, “A cruise from Seattle to Alaska via Congress,” The Christian Science Monitor, May 21, 1997,p.4.
33. Prager, Joshua Harris, “For cruise workers, life is no ‘Love Boat’,” The Wall Street Journal, July 3, 1997, p.B1.
34. Bangsberg,P.T., “Shipowners tackle Asia flag question,” The Journal of Commerce, May 29,1997,p.8B.
35. Carrington, Tim, “US owners of foreign-registry ships want Navy to rally round the flag their vessels do not fly,” The Wall Street Journal, December 29,1987,p.44
36. O Rourke, Ronald, “Gulf ops,” Proceedings, U.S. Naval Institute, May 1989,pp.42-43
37. Baldwin, Tom, “Maersk reflags four more ships,” The Journal of Commerce, February 11,1997,p.1A.
38. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “Boxships buck currents,” The Journal of Commerce, December 15, 1997, p.1B.
39. Brennan. Terry. “TWRA signs contracts for chilled beef to head off non-conference diversion,” Traffic World, February 5,1996
40. Tirschwell, Peter, “Lines plan crackdown on cargo tricksters,” The Journal of Commerce,,December 24,1996,p.1A
41. Mathews, Anna Wilde, “Five members of shipping cartel are focus of space-sharing probe,” The Wall Street Journal, May 6,1997,p.B8
42. Beargie, Tony, “Re-regulation,” American Shipper, December 1998,p.12.
43. Beargie, Tony, “Re-regulation,” American Shipper, February 1999,p.8.
44. Damas, Philip, “Great expectation,” American Shipper, May 2000,p.23.
45. “One small step for OECD: Will nations leap at antitrust reform?” American Shipper, July 2000,pp.8-15
46. Mottley, Robert, “SORA and admiralty law,” American Shipper, May 2000,p.40.
47. Freudmann, Aviva, “Plumbing the depths of ‘nauticl fault’,” The Journal of Commerce, May 19,1998,p.7A.
48. Mandelbaum,Samuel Robert, “International ocean shipping and risk allocation for cargo loss, damage and delay: A U.S. approach to COGSA, Hague-Visby, Hamburg and the multimodal rules,” Journal of Transnational Law and Plicy 1996,Vol.5,Issue1.
49. Mandelbaum,Samuel Robert, “International ocean shipping and risk allocation for cargo loss, damage and delay: A U.S. approach to COGSA, Hague-Visby, Hamburg and the multimodal rules,” Journal of Transnational Law and Plicy 1996,Vol.5,Issue1.
50. “International Conventions Membership List,”
InforMARE, www.informare.it/dbase/convuk.htm,November 13,2000
51. Augello, William J., “Ocean cargo liability law to be revised,” Logistics Manangement, March 1998,p.37.
52. Mottley, Robert, “OSRA and admiralty law,” American Shipper, May 2000,p.40.
53. Freudmann, Aviva, “No easy answer,” JoC Weekly, June 12-18,2000,p.16
Chapter12
Packaging for export
Outline
12-1 introduction 12-4b Packaging Materials
12-2 packaging objectives 12-4c Markings
12-3 ocean cargo 12-5 Road and Rail transport
12-3a full-container-Load[FCL]Cargo 12-6 Security
12-3b Less-than-container-load 12-7 Hazardous cargo
(LCL)Cargo 12-8 Refrigerated Goods
12-3c Break-Bulk cargo 12-9 Domestic Packaging Issues
12-3d Markings End-of-Chapter Questions
12-4Air Transport Endnotes
12-4a Containers
Key terms
Container
Crate
Dunnage
Improper packaging
Pallet
12-1 introduction
One of the challenging practical areas of international logistics is the packaging of goods for international shipments. This is a responsibility that always falls on the exporter, regardless of the Terms of Trade, or Incoterms, chosen(see chapter 4).Unfortunately,it is a function that is oftentimes just left to the shipping department, with few guidelines other than to make sure it gets to the customers without problems, and quite often with pressure to control costs; there is rarely a strategy developed for packaging, even though it is an area that certainly has strategic implications.
The first function of correct packaging for export is obviously the protection of the goods from the hazards of international shipping by ocean or by air. Proper packaging has direct cost implication. On the one hand, it is certain that the costs of packaging generally increase as the protection of the good increases; however, on the other hand, the costs of losing part of cargo to improper packaging 1are generally higher, cannot be insured against (see Section 8-8 for further details),and no real trade-off exists. It is generally in the best interest of the exporter to ensure that goods are properly packaged so that they arrive undamaged to their destination. This chapter will expand greatly on this aspect of packaging, explaining the alternatives available and their advantages and disadvantages.
The second function of correct packaging is to facilitate the handling of goods while they are in transit; a well-designed packaging will allow the stevedores, the shipping line, and the trucking companies to handle it without difficulties, but mostly without having to improvise an inappropriate handling method . the capabilities of the equipment likely to be used in the handling of the goods must be respected(i.e.,the dimensional constraints and weight constraints they place on the package, as well as the different standards and regulation used in the countries through which the goods will travel). Finally, all the handling and care instruction must be clearly marked on the package. This chapter will cover as many of these requirements as practical possible.
The third function of correct packaging , and one that is often overlooked, is that it is part of the customer service strategy of the firm. While a customer expects to receive the goods in sellable or usable condition in all cases, it also expects to be able to quickly unpack the goods and not spend considerable time and money preparing them to be used or sold. This objective is often much more difficult to achieve than just protecting the goods for transport and facilitating their handling while in transit. The packaging has to be simple enough to be opened without using specialized tools, but most of all ,it has to be easy enough to be opened without damaging the goods. To a great extent, the packaging used by well-conceived and well-put together package is a positive reflection on the ability of a company to manufacture quality products. Similarly, more and more customers are sensitive to packaging alternative that is easily reused or placed in the waste stream.
Finally, this chapter makes a distinction between primary, secondary, and tertiary packaging ,as seen in figure 12-1. Primary packaging is consumer packaging, or what the consumer sees when S/HE purchases and handles the product. It is part of the marking function of the firm and is traditionally covered in marking management textbooks; primary packaging is only occasionally mentioned in this chapter. Secondary packaging is the packaging that usually groups several of the consumer goods into one unit, usually a thin cardboard box or shrinkwrap. This is what the retailers sees and handles before the goods are placed on the shelves。In discount retail stores, this packaging may be seen by the consumer. Tertiary packaging, or transportation packaging,includes all of the activities designed to ensure “safe and efficient delivery of the goods in sound condition”2 to their foreign purchaser. Tertiary packaging for consumer goods is therefore the packaging placed around the secondary retail packaging units. For industrial goods, since there is generally no primary or secondary packaging of the products, the tertiary packaging encompasses all the packaging activities aimed at protecting them during shipment.
12-2 packaging objective
Three of the objectives of proper packaging are to mark sure that goods are protected from the three major losses that can occur in an international transit:
1. protecting the goods in transit from breakage(these perils represent roughly 43 percent of all claims made by shippers to their insurance companies).
2. protecting the goods from water damage(15 percent of claims made).
3. protecting the goods from theft and pilferage(21 percent of claims made).
The remaining 21 percent of claims were linked to fire, strandings, sinkings, collision,overboard losses,and jettison.
Each of these perils can be prevented to a great extent by the proper use of packaging techniques and by correct design of the protective systems around the cargo.
However that’s not all: another objective of packaging is to provide good customer service to the recipient of the goods. This is a achieved by paying attention to the smaller details of the packaging process and designing a “smarter” package. While it is difficult to give specific guidance, a couple of example may illustrate the concept better:
Instead of gluing, and then nailing, the plywood panel onto a crate, a customer focused exporter would just nail them or, even better, screw them, so that they can be more easily taken apart by the receiving department of the importer. The boards can then be reused internally by the importer or by its employees rather than discarded. An exporter shipping to countries where packaging materials may end up as housing materials would be even more responsive if it considered using a slightly better grade of non toxic boards and plywood.
Another way of displaying customer focus would be to include a packaging list in the recipient’s language and to clearly mark all og the packages within a shipment; for example, by color coding or letter coding each pallet and its corresponding manifest.
Yet another way of showing customer concern is to utilize packages that match the size of the ones used by the customer,so that goods can be placed directly in its warehouse,without having to be reloaded onto the proper pallet size.
While it only takes a few extra minutes to pack a shipment”smarter”,the importer will appreciate the attention;it may actually become a strategic advantage over a competor,whose shipping department is inattentive to details.Inaddition,it helps prevent claims of shortages when the customer can not locate items within a shipment.
Finally,packiagng should refiect the increasing sensitivity to recycling and energy conservation present in many European countries.The focus in this case is to use recyclable and reusable materials rather than disposable materials;for example by using starch peanuts or recycled paper cubes rather than styrofoam,using inflatable dunnage rather than scrap pallets,or by loading the goods on pallets of the size used by the customer.
12-3 Ocean Cargo
Ocean cargo can be shipped through a large number of alternative packaging alternatives.Since an increasing percentage of cargo shipped by ocean is now containerized,this particularmode will be covered first,followed by break-bulk cargo and its packaging alternatives.
12-3a Full-Container-Load Cargo
While it is true that containers protect the cargo well against some damages,the choice of the proper container is important.
Choice of Container
After having determined the correct type of container in which the cargo will be shipped, the exporter should, as much as possible. inspect the container used for a particular shipment. itis particularly important if the cargo to be placed inside it will not be unitized on pallets or in crates,but will simply be placed in corrugated cardboard boxes or in their retail packaging.
The container should first be inspected from the outside for possible structural damage:a structurally unsound container could collapse under the weight of theseveral containers that will eventually be placed on top of it.Containers aer designed to withstand the weight of up to eight other containers;a slight structural problem could weaken it enough to collapse under this kind of weight and aheavy sea.Hundreds of them do every year.The frame should look straight,the fittings used for lifting it and securing it on the ship or on a truck should be in place and not damaged,the doors should close properly,the repairs—if any-should appear to have been done competently,and there should be no visible structural rust.Surface rust be a sign that the container is not very carefully maintained.
The container should also be inspected from the inside,with the doos closed,for possible light leakage,which would indicate a waterr infiltration risk during shipment.Sometimes,such leakage also indicates a structural promblem as well,The container should also have floor and ideally wooden sides as well,so as to prevent condensation damage inside the container and protect the cargo from direct contact with the metal sides
The container should also have all of its inside hardware in place, to allow for good securing of the cargo. The container should also be inspected for foul and persistent odors: several cargoes have been damaged by the content of a preceding shipment. Protruding nails or o the fasteners should be removed to prevent an accidental puncture to the cargo. Finally the container should be clean of grease, dirt, and other foreign material so as to keep the cargo clean.5
Packaging materials
Most of the time, it is better for shipment to be unitized(placed on pallets)within the container, rather than in corrugated cardboard boxes. That fact that the goods are placed on pallets and shrinkwarpped protects them better from water infiltration and from condensation in the container. It also facilitates handling and protects them once they have arrived at the customer’s warehouse; the lower the probability that the goods are manipulated by hand, the greater the probability that they will be unloaded in good condition. Another advantage of the a palletized units is that the secondary packaging may be sufficient to protect the goods, as long as the pallets are protected on the corners, as seen in figure 12-2, and that the pallets are not stacked. Should it be necessary to stack the goods, a more rigid support should be considered.
Although unitized cargo is preferable, it can also present challenges. For one, the standardized size of pallets in Europe has been 80 cm 120 cm(31.5 inches*47.25 inches)since 1959. pallet sizes in the united states are, for all intents and purposes, not standardized, even though a great percentage of them are 36 inches by 48 inches(91.5cm*122cm). this present difficulties, as pallets of one standard do not fit neatly in containers designed for the other. Secondary, there are some restricted about the materials with which the pallets are made; it is prohibited to export some wood products from some countries into some other countries, for pest and disease control reason. For example in order to contain the “long-horned beetle ,”a threat to hardwood forests, wood pallets from china are not allowed into the united states,unless they have been fumigated, heat-treated, or pressure-treated with a pesticide.6
If the goods inside the container are not unitized, for whatever reason, it is preferable that they be somewhat protected from crushing and moisture by being packaged in a higher grade of corrugated cardboard, double-or triple-walled; regular secondary packaging is generally insufficient and its use should be avoided. If the goods are to be stacked, layers to strong cardboard or sheets of plywood should be used in-between the layer to protect the lower levels from collapsing. If the goods are to be shipped from(or to)a high-humidity area, cardboard should be avoided as much as possible, as it loses up to 60 percent to its strength under those conditions.7
If there are different types of goods to be placed in the same container, the heavier ones should always be placed on the bottom, to lower the center of gravity is somewhat in the center pf the container. This is achieved by making sure that the goods, are loaded in symmetrical fashion in the container, and that the blocking material be placed in between,as shown in figure 12-3. several software packaging have been designed to be help exporters load a mixed load in the most efficient manner in a container.8
Blocking materials
When loading a container, it would be idea if the goods could fill out the space as completely as possible, leaving no room for the cargo to shift. Unfortunately, that is generally unrealistic. Therefore, a number of blocking materials have been developed, collectively called dunnage
The first thing to do, though, is to secure the goods to the container itself, if that is possible. This is normally done through a system of hooks and straps that is particularly good at keeping the cargo from moving inside the container. The second is to insert some sort of “spacer” in-between the pallets or the packages. Some companies use old pallets, some use bracing contraption made with wooden beams(in American measurement,“4 by 4,” which measures 3.5inches by inches, or roughly 9cm by 9cm), and some use inflatable bags. Before closing the door of the container, similar bracing material must be inserted between the cargo and the door to prevent shifting. Insurance“claim handlers frequently ”come aross cargo poorly secured in a container, perhaps because void spaces are not filled, or because heavier items are not lashed down,”9 as a reminder, insurance policies do not cover claims for improperly packaged cargo(see section8-8).
The critical part is that the entire floor space in the container must be occupied, so that none of the cargo may move ,however heavy the cargo may be, it will move and eventually be damaged if it is not braced securely. The costs of replacing damaged cargo will undoubtedly exceed whatever savings were in not using proper dunnage.
12-3b less-than-container-load(LCL) cargo
Single shipments that are too small to be shipped as a full container are consolidated by a freight forwarder or the a non-vessel-operation. Common Carrier(NVOCC) with other freight and then shipped in the a full container. Because of the greater number of instance during which the freight is handled, it is mandatory that these goods be unitized on a pallet or placed in a crate or box, as well as extremely well protected from water damage. Since the nature of the freight with which the shipment is placed is never known, the greatest amount of the care should be exercise in packaging such goods. In addition to the risks of a shipment by ocean, there is also the possibility of the damage caused by other cargo in the con-subjected to leakage ,odors, and other hazards. The consolidator is almost always quite good at packaging a container properly, with proper dunnage and protection, but the owners of the other cargo on board the consolidated container may be not be as careful, and that represents a hazard.
12-3c break-bulk cargo
Break-bulk cargo is that cannot be containerized because it is too large and won’t fit a traditional container or because it exceeds the maximum weight of a containerload. Great efforts have been extends to containerized as much cargo as possible, with the creation of special container sizes(see section 11-3a). however, a substantial proportion of cargo is still shipped as break-bulk cargo.
Break-bulk cargo is placed directly in the holds of the ship and therefore has to be packaged differently than containerized cargo, which enjoys the “all-around” protection of the metal box. In addition, break-bulk cargo is handled more frequently than containerized cargo; for example,it is loaded onto the ship, unloaded from the ship, and so on. Therefore,break-bulk cargo should be packed in such a way as to be well protected to reflect both the rigors of the journey and the extra handling.
Finally, the company responsible for shipping break-bulk cargo should ensure that the weight and dimensions of the cargo can be handled by all the facilities through which the cargo will travel; if the break-bulk cargo weights more than the maximum capacity crane in a given port, an alternative route should be found, or arrangement should be made to rent specialized or large equipment. If the cargo’s weight exceeds the port cranes’ capacity, there is a great risk that the break-port’sequiment. There is also the risk that the port personnel will try to move the age the cargo with the existing equipment(using it beyong its rated capacity)and damage the cargo in the progress. Cigna Insurance Company pulishes a guide to the equipment in place in all the ports worldwide, called ports of the word,10 so that a firm may plan the size of its shipment accordingly. Very heavy and cumbersome cargo,called“Project cargo”is usually handled by specialized freight forwarders(seen section 11-5) who have an exllecnt knowledge of all of these limitations.
Crates and Boxes
Crates and boxes—as shown in Figures 12-4 and 12-5—are very appropriate containers for either break-bulk cargo or for LCL cargo to be handed to a freight consolidator. They should be made of dry wood., either softwood or hardwood; the first refers to wood obtained from coniferous trees, mainly pine and fir, the second to wood obtained from leafy trees, most often poplar or oak, at least for North America and Europe ( some different species are used in South America and Asia ) . There are some legal limitations to the importation of some types of wood in some countries (for insect and disease control purposes) so care should be taken in choosing the proper wood. The crate or box should be built in a size that accommodates the goods without shifting. The best alternative to make sure that the goods are handled upright is to mount the box or crate on a pallet or to equip it with hooks or straps which allow the goods to be handled in only one direction.
Boxes and crates are built somewhat differently. While boxes are containers made of wood where the sides are an integral part of the structure of the container( see Figure 12-4 ), crates are containers built on a wooden frame, and are either open or enclosed with plywood ( see Figure 12-5). In general terms, well-built crates are stronger than boxes, since the wood used for the frame of the crate is of a large size. Well-built crates are constructed with three-way corners ( see Figure 12-6), which is the strongest corner design. Unfortunately, this technique appears to be an “art” which is disappearing, although it makes a substantial difference in the ability of the crate to resist shocks and crushing. Both crates and boxes should always be reinforced with corner strapping and with metallic bands (see Figure 12-7).
Open crate are obviously not appropriate for cargo that is not impervious to water. Boxes an enclosed crates should be lined with a waterproof material such as polyethylene. Some packaging specialists prefer leaving the bottom of the boxes and crates free of waterproof material, while others prefer placing small holes in it to allow drainage should some water infiltration occur. To further protect crated machinery from water damage, it is common practice to simply spray it with oil.
crate A wooden box made especially for a product to be shipped break-bulk because it does not fit into a container, or because the exporter deems that an additional level of protection is necessary.
Bags
Bags can also be used to transport break-bulk merchandise: the multi-wall shipping bag (which can hold around 25 kg [50 lbs]) is designed to be used with chemicals, plastics, and other powdered materials that are somewhat unaffected by water and unlikely to be pilfered (see Figure 12-8).
The bag is made up of several layers of kraft paper and/or light polymers, and is not very good at withstanding numerous manipulations. It is recommended to add about 3 percent additional empty, slightly large bags to contain those bags that may be damaged during an international shipment. Shipping bags are quite sensitive to rough handling by dockhands, including damage by accidental contact with mechanical equipment or other cargo with sharp angles such as boxes, crates or pallets. The integrity of these bags is increased by palletizing and shrink wrapping them, since mechanical equipment must then be used to handle them.
The second type of bag is a very large size bag called a Flexible Intermediate Bulk Container (FIBC). FIBCs are constructed of woven polymer fibers, such as polyethylene or polypropylene (see Figure 12-9). They are usually of a capacity of about one cubic meter and can weigh up to one metric ton, but many different sizes and types exist. They are used for transporting granular cargo, such as plastics, grains and some chemicals.
Drums
Drums are used in two forms: metallic drums steel drums) and fiber drums. Steel drums, shown in Figure 12-10, can be used for wet or dry cargo, and are pretty resilient containers, which can withstand a good amount of abuse. They present great resistance to water damage and pilferage and have been used for a long time in ocean shipping. Their main disadvantage is their cost and their individual weight. Fiber drums, however, can only be used for dry cargo, such as plastic pellets or fertilizers, and they are usually lined with a polymer bag.
Fiber drums, as shown in Figure 12-11, are slightly more resistant to water damage than bags, and are more resistant to pilferage. However, they are often damaged when port personnel handle them in the same manner as they do steel drums, such as rolling them in their side, which they are not designed to do. Fiber drums are also somewhat sensitive to mechanical damage, such as that caused by careless forklift truck drivers or sharp corners.
12-3d Markings
There are two reasons to properly mark the cargo as it is shipped: it has to be protected from poor handling, and it has to be protected from theft and pilferage.
To protect the cargo from poor handling, it is necessary to use as many of the international pictorials for cargo markings as are relevant. A number of these pictorials, as standardized by the International Organization for Standards (ISO), are shown in Figure 12-12. If at all possible, they should be accompanied by their translations in the languages of the ports through which the cargo is expected to transit. Both the net weight (the weight of the cargo alone) and the gross weight (the cargo plus the weight of the packaging) should be clearly displayed in metric units and so-called English units on the outside of the package. The outside dimensions of the goods should also be clearly displayed both in English and metric units. This is to prevent, as much as possible, inappropriate equipment from handling the goods at any point.
To protect break-bulk or LCL cargo from being lost or shipped to the wrong consignee, it should be clearly marked with the consignee’s name—the name of the company which will pack it up at the port of the destination—as well as the shipment number. It is always a good idea to write that information on several of the sides of the load: that way, the information is never hidden from view. If at all possible, the name of the consignee should not include information that could indicate the brand or the type of the goods in the shipment, for security reasons.
All the units belonging to the same shipment should be marked as such, that is as “1 of 4,” “2 of 4,” and so on. Another useful “trick” is to mark all the units of that shipment with a particular color—for example, on the corners of the boxes—so that they are clearly designated as parts of one shipment and so that none of them is left behind. The temptation of using a color associated with a particular company should be avoided, however, to prevent jeopardizing the firm’s security efforts. For the same reasons, the color should be changed regularly.
There is a number of alternatives meant to determine whether a shipment has been the victim of theft: some shippers paint the outside of their shipment with a uniform color in order to determine whether a shipment has been tampered with. Some use shipping tape of a specific design—while avoiding using a tape marked with their company logo—and others use a shrinkwrap of a particular color. All of these attempts have the added benefit of keeping the shipment “uniform” and therefore clearly identifiable.
Finally, it should be reiterated that markings which reveal the identity of the shipper and/or the content of the package should be avoided at all costs. “Advertising” to potential thieves the content of the cargo is foolish and can only lead to problems. Many companies use code on a regular basis, without patterns, in an attempt to avoid security problems.
12-4 Air Transport
Since air transport is, by nature, less hazardous than ocean transport, packaging as a protection against damage is of lesser importance than for ocean shipping. Nevertheless, some perils still exist, such as water condensation and air pressure changes; still, the biggest problem for air cargo, by far, is theft and pilferage.
12-4a Containers
Containers used in air transport are much different than the ones used in ocean cargo and are not intermodal (i.e., they cannot be used conveniently in other modes of transportation, with the exception of one size—a twenty-foot container that can be used in cargo is usually placed (consolidated) in containers at the airport of departure, then manipulated again at the airport of arrival and placed into trucks. This additional handling should be taken into consideration when packaging goods for export by air. It is also likely for the goods to be unloaded from a container and reloaded into another at a connecting airport.
Containers used in air transport are lightweight, made of wood, plexiglass or aluminum, and are generally clean. As some containers are not fully enclosed , or are enclosed with netting rather than a solid wall, some damage may occur in the voyage. Nevertheless, most damage occurs in the handling before and after the flight; for example, while the container waits on the tarmac, the goods in the container could easily become wet from rain or snow.
12-4b Packaging Materials
While most air cargo tends to be shipped by air in its secondary packaging, it is generally not an appropriate method for two reasons.
Appropriate shipping packaging would therefore be tertiary in nature and include one additional layer of cardboard, preferably double-walked, and a shrinkwrap. The United Nations established rules in the 1980s regarding the resistance of air packages to drops and crushes; today, these minimum requirements are considered inadequate, but have not been replaced. Nevertheless, a number of shippers still do not follow these rules.
For cargo sensitive to humidity, a possible way of avoiding condensation damage is to add small packets of dessicant material in the box with the goods, as they are designed to absorb ambient humidity. An additional layer of shrinkwarp is always advisable, as well, to protect against other condensation, rain, or leakage caused by other cargo on the plane.
For shipments susceptible to leakage if its primary packaging breaks, such as glass or plastics bottles, the United States Federal Aviation Administration regulations (and the United Nations rules) require that the secondary or tertiary package must be capable of containing an accidental leakage. Most secondary packaging is not designed for such a contingency, so adequate additional absorbent material must be packed with the goods. The shipper of a three fluid ounce bant material must be packed with the goods . The shipper of a three fluid ounce(8.9 cl) bottle of perfume was fined US $132,500 when its package broke, leaked in the plane, and“contaminated”other cargoes.
12-4c Markings
Markings in international air shipments should be handled in much the same way as markings on ocean shipments. The use of the pictorials shown in Figure 12-12 is quite appropriate.
12-5 Road and Rail Transport
In the case of international road and rail transportation, a policy of protecting the cargo in much the same way as that used for shipment by ocean container is most appropriate. It is always best to unitize the loaded and unloaded, The cargo pallets should be shrinkwrapped for protection against rain and ambient humidity. As much as possible, in the railroad car to avoid all damage due to the cargo shifting and sudden accelerations and decelrations.
Domestic shipment in the United States are almost all made by truck or by rail;the cargo is loaded on a trailer which is then rather driven to its destination or loaded on a railroad car(piggy-backed) to an intermediaru destination and then driven to its final destination.From 1996 to 1999,the costs of goods destination and in transportation rose from US $3.3 billion to US $4 billion, or from 0.75 percent to 0.96 percent of Gross Domestic Sales, according to the Grocery Manufacturers of America;44 percent of these losses were due to crushed, dented, or collapsed packages.
Should the cargo be sensitive to theft, it should also be packed in unmarked boxes to prevent the possibility pf pilferage.
12-6 Security
The issue of theft and pilferage is becoming an increasing problem for cargo shippers.It is estimated that theft represent losses of at least US $10 billion per year in the United States and US $30 billion worldwide. Many methods have been developed to foil theft attempts against cargo, none of which has proven completely dffective, but a combination of several should cover most shippers and prevent theft and pilferage.
As much as possible, the cargo should not bear the name of the shipper, especially if it is a brand which has street appeal; this issue is crucial for goods which are shipped in their secondary packging and for which the primary packging and the secondary packging ate one and the same, as for electronics or appliances.Such a practice jeopardizes the safety of the cargo. A possible way to or Full Truck Loads (FTL), so as to hide the cargo from anyone other than the exporter or the importer. Another is to place the goods in an additional blank cardboard box, which would be recommended for goods shipped as Less than Container Load (LCL) or Less than Truck Load (LTL) goods anyhow, to protect them from handling damage.
A plethora of different methods exists to palce seals on containers, and all present advantages and disadvantages; however,all show whether the container has been opened.One critical aspect of seals is that the sea number should be written on the intermodal bill of lading so that the importer can check,upon arrival, that the seal on the container is the same as the seal with which the container left the exporter’s premises.
Upon realizing that container seals invite theft-after all, seas are only placed on valuable merchandise-some companies have created invisible locks that are placed inside the doors of the container or the trucktrailer, and operated with a coded transmitter frim the outside. Such positive innovations prevent thieves from opening the doors, but demand that all customers of the exporter be airmailed a transmitter prior to the fister shipment, which can be a substantial hassle and ecpense.
Altogether, though, the aspect that security experts insist is critical when shipping internationally or domestically is the personnel involved. Most thefts seem to have taken place with some insider involvement.All attempts should therefore be made to limit the number of people who know the content of the shipment, by making sure that the bill of lading and packaging lists are given to truster employees only, by keeping track of non-employees on the premises, by making sure that managers are present during loading and unloading operations, and so on. Some companies keep their docks under constant video surveillance to deter crime
Shipping Computers to China
The Chinese marker for personal computers has always appeared yery attractive to United States’corporations because of the vast potential for sales it represents. However,there have been many difficulties for the companies involved in manufacturing personal computers in China:Compaq found some of its distributors did not honor their debts and AST found that many of the PC units it exported to Hong Kong were smuggled back into the country.
IBM,meanwhile,faced charges that it was selling used machines when it was actually shipping brand new products.It turns out that the confusion arose over a packaging problem:the computers werewrapped boxes.However,this was not enough to protect them from the pervasive dust that floats around many Chinese cities-Beijing in particular-and the goods arrived dirty in the consumers’hands.An additional layer of shrinkwrap on the caidboard retail package solved the problem.
This problem was in addition to the many problem that packaging has to solve in China:a large percentage of personal computers are delivered to their final destination strapped on the luggage rack of a bicycle (see Figure 12-13) and most deliveries to retailers and whioleasalers are made in flatbed trucks,barely protected from the elements by a tarpaulin.As for units shipped to distant cities,they are shipped by railraods:extremly sturdy packaging should be used in that case,as an IBM manager observed“the (cargo handlers) virtually throw (ing computer) cartons into trains.”
12-7 Hazardous Cargo
Hazardous cargo can be shipped by ocean and by air,but,generally speaking,most dangerous goods that are flammable,explosive,or toxic are shipped by sea.
The shipment ot dangerous goods by sea is regulated by the International Maritime Organization(IMO),which publishes an International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code(IMDG Code) that has undergone many changes over the years,in order to keep up with the rapid expansion of the types of materials created. In May 2000,the IMO’s Maritime Safety Committee approved its thirtieth amendment, which is a complete revision and simplification of the existing Code, and which was pubished in October 2000. This amendment became effective January 1,2001, with an implementation period of one year. It is a two-volume document-the precreding was four volumes large-and is quite complex. It governs the packaging og hazardous cargo, as well as labeling, handling, and emergency responses.
The shipment of dangerous goods by air is regulated by the International Air Transport Association(IATA) and by the Inernational Civil Aviation Organization(ICAO), which both adopted new standards on January 1,1999. The shipment of hazardous cargo by air is no less complicated and cumbersome than by sea.
In addition to these international requirements, a shipper must abide by domestic regulatory agenvies as well, as there often are two domestic legs to any international shipment, one in the exporters’ country, the other in the importer’s country. The complexity of such requirements, and their contradictory statements on occasion, makes it an obligation to contract with a specialized freight forwarder or a specialized consultant before undertaking any international shipment shipment of hazardous goods. Shipments of products containing radioactive components are even more complicated.
12-8 Refrigerated Goods
Goods requiring refrigeration make up another category of cargo that demands particular care and specialized packaging services. It is difficult to generalize about refrigerated goods, as every commodity usually requires very specific handling; therefore, most refrigerated goods travel“alone”(i.e., different refrigerated goods and not mixed with one another, as they require different temperatures and different humidity settings). In addition, some fresh produce simply cannot be mixed together as they emit odors and other gasses that would spoil the resr of the cargo. For example, a load of cucumbers should not be mixed with apples, as cucumbers are sensitive to the ethylene that the apples produce, and for obvious reasons, onions and strawberries do not travel well together.
When goods needing refrigeration travel by oncean, they usually travel in a refrigerated container-also known as a“reefer.”Great care should be taken in ensuring that the temperature is kept at its correct setting throughout the voyage, which is achieved with temperature-sensitive indicators. Since containers are not very errective ar cooling goods-but are effective at keeping them cool-several shippers are making sure that the goods are well refrigerated before they are loaded to prevent possible damage. It should also be understood that reefers cannot possibly have a completely uniform temperature: temperatures within the box can vary by as much as 5 degrees Celsius(10 degrees Fahrenheit) Just because air circulation cannot be made uniform. Finally, another common problem with refrigerated cargo coming in or out of the United States is the confusion between Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature settings and the errors they cause.
With refrigerated cargo, the loading of the refrigerated container musr allow air circulation around the cargo; this requirement means that the goods must be loaded in the center of the container, with sufficient space in-between the walls of the cintainer and the cargo for circulation, and that the goods must be braced with a frame rather than with inflatable dunnage, which would prevent air circulation. In addition, some goods need to travel in contolled atmospheres-mixtures of oxygen and nitrogen in different percentages than ambiant air-to prevent spoilage. Some experiments are being conducted to determine whether a controlled atmosphere can also be effective against some peses as well.
Fresh produce must also be kept at humidity leves of 95 to 100 percent, to maintain its freshness as well as prevent weight loss due to evaporation. Most produce is made up of at least 80 percent water and is quite sensitive to water loss; for example,grapes will wrinkle and soften, and stems will turn brown, with a weight loss of only 4 percent, making them more difficult to sell, In addition, since produce is sold by weight, a small weight loss can translate into a substantial decrease in revenue for the importer.
For air shipments of refrigerated cargo ,the challenges are different, since the carigo is not placed in refrigerated containers but in cargo holds which have different temperature settings: for example, Lufthansa offers five different cargo holds, kept at different temperature settings, to keep perishables in their optimum environments. Hower\ver, because of the possibility that incompatible cargo might be mixed together-such as the onions and strawberries mentioned earlier-great care should be extended to protect sensitive goods from this eventuality by keeping them in solid wall cardboard boxes and possibly in shrinkwrap, if applicable.
Trade in precious goods and valuables is entire branch of logistics that, although not officially calculated separately from other data, is worth millions of U.S. dollars; in the United States alone, it is estimated at US $50 million. The crash of Swissair on September 2, 1998, exposed some of the extent of its international scale: the airplane was carrying 50 kg (110 lbs) of cash, 2 kg of diamonds, 2 kg of watches, 5 kg of jewelry, and an artwork by Picasso entitled “The Painter.”27
There is a substantial business in shipping precious stones internationally, such as diamonds and emeralds, since the stones are often produced, cut, set, and sold in different countries. Artwork travels from museum exhibits (and back). Antiques and collectibles travel to and from dealers and auction houses. Cash travels to where tourists flock..
Altogether, there are few firms specializing in the shipment of precious and valuable goods, and these firms emphasize discrection; they do not advertise, do not display their names on their vehicles, and operate out of anonymous office buildings and warehouses. The additional security measures they take are many: they do not ship more than a certain amount on a specific airplane or ship, they use ever-changing consignee names, and they have created a whole series of specialized packaging technologies.
Artex is such a firm. It is located in Washington, D.C., and specialized in the business of moving artwork, antiques, and jewelry collection. It employs a crew of seventy-five employees, most of whom are artists or experts with museum experience. Each piece of work is moved in a crate that is specifically designed for that work of art and fitted with foam to the exact dimensions and shape of the artwork. When Artex was selected to move an African-American burial site from New York City to Howard University, it took the firm’s employees three months to pack the 20000 objects this move represented.
In addition, Artex’s warehouse and trucks are equipped with air conditioning to keep humidity to a minimum. Each of its trucks is tracked with satellite transmitters and the Global Positioning System; this way, the firm knows at all times where the art is located. Finally, each of the trucks is driven by a team of at least two drivers equipped with cellular phones and sometimes accompanied by armed guards. Nevertheless, the best security is when no one knows that a move is occurring.
In 1996, Chiquita Brands was the largest American importer (by the number of containers brought into the United States), with about 79000 TEUs--twenty-foot equivalent units—surpassing even Wal-Mart, which “only” imported 76000 TEUs. 29 In 1999, Wal-Mart’s imports had grown to 241000 TEUs, and Chiquita imported 89000 containers of essentially a single product, bananas.30
Bananas are harvested green and hard, and immediately refrigerated. They are then loaded into one of Chiquita’s fifteen dedicated banana ships or on a number of other ships that the firm charters. About half of these ships are completely containerized, while the others transport bananas on pallets as break-bulk cargo in refrigerated holds and in containers on deck. During their trip, the bananas are then placed in a ripening environment where they acquire their yellow colour before being shipped to retail stores.
Wilmington, Delaware, is by far the largest port of entry for bananas, and about 1.2 million tons of its traffic is fresh produce.31 altogether, imported fresh produce accounts for 35 percent of produce sold in the United States. See the Box titled Cherries and Carnations(page 201) for more information about the United States’ reliance on Colombia in the business of cut flowers.
12-9 Domestics Packaging Issues
In dealing with consumer products specifically, several packaging, or the design of the packaging in which the final consumer purchases the goods, as well as by secondary packaging, or the design of the packaging designed to facilitate handling in the retail environment. Collectively, these constraints tend to be domestics in nature (i. e. , they are specific to a single country or possibly a group of countries).
Adapting a firm’s strategy to the different market requirements of a particular country add substantially to the costs of manufacturing, as well as to inventory and logistical expenses. A firm has to determine whether it makes economic sense to adapt its approach to these different markets and incur those additional costs or decide to ignore them at the risk of losing potential sales. This is the same strategic dilemma faced by a firm involved in international marketing: adapt or standardize?
Some of the factors that may affect primary and secondary packaging will now be explored.
Size
Consumer packages abroad may be of a different size then consumer packages in the domestic market because of consumer preferences: they are generally smaller in those countries in which retail shopping is done frequently and larger for those in which consumers shop at greater intervals. However, consumer packaging is complicated; consumers may demand smaller or larger packages based on preferences and customs, as well as packages of different shapes and materials. For example, sugar is sold in some countries in paper bags weighing 5 lbs (2.5 kg ), in others in cardboard boxes weighing 1 kg (2 lbs ), and yet in others, in tin cans of 1 lb (0.5 kg ). E ven products that are held as great examples of “international standardization ,” such as Coca-cola soft drinks, are sold in a myriad of sizes and therefore of primary and secondary packaging units.
Consumer packaging may also be seriously influenced by the layout of the shelves in the stores, such as their depth and the linear space allocated, constraining manufacturers to use different retail packaging.
Secondary packaging –the unit that holds several consumer packages –is influenced by the size of the retail stores and their configuration, as well as the size of the delivery trucks; the tertiary packaging unit, such as the pallet; or even the configuration of the storage area. In addition, it is also influenced by the frequency and the volume of sales of the retail units.
Legal Issues
Consumer packaging may also be influenced by legal requirements; some countries regulate size to a multiple of simple metric unit (1 kg or 1 liter ), while others do not, allowing packages of any size and weight. However, the greatest requirement are in the legal constraints on handing: many countries regulate the maximum weight an employee may carry, and that influences the weight of the secondary packaging unit, and, consequently, of both consumer packaging and tertiary packaging as well.
The legal constraints placed on the distribution channels can also influence consumer packaging. For example, the United States allows retail sales of some medicines “over-the-counter ,” which means that consumers buy them in drugstores, most often in a self-service environment. In France, in contrast, all drugs, including drugs not prescribed by a medical doctor, are sold exclusively through specialized stores called pharmacies. The primary package in a drugstore is often a blister pack or some variation of that type of package, as the goods are sold hanging form an aisle rack. The primary package from a pharmacy is usually a cardboard box, as the pharmacist keeps them on small shelves or in large –size drawers. In addition, the drugstore may purchase goods in larger quantities than the pharmacies, in any case, the primary packaging is different and therefore the secondary and tertiary packaging will also be different.
Storage and Transportation Environment
Finally, there are a number of environment influences on packaging, such as the dusty condition under which transportation take place, mentioned in the Learn More about IBM’s packaging of personal computer in China. There are similar constrains triggered by high humidity, heat, or cold.
There are also constraints placed by the lack of refrigeration resources. The best example is probably the existence of long-conservation milk, which is sold unrefrigerated with “expiration dates ” six or seven months after its production in a large number of European countries. Not only does this packaging alternative allow the use of non-refrigerated shelving in the store, but it also requires no refrigeration at all in the rest of the supply chain, from warehouses to transportation. It can also be transported safely quite far from its production location, including internationally.
All in all, several domestic issues in the importing country will also affect the packaging of goods. Companies should develop appropriate strategies to account for the possible diversity of consumer and retail packaging alternatively present in their export markets.
End-of-chapter questions
1. what are the consequences of improper packaging for the exporter? Does your response depend on the Incoterm used? Does it depend on the insurance policy in force?
2. What are the different alternative means of packaging products that are not containerized?
3. What are some of the issues and that risks that international packaging face and that are not present in a domestic shipment?
4. Use a product of your choice and ship it form one country to another on a multi-modal shipment. What packaging methods would you use? Why?
Endnotes
1. Hhensel, Bill. Jr, “A loaded problem ,” JoC Week, August 14-20,2000,p .13.
2. “General syllabus for postgraduate studies in packaging logistics, ” Lund University, Department of Design Science, Lund, Sweden, http://www. Pkglog.1th. se , October 20, 2000.
3. Ports of the World, Fifteenth Edition, Cigna Insurance Corporation, available form Publisher, Ports of the World, Cigna Companies, P. Q Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
4. Harps, Leslie Hansen, “Popcorn! Peanuts! Bubble wrap! Thinking inside the box,” inbound Logistics, November 2000, PP.40-46.
5. “Container matters” and “Any fool can stuff a container,” videos published by the Thomas Miller P&I Ltd, International House, 26 Creechurch Lane, London, EC3A 5BA, United Kingdom.
6. Baldwin, Tom, “USDA offers four options for Chinese pallets,” The Journal of Commerce, September 24,1998, P.1A .
7. Mottley, Robert, “Chilling out,” American Shipper, June 2000, pp. 43-51.
8. Barrett, Colin, “Mixing and matching sizes in computerized loads,” Traffic World, July 3, 1989, p. 40.
9. Porter, Janet, “Insurer warns of the dangers of incorrectly packed containers,” the Journal of Commerce, August 4, 1997, p. 16A .
10. Ports of the World, Fifteenth Edition, Cigna Insurance Corporation, available form Publisher, Ports of the World, Cigna Companies, P. Q Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
11. Ports of the World, Fifteenth Edition, Cigna Insurance Corporation, available form Publisher, Ports of the World, Cigna Companies, P. Q Box 7716, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
12.Zelade, Richard, “It’s in the bag ,” International Business, October 1996,p.44
13. Harrington, Lisa H., “The do’s and don’ts of packaging for air,” Transportation and Distribution, October 1998, pp. 59-63.
14. Harrington, Lisa H., “The do’s and don’ts of packaging for air,” Transportation and Distribution, October 1998, pp. 59-63.
15. Robinson, Alan, “Fixing the cracks in the system,” Food Logistics October 1998, pp. 29-25.
16. Barth, Steve and Michael D. White, “Hazardous cargo,” World Trade, November 1998, pp. 46-48.
17. Amerman, Don, “Shippers urged to wrap cargo in anonymity,” The Journal of Commerce, October 27, 1998, p. 1A.
18. “Container matters” and “Any fool can stuff a container,” videos published by the Thomas Miller P&I Ltd, International House, 26 Creechurch Lane, London, EC3A 5BA, United Kingdom.
19. Armbruster, William, “To ensure cargo security, don’t leave it to beeper,” The Journal of Commerce, May 4, 1998, p. 1A.
20. Mottley, Robert, “Container theft: Does anyone care?” American Shipper, June 1998, pp. 24-30.
21.Hamilton, David, “Untamed frontier: PC makers find China is a chaotic market despite its potential,” The Wall Street Journal, April 8, 1996, p.A1.
22. Mottley, Robert, “Chilling out,” American Shipper, June 2000, pp. 43-51.
23. Mottley, Robert, “Chilling out,” American Shipper, June 2000, pp. 43-51.
24. Nall, Stephanie, “As federal rules outlaw fumigants,farmers look to high-tech solutions,” The Journal of Commerce, January 7, 1998, p. 1C
25. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “A cool idea,” The Journal of Commerce, May 23, 1997, p. 1B.
26.Banham, Russ, “Foiling spoiling,” The Journal of Commerce, June 23, 1997, p. 4C
27.Estrin, Robin, “Swissair 111 went down with millions in valuables, including Picasso painting, ” Associated Press News Release, September 4, 1998.
28. Hull, Dana, “How a moving company capitalizes on valuable secrets” The Washington Post, May 5, 1997, p.F12.
29. Amerman, Don, “Keeping Chiquita sweeter requires atmosphere control as well as reefers,” The Journal of Commerce, June 23, 1997, p. 2C.
30. “Top 100 importers and exporters,” The Journal of Commerce, Special Report, March 29,2000
31. Robinson, Alan, “Ports of call,” Food Logistics, March 1999, pp. 21-24.
Chapter13
Customs Clearance
Outline
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13-1Introduction
13-2 Duty
13-2a Classification
13-2b Valuation
13-2c Rules of Origin
13-2d Tariffs
13-2e Dumping
13-2f Other Taxes
13-2g Value Added Tax
13-3 Non-Tariff Barriers
13-3a Quotas
13-3b Adherence to National Standards
13-3c Other Non-Tariff Barriers
13-3d Pre-Shipment Inspections
13-4 Customs Clearing Process
13-4a General Process
13-4b Customs Brokers
13-4c Customs Bonds
13-4d Reasonable Care
13-4e Required Documentation
13-4f Required Markings
13-4g Merchandise Visas
13-4h Duty Drawbacks
13-5 Foreign Trade Zones
End-of-Chapter Questions
Endnotes
Key Terms
assist
binding ruling
classification
cleared
dumping
duty
entry
export quotas
informed compliance
liquidated entry
protest
quota
reasonable care
rules of origin
tariff
tariff schedule
valuation
value added tax(VAT)
visa
13-1 Introduction
Another aspect of international trade is the process that an importer must follow when it brings goods into a country. This process is dictated by Customs, the government office in charge of collecting taxes on imports and of enforcing a number of rules and regulations regarding what can and cannot be admitted into the country. It is generally a complex process, fraught with pitfalls and loaded with paperwork: most countries, with very few exceptions, do not like to import goods and act accordingly. This chapter explains how the Customs system works in general but draws most of its examples on the process followed to import goods into the United States.
13-2 Duty
Duty( is the tax that an importer must pay in order to bring goods into a country. Such duty is calculated in a number of different ways, generally based upon three criteria:
1. The type of goods imported, which is determined according to a number of rules of classification( that essentially have been standardized worldwide.
2. The value of the goods imported, which is not only determined upon the invoice value, but also is calculated according to a number of rules that differ from country to country, collectively called valuation( rules.
3. The country from which the goods are imported; this determination is made according to the rules of origin, a process recently simplified, but still quite cumbersome for manufactured products with components made in multiple countries.
From these three elements, Customs calculates what tariff will be charged on the import, or the
tax that the importer will have to pay on the imported goods: it is generally a percentage of their value, but it can also be calculated with some other method, based on the number of units shipped or their weight, for example.
13-2a Classification
The classification of goods follows a coding scheme that is essentially the same worldwide, as most countries have adopted the Harmonized Commodity Description and Coding System------also called the Harmonized System (HS) of Classification------developed by the Customs Cooperation Council. The Harmonized System is used to classify both exports and imports. The fact that a trader can use the same code when it is exporting a product from one country and importing it in another is a great simplification. At one time, almost every country had its own classification and coding systems.
According to the HS, each product can have a code that uses up to ten digits. An example, taken from the tariff schedule of the United States, would be:
6402.19.05 golf shoes
.30___________for men
.60___________for women
.90___________for other persons
where the first six digits represent the “root” of the international coding(i.e., the code that will be identical in all the countries which have adopted the Harmonized System for the product “golf shoes”). The last four digits are “country-specific” (i.e. , every country can use these to differentiate between different subcategories of the main product, as the United States does between golf shoes for men, for women, and for “other persons,” presumably children rather than aliens).
The Harmonized System is divided into twenty-one sections, logically determined by the type of product and material, each divided into one or more chapters, with a total of ninety-seven chapters for the entire HS nomenclature. The chapter in which the golf shoes are classified is Chapter 64, entitled “Footwear, gaiters and the like; parts of such articles.” Each chapter is then divided into headings, which make up the first four digits of the HS number. The heading under which the golf shoes can be found is “6402.19 Other footwear with outersoles and uppers of rubber or plastics.” Each heading is then divided into subheadings, or the six-digit code common to all HS countries (“6402.19 golf shoes” in our example).
The HS is accompanied by a series of six General Rules of Interpretation, which detail how an importer should arrive at the correct HS code for an entry :
1. The section, chapter, and heading only serve as guides, and the correct classification may be in a different section, chapter, and heading altogether.
2. The classification of an incomplete or unfinished product is that of the finished product. For example, shipments that contain all of the subassemblies for a final product should be classified as the final product rather than as individual parts. This is true of chemical compounds as well.
3. When in doubt between two classifications, the one with the most specific description is the correct one. However, if the product is made up of several parts, each of which would lead to a different classification, then the classification that lends it its “essential character” is the correct one.
4. When there is no category under which a specific product can be classified, then the classification that should be used is that of a product that would be most like it.
5. Containers and packaging materials are classified with the products with which they enter: such would be the case for camera case, for example. However, if the container has usage beyond the product itself, then it must be entered and classified separately.
6. When comparing classifications, only descriptions at the same level should be compared;
it is not appropriate to compare a heading to a subheading, for example.
Nevertheless, the correct classification is always subject to some interpretation on the part of the importer and of Customs officers. Since the classification of a specific article determines at which tariff rate it will be taxed and whether it will be subjected to numerical quotas (as are some textile articles in developed countries, such as the United States, see Section 13-3a), it can be a nontrivial issue. In those cases where a U.S. importer is in doubt about a correct classification, the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection (formerly the U.S. Customs Office) will issue, prior to the entry of the goods, a binding ruling( where it will determine the correct classification of a specific product, a decision that will be binding to both parties.
In early 2000, there were efforts undertaken to simplify the ten-digit classification used by the United States and to model it after Canada’s system, which uses only the six-digit subheadings of the HS. However, as of 2002, the U.S. Customs’ tariff schedule was still using a ten-digit based classification system.
Classification Quirks
G
iven the multitude of products imported into the United States------and given the eclectic tastes of the U.S. population------a large number of unusual following the Harmonized System, with some decisions that can be amusing:
A novelty item called a “necktie in a bottle” was classified by Customs as a necktie------no surprise here------and therefore was made subject to numerical quotas. However, since its bottle package was unusual, it also had to be classified separately, according to General Rule of Interpretation Number 5.
Some Halloween costumes have been classified as “articles of clothing” by Customs, and were therefore made subject to high tariffs and some numerical quotas. This decision obviously brought jeers on the part of importers who argue that children are unlikely to wear Dracula disguises to school, with the possible exception of a single holiday: Halloween.
A novelty item, consisting of a cloth pocket that can be wrapped on a couch’s armrest to hold a TV remote control or a couple of magazines, and sold under the trade name “TV Duck,” was classified by Customs as a bedspread------Rule of Interpretation Number 4------which subjected it to high tariffs and numerical quotas. The importer disagreed, and this protracted fight went all the way to the U.S. Court of Appeals: “You had to be in the Courtroom to appreciate the looks of disbelief that the judges directed toward (the Customs’ lawyer).”
Canadian exporters have drilled holes in boards to allow their construction lumber to be classified as “finished products”------since homebuilders can fit wires through them------and therefore avoid the high tariffs placed by the United States on lumber, which it considers subsidized by the provincial governments of Canada. U.S. Customs and Canada are still fighting this issue: the U.S. has even suggested to Canada that it impose an export tariff on all lumber rather than face U.S. anti-dumping duties.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The correct classification of an imported good is generally made by the importer and then verified by the Bureau of Customs and Border Protection; however, each country has different standards and a few put the entire classification responsibility on Customs. In any case, it is critical to have a complete description of the goods on the commercial invoice, and not just a part number or an item number. When in doubt, Customs can ask to see the merchandise before it is released, and this inspection can substantial delays.
13-2b Valuation
Since most duty is collected ad valorem (on the value of the goods imported in a country) a correct valuation amount must be determined by the importer, following a number of valuation rules governed by the Customs Office of the country in which the goods are imported.
For most member countries of the World Trade Organization------and officially for all WTO countries as of December 31, 2000------the valuation of the goods is based on the transaction value of the sale. Therefore, the valuation of the goods must start with the value presented on the invoice sent by the exporter to the importer. For most countries, the value used is the “landed” value, or the CIF/CIP value of the goods (see Sections 4-9 and 4-11 for explanations of these Incoterms), that is, the invoice value including packaging costs, transportation costs in the exporting country, international transportation costs to the country of destination, and international insurance costs. For other countries, including the United States, the value used is the FCA or FAS value (see Sections 4-5 and 4-6 for explanations of these Incoterms), that is, the invoice value of the goods as well as packaging costs, transportation costs in the exporting country, but excluding the costs of international shipping and insurance.
There are obvious difficulties in reaching the correct valuation unless the commercial invoice sent is detailed enough to include all of these different costs in a clear, itemized fashion, regardless of the Terms of Trade (Incoterms) used in the transaction. For example, a CIF sale to an American importer should spell out the costs of international freight and international insurance, so that they can be deducted from the invoice value for Customs purposes.
The valuation process can be much more complicated than what has been outlined so far. Some countries used to determine value based upon the “Brussels Definition of Value (BDV),” or the “usual” price of a commodity, based on the price at which a product would sell in a free market between an unrelated buyer and seller. Such BDV has slowly been replaced by the transaction value since 1994. In those cases where Customs suspect that valuation based on the invoice would result in undervaluation------or, possibly, overvaluation------Customs can still legitimately decide that valuation can be determined with other methods:
Comparative method: Customs determine the value of the goods based upon the value of identical or similar quantity to the same country. Note that the determination of the value of the goods is made based upon importing data and that differences in exporting countries’ costs are not taken into consideration.
Deductive method: Customs determine at what price identical or similar goods are sold within ninety days of importation in the importing country, and determines an entry value based upon “normal” mark-ups in the distribution channel.
Computed or reconstructed value method: Customs determine the value of the goods by computing the manufacturing costs of the goods and adding “an amount for profit and general expenses equal to that usually reflected in the sales of goods of the same class or kind.”
Method of last resort: Customs use “well-trained” and “well-informed” Customs officials to determine the value of the goods imported; no specific guidelines are given, other than that the valuation cannot be “arbitrary.” It is unlikely to be anything else, though.
The valuation of the goods imported can be increased by some items not included on the invoice; for example, a royalty to be paid by the importer to the exporter, a commission to be paid by the importer sells the goods to their final purchaser. The valuation can also be affected by the presence of what Customs call an assist(, or an item that the importer provided to the exporter in order to produce the goods: for example, a mold or a die that the exporter used in manufacturing the product. The value of such an assist must be added, on a per-item bases, to the value of the goods imported.
Finally, the issue of exchange rates is relevant. Customs must arrive at the value of the goods imported in the importing country’s currency, even though the invoice can be written in a different currency. Each national Customs Office therefore has rules to determine what exchange rate will be used to convert an invoice issued in a foreign currency. United States Customs use the date of export of the merchandise.
13-2c Rules of Origin
The third element necessary to determine the duty that will be applied to a specific import is the country of origin of the goods. Goods are given a country of origin based upon a set of rules that are known as “rules of origin,” which follow one or the other of two methods, neither of which has yet been adopted universally by the World Trade Organization (WTO), despite the fact that there has been a committee working on this project since 1995.
Substantial transformation: The country of origin of a product is the country in which it acquired its most substantial transformation. The determination of the “substantial transformation” is fraught with pitfalls and can lead to widely different interpretations. FOR example consider a computer assembled in Mexico from parts originating in Taiwan (memory chips),the Unites States(CPU),China (board and hard drive), Brazil (monitor), and so on: where did the “substantial transformation” take place, and what is the country of origin of the product? Although vague, this is still the method followed by the Unite States-with the exception of textiles’ country of origin determination-and it can lead to fairy interesting decisions (see Box titled Made Where? on the following page).
Change in HS classification: The country of origin is the country in which the last change in Harmonized System classification occurred. The method is the one currently followed by the United States for textile products, and it has proven to be much easier to implement. Nevertheless, the decision can sometimes lead to product’s country of origin being a country in which a fairly inconsequential transformation took place, and where little value was added. Already several exceptions have been made to this rule.
Unfortunately, there seems to be no easy way to determine what the country of origin of a complex product is. THE determination of a country of origin-and the marking that are associated with it-probably one of the most difficult issues facing firms engaged in international trade today, as different duty rates are used for different countries and as numerical quotas exist for some countries but not others. An importer can be charged very different duty rates, and, in some cases, fined substantially for having hidden the actual country of origin:
A Hong-Kong clothing manufacture was fined US$388,000 for fraudulently seeking to export Chinese-made garments to the Unites States.(…) The firm pleased guilty to 10 counts of lying about the origin of 14,000 dresses. They carried Hong-Kong labels but were actually made in china. The maximum penalty for such cases is US$500,000 and two years in jail.
U.S. Customs keeps and publishes a list of all the firms that it has found guilty of transshipping, the practice of attempting to hide the country. Because of the very different conditions under which textile products from China and from Hong-Kong are imported into the United States, many of these firms have been Hong Kong-based firm.
In addition, the country of origin of a good can have substantial marketing consequences, as most countries require that the goods be marked with their country of origin; for obvious reasons, importers of luxury clothing items prefer a good marked “made in Italy” to one made in a country not known for its designers. However, the issue is of consequence for all sorts of products, as consumers everywhere are sensitive to what international marketers call“country-of-origin effects,”17 the perceptions that country of origin imparts on the product.
13-2d Tariffs
An importing country usually manages its imports under a tariff system that is dubbed ”N-column tariff system,” with N, the number of columns, corresponding to the number of different classes of countries that the importing country considers. The tariff rates would then be the same for all of the countries in a given class. As the number and complexity of multilateral trade agreements increase, this
Made Where?
U
nder the “substantial transformation” rule of origin, the United States’ Customs determined that transformation steel rods into steel wire was not substantial enough to warrant changing the country of origin, but that the assembly of photo album pages into a binder was. Similarly, ostrich chicks hatched in Great Britain from eggs laid in South Africa had not been subjected to “a process so substantial as to transform them into new and different articles of commerce” and therefore were coming form South Africa and subject to the then-existing embargo on imports from this country; however, ostrich feathers coming form South Africa and placed on hats made in China were considered transformed enough that their entry was permitted: they “originated” in China.
Under the “change in HS number,” though, there were similarly difficult situations: A pair of underwear made for Victoria Secret, assembled into final products in a Jordanian plant from panels cut in Israel, and shipped back across the border to Israel is officially “made in Israel” as General Rule of Interpretation 2 dictates, and benefits from the free-trade agreement between Israel and the United States. Silk scarves that to be considered “made in Italy” under the substantial transformation rule, are now considered to be originating in China, since the HS classification for a raw silk scarf and a painted one is the same. Under pressure from the European Union, the United States relented, and those scarves are once again allowed to be “made in Italy” and fetch US $200 prices, a price difficult to obtain for a scarf made in China.
terminology can sometimes be confusing, as there can be many more than “N” classes. Nevertheless, the terminology has remained, and most tariff schedules( are known as two-three-, or four-column schedules, with the Most-Favored Nations(MFN) subject to column1 tariffs and others to column 2 tariffs. In 2000,the MFN designation was officially changed to Normal Trade Relations(NTR), but this terminology has not yet been universally adopted.
However, the number of columns is often quite an oversimplification if the actual tariff system. For the Unites States, there are only five trading partners that do not have NTR status, all of which are minor trading partners(consider the countries of Afghanistan, Cuba,* Laos, north Korea, and Vietnam). However, among the relations (Canada, Mexico, and Israel, as well as a number of Caribbean countries), and several that have a special status on specific products, such as most developing countries under the Generalized System of P reference. Add to these several bilateral agreements on specific products, and the system is much more than a two-column system. Therefore the first column is actually spit into two subcolumns, one labeled ”general” for all NTR countries, and the other “ special ” for all countries for which, for a given HS number, there has been a special negotiation. Table 13-1 shows this layout.
Tariffs are generally calculated ad valorem or a percentage tax on the value of the goods imported. Nevertheless, Other methods exist, such as a fixed amount per the goods imported. Some others are calculated with a mixed system, such as a fixed amount per unit in addition to a percentage of the value of the goods imported; such a tariff is called a compound duty rate. Table 13-1 illustrates all these alternatives:
· A company importing springs for watches(9114.10.4000) would have to pay 7.3 percent duty on FCA value of the goods if they came from an NTR country , for example ,Japan. If the spring came from India (Generalized System of preference), Canada (North-American Free Trade)
TABLE 13-1 United States Tariff Schedule
Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States (2002) (Rev.4)
Annotated for Statistical Reporting Purposes
XVIII
|
Heading/ Subheading |
Stat. Suffix |
Article Description |
Unit Of Quantity |
Rates of Duty |
||
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
General |
Special |
|
|
9114 9114.10 9114.10.40 9114.10.80 9114.20.00 9114.30 9114.30.40 9114.30.80 9114.40 9114.40 9114.40.40 9114.40.60 9114.40.80 9114.90 9114.90.15 9114.90.30 9114.90.40 9114.90.50 |
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 |
Other clock or watch parts: Springs, including hairsprings For watches…………… Other………. Jewels………… Dials: Not exceeding 50 mm in width… Exceeding 50 mm in width….. Plates and bridges: Watch movement bottom or pillar or their equivalent…… Any plate, or set of plates, suitable for assembling thereon a clock movement……… Other: For watches……….. Other………. Other: Assemblies and subassemblies for watch or clock movements consisting of two or more pieces or parts fastened or joined inseparably together: For watch movements…….. For clock movements…… Other: For watches…… Other………….. |
No… No… No… No… No… No… No… X… X… X… X…. X… X… |
7.3% 4.2% Free o.4c each+ 7.2% 4.4% 12c each 10c each 7.3% 4.2% 7.2% 6%+ 2.3c jewel +0.2c for each other piece or part ,but if consisting in part of a plate of a set of plates the total duty shall not exceed the duty for the complete movement 8.8% 4.2% |
Free(A+,CA,D,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J.JO.MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,CA,E,IL,J,MX) Free(A+,B,CA,E,IL,J,MX) |
65% 65% 10% 5c each+ 45% 50% 75c each 38c each 65% 65% 45% 65%+ 25c jewel+ 3c for each other piece or part of a plate or a set of plates the total duty shall not exceed the duty for the complete movement 65% 65% |
Legend:
A+: Generalized System of Preference B: Automotive Product Trade Act CA: Canada
E: Caribbean Basin Economic Recovery Act IL: United Stated-Israel Free Trade Area J: Andean Trade
MX: Mexico Preference Act
Agreement), Haiti (Caribbean Basin Initiative), Israel (United States-Israel Free Trade Agreement), Peru (Andean Trade Preference Act), or Mexico (NAFTA), the importer would have no duty to pay. If the spring came from Laos, the duty rate would be 65 percent.
·A company importing small watch dials (9114.30.4000) from an NTR country, such as Germany, would have to pay US$0.004 per dial, in addition to 7.2 percent of the FCA value of the dials. The same product coming from some other countries could be imported duty-free, while others would be saddled with a US$0.05 duty in addition to 45 percent of the FCA value.
·A company importing watch plates suitable for assembling watch movements (9114.40.4000) from South Korea would pay US$0.12 for each unit imported. The same product from North Korea would be charged US
Some countries can have very unique ways of determining tariffs. Switzerland’s tariff schedule stands out in that most of its tariffs are based on the gross weight of the goods imported (per 100 kg) rather than their value, even for products such as computers or texiles. Most countries’ tariff schedules are now published electronically and can be accessed through the World Customs Organization’s website at www.wcoomd.org.
13-2e Dumping
In some cases, Customs can determine that the invoice value is lower (in some rare cases,higher) than the actual value of the goods. This is generally uncovered by comparing the value of a giving invoice with a database of import entries with the same Harmonized System Number made in preceding year(s).For example, in the United States, the invoice value is systematically compared to existing valuations: this is one of the purposes of the column labeled “unit of quantity” in Table 13-1 which represents the units under which the Customs’ computer keeps the values of other entries under a specific HS number to determine whether a given entry is within the bounds of “normal.” Should the invoice give a value outside of these bounds, a Customs’ Import Specialist will scrutinize the entry before liquidating it.
When the invoice’s value is much below what Customs has historically accepted and when a much higher valuation is reached with one of the alternative valuation methods (see Section 13-2b),Customs can determine that the exporter is dumping( the goods in the importing country (i.e., selling the goods at a price which is below their commercial value ).The exact definition of “dumping” varies from country to country, but the most prevalent definition is a price that is below the wholesale price of the goods in the exporting country and that causes injury to competitors (or some other group, such as a labor union) located in the importing country. For some countries, such as the United States, there must be a complaint from an injured party before Customs considers that the undervaluation is a case of dumping. In addition, an organization independent from Customs-in the United States, the International Trade Commission-is asked to determine whether there is actual injury to competitors and ascertain whether the goods are sold at below their commercial value before an exporter is found guilty of dumping.
In those cases, Customs can add an additional duty to the regular duty rate of the commodity, and this duty rate is called an “anti-dumping” duty, which can range from 1 percent to several times the value of the goods imported. Unfortunately, dumping accusations have been one of the most commonly used tools of certain countries to restrict imports, and it was still one of the most commonly used methods of protectionism in 2000.In addition, Customs can also use a “countervailing” duty to tax products that the exporting government is found to have subsidized. In the United States, there are roughly twenty cases a year of industries requesting relief from dumping practices; there were highs of 105 requests in 1992 and 39 orders in 1993. Historically, most of the requests have come from the steel industry and products manufactured with steel, such as ball bearings, but there is a 283 percent anti-dumping duty on raw pistachios and a 318 percent duty on roasted pistachios from Iran, due to a complaint initiated by pistachio growers in California, most of whom are, ironically, Iranian expatriates.
13-2f Other Taxes
In addition to duty, several countries will perceive additional taxes based on the value of the goods; these additional taxes are a disguised way of creating additional
Revenues from imports while remaining within the boundaries of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) and the rules of the World Trade Organization (WTO), which mandate systematic reductions in tariffs.
Such additional taxes can be labeled very creatively:
Punitive duty: The United States, unhappy about decision a decision by the European Union to give preferential treatment to bananas imported from former European colonies in the Caribbean and African , retaliated by placing a 100 percent duty on certain items coming from any of the fifteen EU countries: cashmere, blue cheese, “handbags covered in plastic sheeting,” and so on..
Border traffic tax: Russia, in order to “make a more accurate tally of border flows of people, cargo and means of transportation,” imposed a 1 percent tax on all goods crossing its borders. Russian travelers are taxed at 0.8 percent of their monthly income.
Safeguard tax: Argentina, after being chastised by the WTO for having increased its duty rate on footwear, reduced them, and immediately reimposed them through an emergency “safeguard tax” designed to protect its footwear industry against foreign competition.
Temporary protection tax: The United States imposed a 33 percent additional tariff on brooms from Mexico, to allow U.S. manufacturers to increase their efficiency so that they could compete against imports. It repealed such tax two years later, nothing that the industry had not taken advantage of this protection period to improve its efficiency.
These taxes are designed to increase revenues for the importing country, protect less efficient domestic industries, and punish importers, while respecting the letter--- but certainly not the intent--- of WTO agreements.
13-2g value Added Tax
In some countries, an additional tax is collected in addition to the duty, but is generally considered to have no bearing on importers ---even if it adds up to a significant amount--- since it is perceived from domestic producers as well as from importers, and is eventually only paid by consumers: the value Added Tax(VAT)(.The idea of VAT is somewhat simple in its concept: the tax is perceived on the value added by each firm involved in adding value to a good, from the first one in the production chain to the last one. The implementation of a VAT is somewhat complex, though.
It is provably best to explain the VAT concept and its implementation--- as it is practiced in the European Union countries, at least--- with a simplified example:
1. A farmer purchased seeds, fertilizer, pesticides, and fuel to produced corn. On each of her production-related purchases, she pays the VAT. She keeps track of the VAT she has paid in a special bookkeeping account, as a “debit.” She then sells the corn she has produced and collects VAT from her customer, which she also records in that account as a “credit.” At the end of the quarter, she deducts the VAT she has paid from the VAT she has collected, and sends the difference to her government.
2. The corn is purchased by a mill that promptly transforms it into several products, including corn syrup. On all the products it sells to wholesalers and retailers, the mill collects VAT, an amount it records in s special bookkeeping account. At the end of the quarter, the mill deducts all the VAT it has paid to farmers for corn and all the VAT it has paid for its other purchases from the VAT it has collected from its customers and sends the difference to its government.
3. The corn syrup is purchased by s consumer who uses it for cooking. The consumer pays the VAT, but has no way to collect any, so it is the consumer who bears the tax’s entire burden.
The VAT
For imports, the concept is the same: the VAT is collected from the importer, but the importer can deduct the VAT it had paid from the VAT it eventually collects from its customers; therefore, the tax is not an actual cost to the importer. However, this is somewhat incorrect: in reality, there are substantial accountings and cash-flow costs associated with this method of garnering taxes. Nevertheless, since both domestic and imported products are taxed the same way, there are mo advantages garnered by either in their final costs to the consumer. The cost is quite a substantial one for the ultimate consumer, though, as the tax rate in the European Union is approximately 20 percent.
In the European Union, the Value Added Tax is computed on the sum of the sum of the value of the imported goods and the duty perceived at importation.
13-3 Non-Tariff Barriers
Some countries use high tariffs to attempt to limit the import of certain goods. However, steady pressure from the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, and now the World Trade Organization, has reduced considerably the duty paid by most goods the most countries. while there are still some exceptions, the trends is still toward ever-lower duty rates, with many countries having adopted tariffs that are rarely above 10 percent for most goods.
At the same time, the WTO has also been very active in attempting to decrease the number of those alternatives are still in place, which effectively limit exporters’ access to certain markets. Non-tariff trade barriers are those policies and actions that have the effect of reducing the number of items imported in a specific country.
13-3a Quotas(
The primary method used by countries to limit imports is a system of quotas, which limit the quantity of goods that can enter a particular country. A quota can take either of two forms:
1. An absolute quota, which places a yearly limit on the number of items entering s country under a specific HS number. On occasion, the quota ceiling on the total value of goods imported under a specific HS number. Once the quota is reached, goods in that category can no longer be imported. Some countries whose products are subject to quotas have established a system of visas to monitor how much of a given quota has been filled by its exporters (see Section 13-4g).
2. A tariff-rate quota , which places a two-tiered tariff rate on a specific category of products. Until a specific number of goods are entered, the tariff is low, but once the quota is reached, the tariff changes to a much higher percentage. Nevertheless, the goods can still be legally imported.
TABLE 13-2 Countries Subjected to Textile Quotas in the United States
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
United Arab Emirates Indonesia Nepal
Bahrain India Oman
Bangladesh Jamaica Panama
Bulgaria Japan Peru
Brazil Kenya The Philippines
Canada Republic of Korea Pakistan
People’s Republic of china Kuwait Poland
Colombia Laos Qatar
Costa Rica Lebanon Romania
Czech Republic Sri Lanka Russia
Egypt Macedonia Slovakia
Fiji Burma El Salvador
Guatemala Macau Thailand
Guam Northern Mariana Islands Turkey
Hong Kong Mauritius Trinidad and Tobago
Hungary Malaysia Uruguay
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quotas are usually placed on very specific items coming from a specific country of origin: for example , in 2000, no more than 147,358 dozens of articles under quota number 651-B-----HS numbers 6107.22.0015 and 6108.32.0015, corresponding to boys’ and girls’ blanket sleepers (a type of pajamas) made of man-made fibers------could have been imported into the United Stated from China. This complex system of quotas for textiles and apparel is followed by the United States and other developed countries for products originating from some developing countries, and if outlined in an international treaty called the Multi-Fiber Agreement. Those quotas restrict the number of textile items imported from the countries listed in Table 13-2. The WTO negotiated an Agreement on Textiles and Clothing, and all developed countries; textile quotas are supposed to have been lifted by 2005.
Quotas can also be aggregate quotas, applying to all imports under an HS heading, regardless of the country of origin; for example, the United States has a tariff-rate quota on milk, cream, dried milk, cheddar cheese, ice cream, peanuts, cocoa powder, sugar, and a substantial number of other food products.
Quotas can also be called “voluntary quotas”. Under pressure from the importing government, exporters agree to limit their exports “voluntarily” to a certain quantity. Such was the case during the early 1980s in the United States, when Japanese automobile manufactures agreed to absolute quotas for automobiles and light trucks.
Quotas can also come in the form of export quotas(, when an exporting country limits the quantity of a certain type of goods that firms can export from its territory (see Section 7-3f).
13-3b Adherence to National Standards
Unfortunately, quotas are hardly the only non-tariff trade barriers placed by countries to restrict imports. In many instances, countries enact “safety measures” designed to ostensibly protect their populations from effective, dangerous, or
The European Union’s Banana Wars
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I
n 1993, the European Union, in an effort to support the economies of some of its members’ former colonies in the Caribbean and Africa, devised a complex system of quotas, preferential tariffs, and import licenses to favor bananas imported from these countries. Even though it is not an exporter of bananas, the United States got tangled in this dispute since two of the companies that were affected by these restrictions were Dole Foods and Chiquita Brands, two American firms exporting bananas grown in Central America to Europe.
Even after three rulings against this practice by the World Trade Organization, the European Union still maintained this convoluted system of preferential treatment and the United States eventually retaliated with higher tariffs on products from Europe such as pens, candles, and cheese, to no avail. The “banana wars” escalated to a point where it involved the highest levels of government, and it took years to be resolved, despite WTO panels’ efforts to ease the tension and resolve the issue.
In early 2001, Chiquita Brands took the unusual step of suing the European Union for US $525 million, which the company claims was the lost profits the company had incurred because of the restrictions, and which caused it to default on its bond payments. The spat is now over, and Europeans end up paying slightly less for bananas today than they did when the trade barrier was in place.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unhealthy products from abroad. While most of these restrictions are justified and necessary, some of then are based on dubious data and are simply a form of undisguised protectionism for less efficient domestic producers.
Countries certainly can demand that products sold within their borders meet the standards that their governments have enacted; for example, there are many requirements of quality for consumer products in developed countries. The most prominent ones are the Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) in Germany, the Japanese Industry Standards (JIS) in Japan, the Norms Francaises (NF) in France, and the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) in the United States. A few international standards exist as well, such as the ones defined by the International Organization for standards, which laid out the ISO set of requirements. Most of these requirements are legitimate in that they reflect national preferences and sentiments toward consumer protection, health standards, and safety. For example, the European Union requires that vehicles be equipped with rear turn signals that are distinct from the brake lights, and the United States requires that automobiles be equipped with airbags. Both are worthy requirements.
The point at which these requirements become non-tariff barriers is unclear. An exporter is often unwilling to incorporate in its products an additional feature which is costly, or which it deems unnecessary, and claims that the requirement is a non-tariff barrier, when it may just be an unwillingness to deal with one of the differences and difficulties of selling a product in a foreign country. In a parallel fashion, such a requirement may not be a non-tariff barrier, even if it is required only of imported products and not of domestic manufacturers, if it is to protect a country from “importing” a disease that has not yet been observed domestically. A recent example would be the so-called “mad-cow disease,” against which non-European countries are trying to protect themselves.
Nevertheless, countries’ efforts to make imports adhere to national standards are often considered to be trade barriers: there have been lengthy spats over the safety of Mexican avocadoes in the United States, of United States’ cherries in Mexico, of New Zealand apples in Japan, and of United States’ hormone-treated beef in the European Union. The dispute with Japan over the safety of U.S. tomatoes lasted forty-six years.
13-3c Other Non-Tariff Barriers
Countries have enacted some very creative means to slow or restrict imports without having recourse to high tariffs, to quotas, or to standardization requirements. Here are several examples, which certainly do not constitute an exhaustive list:
·In the very early 1980s, France decided that it needed to protect its nascent VCR industry. It achieved this goal by requiring that every VCR entering the country be inspected, that a sticker be placed on every machine, and that the inspection take place in Poitiers, a land-licked small town about 250 miles from the port of LeHavre through which most VCRs were shipped, moreover, the inspection station was also a one-man operation.
Countless countries have enacted similar “slow” Customs clearance processes, in order to deter imports and increase importers’ costs, who need to shoulder additional storage cots and potential market delays.
·Another tactic is to require a mind-numbing number of documents and approvals. For example, in India, “an exporter has to complete and process fifty-four documents(…): twenty-seven pre-shipments documents, fourteen for Customs clearance, and thirteen for post-shipment realization of bills. As many as sixteen approvals are needed from departments of the central government.”
·Another way to slow Customs entries is to request additional papers that are not readily available or that are close to impossible to gather. The United States requests the “sewing tickets” for some garments, an internal work document of the garment factory, as well as the time cards of the employees working there, in an attempt to determine the country of origin of tactile products.
·South Korea has been tremendously effective at keeping foreign cars out of its domestic market. As of 1998, foreign automobiles constituted less than 1 percent of all sales. This was achieved, despite relatively low tariffs of 8 percent, with a systematic campaign designed to portray the purchase of a foreign car as unpatriotic. To bolster this perception, the South Korean government has all but threatened all purchasers of foreign cars with an income tax audit.
·Russia asked the United States’ exporters of chicken parts(legs and wings) to individually inspect every bird-for specific diseases-before they can enter the country, effectively preventing all U.S. imports of such parts.
13-3d Pre –Shipment Inspections
Pre-Shipment Inspections (PSIs) inspections performed by independent companies at the point of
departure of goods destined to be exported. The firm determines that the goods shipped are the ones ordered by the importer, in the correct quantity, and sufficiently well packed for an international shipment. When the independent firm has ascertained that all of these aspects conform to the invoice, it issues a Certificate of Inspection (see Section 7-4c) to the importer. Inspection companies have representatives in most ports and generally can handle just about any sort of shipment; on many occasions, though, the exporter experiences delays with PSIs as the workload of inspectors can be substantial, and as the expertise needed for a specific shipment may not be available.
Pre-Shipment Inspections are sometimes requested by importers to ensure that the exporter is
shipping the correct product and the correct quantity; they are used when the importer is purchasing on a “Cash-in-Advance” or on a Letter of Credit basis. However, most PSIs are requested by countries that require Pre- Shipment inspections as part of their import process. There are several reasons for that requirement:
· The country wants an expert opinion on the classification and the value of the products that are about to enter its territory.
· The country wants to fight corruption in its own ports of entry: by having a foreign, independent firm determine the classification and value of imported goods, its own Customs authorities have lost the ability to “be flexible” and change their classifications and valuations for a bribe. Such was the motivation when Indonesia demanded that any good shipped into Indonesia had to be pre-inspected by the Societe Generale de Surveillance.
· The country wants an estimate of the currency requirements it will face in the short term, and uses the value of the shipments subject to PSI to forecast its foreign currency needs.
· The country wants to generate some revenues in addition to the tariff it charges. Most of the countries requiring PSIs have long-term contracts giving an exclusive right to a single inspection company to inspect all of the goods about to enter its territory. Although it is pure speculation, it is likely that inspection companies compensate the country for this exclusive right by transferring a portion of the revenues generated by inspections to its Tresury.
13-4 Customs Clearing Process
The Customs clearing process differs from country to country, and tends to be arcance and cumbersome. In most countries, because of the complexity of the task, only certified Customs brokers or Customs agents are allowed to file the paperwork necessary to clear Customs. This section will only give a brief overview of the processes generally followed by Customs authorities worldwide and give examples based upon the United States system.
13-4a general process
In some countries, the process starts with an application for an import license, a request for the express authorization to import a certain product. Import licenses are usually granted according to a number of criteria, most of which are based on the availability of foreign currency to pay for the import, and on the availability of domestic substitutes. Generally speaking, countries with scarce foreign currency resources will attempt to limit the granting of import licenses to those companies that have generated export revenues, and to those companies purchasing goods for which no close domestic substitute is available.
For most countries, however, the process starts when an importer files an entry (i.e., notifies the Customs authorities that it will import – or has imported – a particular product ).There is usually a paper form (see Table 13-3) that has to be field and which must accompany all the documentation necessary for the import: invoice, Certificate of Origin, Certificate of Inspection (when required ), Certificate of Insurance, and other forms as required by the Customs rules of the importing country. In most developed countries, the importer is usually responsible for classifying the goods according to the tariff schedule of the importing country, and for determining the amount of duty. In many developing countries, this task is still left to the Customs authorities, which often delays the process of clearance. In most instances, the goods are not released to the importer (cleared) until after the duty is paid or after there is evidence from the importer that it will pay, a requirement often met with a Customs bond. Generally, Customs authorities will review a percentage of the entries made by importers after the goods have been cleared and will have a few months to a couple of years to challenge them. If an entry is reviewed satisfactorily, the entry is deemed liquidated . In some countries, such as the United States, an importer dissatisfied with the final decision of Customs authorities has a brief period of time to protest a liquidated entry and request a review before it id finally settled.
|
13-3 The Canadian Entry Form for Food Products |
|||||
|
Canadian Food Inspection Agency |
Agence canadianne d'inspection des aliments |
|
|
||
|
IMPORT DECLARATION |
|
DECLARATION D'IMPORTATION |
|||
|
1□ Dairy Products Products Laitiers |
□ Orocessed Fruits and Vegetables Fruits et legumes transfrmes |
□ Honey Mile |
□ Maple Products Produits de I'erable |
||
|
□ Pesticides Semences |
□ Seeds Semences |
· Feed Aliments du betail |
□ Fertilizer Engrais |
||
|
Registrable/Subjects a I'enregistrement |
|
|
|||
|
2 Name and Address of Manufactuer Nom et adresse du febricant |
3 Name and Address of Exporter Nom et adresse de I'exportateur |
||||
|
4 Name and Canadian Address of Importer Nom et adresse canadience de I'importateur |
5 Name and Address of Destination (consignee) Nom at adresse du destinataire |
||||
|
Telephone Number Numero de telephone |
|
Telephone Number Numero de telephone |
|
||
|
6 Transaction No./N' de transaction |
7 Carrier/Transporteur |
|
|||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
9 Container No./N' de conteneur |
|||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
8 Fright No./N' de vol |
10 Trailer No./N' de remorque |
|
|||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND PACKING (ATTACH LIST IF NECESSARY) DESCRIPTION DU PRODUIT ET DE L'EMBALLAGE (ANNEXER UNE AU BESSOIN) |
|||||
|
11 Common Name Nom usuel |
12 Brand Name Marque |
13 Grade Categorie |
14 No.of Shipping Containers Nbre de contenants |
||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
15 No.,Type and Net Contents of Individual Containers per Shipping Container/Nbre,type et contenu net des contenants individuets par contenant d'expedition |
16.Total Net Quantity Quantite totale netle |
17.Label Approval No.N'd'approbation de I'etiquette |
18.Registration No. N' d'enregistrement |
19.purpose of Importation Motil de I'importation |
20.Addition documentation and other references Documents additionnents et autres references |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I,_______________ the importer of the products described on this form do hereby certify that the information provided on this form is complete,correct and accurately describes the products contained in the shipment. |
Je,_______________,I'importateur des Produkts decrits sur ce formulaire,certifie que I'information foumie surce formulaire est complete et qu'elle decrit avec precision less produits contenues dans cechargement. |
||||
|
By sugning this declaration in the case of the food products used for human consumption,I affirm that I have read the "Regulatory Requirements for Food Products Imported into Canada" set forth in the instructions to fill out this form and the products described on this form meet those reqirements. |
En signant cette declaration,dans le cas de produits alimentaires utilises pour consummation humaine,j'affirme que j'al lu les "Exigences regiementaires pour les produits alimentaires au Canada" inscrites dans les instructions pour remplir ce formulaire et que les produits decrits sur ce formulaire satisfont ces exigences. |
||||
|
|
_______________ |
_______________ |
|||
|
|
Signature |
|
|
Date |
|
|
GOVERNMENT USE ONLY /RESERVE A L'ADMINISTRATION |
|||||
|
22.Stamp/Estampe |
23.Instrctions to Customs and Importers/Directives aux douaniers et importateurs |
||||
|
|
□ Au moment de I'importation,main levee et remise sous le controle d'AAC(pour I'inspection a I'arrivee a destination) |
||||
|
|
Further action to be conducted on the shipment at the following place: |
||||
|
|
□___________________________ |
||||
|
|
Autres mesures a prendre a I'egaard du changement a I'endroit suivant |
||||
|
|
□_______________ |
_________ |
|
||
|
|
Other instruction/Instruction particuliere |
||||
|
|
___________ |
_________ |
|
||
|
|
___________ |
|
|
||
|
|
__________ |
_________ |
This information is collected by the Canadian Food Inspection Agency for the purpose of administering all Agriculture Acts. Information may be accessible of protected as required under the provisions of the Access to Information Act.
13-4b Customs Brokers
Because of the complexity and time-consuming nature of filling out Custom entries, many countries demand that importers delegate the task of interacting with Customs to a Customs broker, a representative of the importer that has acquired the knowledge and experience required to deal effectively and efficiently with Customs. In many countries, Customs brokers are the only entities qualified to enter goods (i.e., fill out the paperwork necessary to import goods). It is not the case in the United States, though, where importers can complete their own entries, as long as they have posted a Customs bond (see Section 13-4c). Customs brokers are usually compensated on a fee basis, for each entry they handle. In the United States, Customs brokers are highly qualified individuals who have to take a grueling test on issues of classification, duty computation, and quotas before being allowed to manage importers’ entries.
13-4c Customs Bonds
In most countries the importer has to pay the duty to Customs before the shipment can be legally released. However, this can be extremely unwieldy, especially in those cases where the shipment is an express package or a shipment of time sensitive produce, for example, Therefore, Customs authorities allow importers(or Customs brokers entering goods on their behalf) to post a surety bong, which is a guarantee that the importer or the Customs broker will pay the duty due. A bond is generally a sum of money deposited with Customs, from which any unpaid duty can be withdrawn, or an insurance policy with a surety company which acts as a guarantor of the importer or the Customs broker, and which it would be required to pay if the duty were not paid on time. This process allows goods to be entered before the duty is paid. In some cases, actually, the goods are sold much before the entry is liquidated.
In the United States, the bond is not just a guarantee that the duty will be paid on time; it is also a contract that obligates the importer or the Customs broker to perform all Customs-related functions in a timely manner, such as filing entries that are complete and accurate, as well as present Customs with the goods after they have physically entered the country, generally for inspection purposes.
13-4d Reasonable Care
Out of the United States Customs Modification Act of 1993 came the concepts of informed compliance and reasonable care , neither of which can be easily defined, but which have become pivotal to the efforts of the Customs Service in the United States
The idea behind informed compliance is that if an importer has been found compliant, the likelihood that one of its shipments is going to be inspected is minimal, therefore minimizing delays at entry and allowing the importer to organize its supply chain more predictably. It also lowers costs, as merchandise is cleared quickly and does not languish in some bonded warehouse while the importer and Customs argue about its correct classification valuation, or country of origin.
In order for an importer to be found compliant, it must show that it exercised reasonable care in the filing of its Customs entries. In order to demonstrate reasonable care, the importer must follow along list of obligations that the U.S. Customs service provides. The obligations center on making sure that the importer employs a Customs specialist, who will make sure that all---including the most recent---Customs regulations are followed, and that it has put into place a process by which it correctly determines the valuation, classification, and country of an import. Reasonable care is monitored through a system of compliance audits organized by the U.S. Customs.
Informed compliance
A standard of behavior set and enforced by the United States Customs, that is expected of importers if they want their Customs entries to be cleared quickly and if they want to keep Customs inspections to a minimum.
Reasonable care
A standard of behavior, set and enforced by the United States Customs, that is expected of importers if they want their Customs entries to be cleared quickly and if they want to keep Customs inspections to a minimum.
13-4e Required Documentation
The documentation required by any Customs authority can be extensive. Ideally speaking, there should be only three documents required in every country to make an entry;
· A form designated for entry ( specific to the record-keeping requirements of the importing country )
· A Certificate of Origin to ascertain the country of origin
· A Commercial Invoice with enough information to determine value and classification
However, many more can be included, from an import license to a series of certificates, most of which were introduced in Chapter7. One of the worst offenders is the country of India, with about fifty-four documents, as already mentioned in Section 13-3c. Many countries’ requirements are published electronically; a good number of them can be accessed through www.tradelinks.com .
The critical element of import documentation is that it is established on a per-transaction basis. Every import, however small, needs to have its own specific entry, which can lead to an inordinate amount of paperwork generated, under which both the importer and the Customs authorities are drowning. For example, in order to allow a shipment which landed in any of Europe’s many ports to travel to another country in the EU, a form has to be filed in quintuplicate---five copies---and there were 18 million shipments of this nature in 1999, netting a “paper blizzard” of 90 million copies which the European Customs authorities must store in warehouses.
There are several efforts made to simplify the process of importing merchandise and clearing Customs;
1. The most significant one is the automated (electronic) processing of entries, which was implemented by the U.S. Customs Service under the name of Automated Commercial System (ACS) in 1984, and is in the process of being progressively replaced with an Automated Commercial Environment (ACE) , to be completed by 2005. Several countries have adopted similar programs, but ,to this date, they are all incompatible. The World Customs Organization , with its Kyoto Protocol, and more recently the World Trade Organization, are working on harmonizing Customs requirements worldwide, but so far these efforts have only been marginally successful.
2. Great Britain’s Customs Agency has developed an International Trade Prototype with the help of U.S. Customs. The idea is that the same merchandise, exported from the United States and imported into Great Britain ,generates two sets of paperwork, as if it were two separate, stand alone processes. The international Trade Prototype allows the electronic documentation used for exporting the product from the United States to be used to import the product in the United Kingdom, which reduces the amount of paper generated significantly. The World Customs Organization is now considering a similar set-up.
3. The U.S. Bureau of Customs and Border Protection is also evaluating an Entry Revision Project , which would allow an importer to file entries periodically---say , at the end of the month --- rather than for ever
Transaction. Similarly, duty could be paid for several entries at the same time. Such a system would revolutionize the business of filing entries, bringing much simplification and expediency to the process.
13-4f Required Markings
Production imported in a country often require a marking—“made in (country)” or “product of (country)”---printed or affixed on the product itself or its packaging. Rules differ from country to country on the location of the marking, its size, and whether it needs to be permanently attached to the product. The determination of the country placed on the marking is also left to the country of importation. However, there are no known instances of a country on the marking being different from the country of origin for Customs duty purposes (see section 13-2c).
In the United States, markings are required for most products, although there is a list, maintained by the U.S. Bureau of Customs and Border Protection,
67
of exceptions, most products on which it is different or impossible to place a marking. All markings must be legible, conspicuously placed, and durable. However, the United States has an additional unusual requirement. No product imported in the United States can have a name or package such that it may mislead the public as to its country of origin. It is therefore prohibited to include words such as “American,” “United States,” or “U.S.A.” inappropriate or missing markings are subject to penalties, liquidated damages, and seizures by U.S. Custom.Finally, there is the issue of the “made in the USA” label, which is often a marketing advantage in the U.S. market. Although the Federal Trade Commission considered lowering the minimum United States content to 75 percent of a product’s value, it has maintained it at 98 percent for the foreseeable future, making it all but impossible to mark a product as in the United States unless it is entirely domestically produced.
13-4g Merchandise Visas
For those products whose importation is limited by quotas, and particularly for textile products, a bilateral monitoring system has been implemented by the importing and exporting countries.
Since there is a maximum quantity of goods that can be imported in a given country in a calendar year, the government of the country if export will grant---in some case, sell---the right to export a set quantity of a specifies to an exporting firm. Such authorization is a visa. The visa specifies the type of good (by Harmonized System number), the quantity, and the destination country to which the exporter is allowed to sell.
For products for which such a system is in place, the visa is one of the required documents that must be presented to the Customs authorities of the importing country. As the quotas are eliminated, so are the visa requirements and, therefore, by 2005, visas should have become obsolete.
13-4h Duty Drawbacks
Several countries, including the United States, grant a substantial tax break to exporters who are using imported parts in the products they export. Such a tax break is called a duty drawback.
In the United Sates, the Customs Service will refund 99 percent of the duty paid by an importer in one of three cases.
·For merchandise that is rejected by the importer as non-conforming to the original purchase order
·For imported products that are re-exported unused
·For imported parts that are used---without substantial transformation---in the assembly or manufacturing of products that are eventually re-exported
Note that this duty drawback is not available for products exported to NAFTA countries.
This drawback can represent a considerable savings in many cases. However, few U.S. firms take advantage of this duty drawback opportunity, either because they do not know about it or because they fear the paperwork requirements that accompany this program.
71
Actually, the paperwork requirements used to be mind-boggling; for example, in order to take advantage of the “unused” drawback, Customs required importers to track individual items from their import to their leaving the country. However, since April 1998, the requirements have been relaxed, allowing “commercially interchangeable goods” to qualify an export for the drawback.72
In exchange for this flexibility, Customs has substantially stiffened penalties for illegitimate drawbacks.73
13-5 Foreign Trade Zones
Foreign Trade Zones (FTZ) are specific locations of a country that have acquired a special Customs status. Foreign Trade Zones---sometimes called Free Trade Zones---are areas of a country that. For Customs purpose, still are located “outside” of a country. Practically, that means that goods can be shipped to FTZ without being subject to the duties, quotas, and Customs regulations of the host country. In most countries, however, including the United State, goods admitted in an FTZ must legal in the county in which the zone is located: the exemption applies only to Customs’ purpose, not to other legal requirement. Examples of products that would not be acceptable in an FTZ would be medical devices not yet approved for use in the FTZ country, even though they can be perfectly legal in other countries.
Once in the FTZ, the goods can be warehoused until they are sent to their final destination, either in the host country or to a foreign destination .If the goods are sold in the host country, they are not only dutiable at the time of that transaction. If they are sold abroad, they are dutiable only in the importing country; the country in which the FTZ is located will never collect any duty on the value of than merchandise. The country of origin used for Customs purposes remains the country from which the goods originated, and not the country in which the FTZ is located.
Foreign Trade Zones exist in one form or another in just about every country; the most common form of FTZs is that of a location where cargo transits. For example, most the ports of the world are Foreign Trade Zones, so that cargo can be unloaded from a ship, temporarily stored in a warehouse, and then loaded onto another vessel to its final destination. Such cargo, although physically present territory of the country in which the port is located, never “enters” the country and is therefore never assessed duty. Since shipping companies are moving toward a system of very large “hub” port, from which smaller, so-called feeder ships are serving smaller ports, the importance of Free Trade Zones is expect to increase. Airport, which often operate on the same concept of “hub and spoke,” also often possess a few warehouses in a Free Trade Zone. Since such FTZs are available to all companies involved in international trade, the United States calls them General Purpose (Foreign Trade) Zones.
Free Trade Zone
A
nother type of Foreign Trade Zone is not located in a port or cargo area, but at the place of business of a corporation, such as a plant or a refinery. In most of these types of trade zones, some economic activity beyond simple warehousing is conducted: manufacturing, assembly, repacking, and refining, for example. The Free Trade Zone is created with purpose of creating jobs in the host country by providing a lower cost structure to the business using them, since they do not have to pay duty on the goods that they are processing and eventually re-exporting. Another way a business can save money by obtaining FTZ status is when the host country has a so-called “inverted tariff structure” (i.e., the tariffs charged on parts are higher than the tariffs charged on the final product). Such FTZ locations are called “sub-zones” in the United States, as they need to be affiliated, for legal purpose, with a General Purpose Foreign Trade Zone, and since these locations are only available to one specific company and not to others.
An interesting issue arises when a substantial transformation takes place in a Foreign Trade Zone and the goods change from one Harmonized System Number classification to another. Even though the rules of origin call for the goods to be “made” in the country in which the FTZ is located, in the case---negotiations between Customs and the company determine the country of origin that will be used for duty purposes, be it the country of origin of the parts used, or of the main component, or yet some other alternative. In any case, it is never the country in which the change in HS took place.
FTZs can be quite advantageous to hold goods in inventory until they are sold, improving the cashflow of their owner, to wait for a numerical quota to open, or to wait for an inspection by the host country’s government.
However, in view of the progress made in the last few years by the WTO to lead countries to lower tariffs and increased trade, Foreign Trade Zones may have a limited future since their advantages are dwindling.
End-of-Chapter question
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. What is the concept of a Harmonized System Number? How is it used? What are the advantages of such a system?
2. Explain the concept of “Valuation” form the perspective of Customs. Why is it particularly important to have a detailed Commercial Invoice?
3. Explain the concept of “Classification” from the perspective of Customs. Why is it particularly important to have a detailed Commercial Invoice?
4. Explain the concept of “Country of Origin”. How is it currently determined? Why is it such a difficult concept? Why is it important?
5. What are non-tariff barriers? Why are they used? Give a couple of examples?
6. What types of Quotas are there? How does the United States enforce the quotas it imposes? What is a “merchandise visa”?
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Endnotes
1. Fisher, Donald L., “Finding the right classification to determine duty rates can be a puzzle,” The Journal of Commerce, March 26, 1997, p.2C.
2. Fisher, Donald L., “Understanding harmonized tariffs: A puzzle where none of the piece fit,” The Journal of Commerce, September 16, 1998, p.2C.
3. Fisher, Donald L., “Obtaining Customs rulings requires documentation and some patience,” The Journal of Commerce, November 19, 1997, p.2C.
4. Fisher, Donald L., “When it comes to Customs, the ties that bind can lose your business,” The Journal of Commerce, November 10, 1998, p.7A.
5. Lucentini, Jack, “Customs, importers urge ITC to review tariff classifications,” The Journal of Commerce, May 1, 2000, p.3.
6. Neville, Peterson, and Williams, “Cat antlers and ‘neckties in bottles’,” The Journal of Commerce, January 14, 1998, p.11C.
7. Green, Paula, “A costly Halloween question: Are costumes toys or clothing?” The Journal of Commerce, March 26, 1998, p.1A.
8. Rushford, Greg, “when is a duck not like a bedspread?” The Asian Wall Street Journal, February 24, 1997, p.12.
9. Ungar, Ed, “closing a literal loophole,” US news and World Report, April 27, 1998, p.32.
10. Cowan, Richard, “Weyerhauser seeks tax to end Canada lumber fight,” Reuters’ press release, November 20, 2002, on http://ca.news.yahoo.com/021120/5/qdat.html, December 12, 2002.
11. “Customs Valuation: Agreement on implementation of Article Ⅶ of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade 1994, within the scope of the WTO,” Background Note, February 2000, Agency for International Trade Information and cooperation (AITIC),
http://www.acici.org/aitic/documents/Notes/note8ang.html , January 11, 2001.
12. “Customs Valuation: Agreement on implementation of Article Ⅶ of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade 1994, within the scope of the WTO,” Background Note, February 2000, Agency for International Trade Information and cooperation (AITIC),
http://www.acici.org/aitic/documents/Notes/note8ang.html , January 11, 2001.
13. “Customs Valuation: Agreement on implementation of Article Ⅶ of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade 1994, within the scope of the WTO,” Background Note, February 2000, Agency for International Trade Information and cooperation (AITIC),
http://www.acici.org/aitic/documents/Notes/note8ang.html , January 11, 2001.
14. “The agreement on rules of origin of the WTO,” Background Note, June 1998, Agency for international Trade Information and Cooperation (AITIC),
http://www.acici.org/aitic/documents/Notes/note8ang.html , January 11, 2001.
15. Bangsberg, P.T., “Textile dispute impedes Hong-Kong export growth,” the Journal of Commerce, February 3, 1997, p.5A.
16. Green, Paule L., “Customs puts 63 more firms on violation list,” the Journal of Commerce, November 12, 1998, p.3A.
17. Roth, Martin S. and Jean B. Romeo, “Matching product category and country image perceptions: A framework for managing country-of-origin effects,” Journal of International Business Studies, Third Quarter 1992, pp.177-197.
18. Neville, Peterson, and Williams, “Meeting of the trade minds: Discussing the country-of-origin marking travesty,” The Journal of Commerce, July 30, 1997, p.13C.
19. Weiser, Steven S. and Arthur W. Bodek, “Which came first, the chicks hatched in England or the South African ostrich eggs?” the Journal of Commerce, August 19, 1998, p.11C.
20. Jehl, Douglas, “Whose lingerie is it? A new Mid-east secret,” The New York Times, December 25, 1996, p.6.
21. Tagliabue, John, “Italian silk makers upset by new U.S. trade law,” The New York Times, April 10,1997.
22. Lawrence, Richard, “US, EU smooth over differences on country-of-origin regulations,” The Journal of Commerce, April 15, 1998, p.4A.
23. Harmonized Tariff schedule of the United States (2001), United States International Trade Commission Publication 3249, United States Government Printing office, Washington, DC 20402. Also available at http://www.customs.gov, January 18, 2001.
24. Country Commercial Guide: Switzerland, Fiscal Year 2000, U.S. & Foreign Commercial Service and U.S. Department of State, July 1999, http://www.statusa.gov , January 11,2001.
25. Gillis, Chris, “WCO pushes for customs automation,” American shipper, March 2002, p.12.
26. Lucentini, Jack, “Agency takes importer to count for allegedly overvaluing goods,” The Journal of Commerce, October 15,1999, p.1.
27. Lucentini, Jack, “July exonerates importer who overstated value,” The Journal of Commerce, October 20, 1999, p.17.
28. Lawrence, Richard, “A new look at laws against unfairly priced imports,” The Journal of Commerce, April 15, 1998, p.1C.
29. Adam, Chris, “Ailing steel industry launches a battle against imports,” The Wall Street Journal, October 1, 1998.
30. Neville, Peterson, and Williams, “Stealth taxes: Importers slammed with anti-dumping duty without warning,” The Journal of Commerce, September 23, 1998, p.12C.
31.Vardi, Nathan, “Nutty trade,” Forbes, October 16, 2000, p.60
32. Philips, Michael M., “U.S. plans punitive tariffs in dispute with EU,” The Wall Street Journal, December 22, 1998, p.A2.
33. Helmer, John, “Russia imposes tax on border traffic,” The Journal of Commerce, January 27, 1997, p.3A.
34. Lucentini, Jack, “Clinton, in pro-trade move, ends tariffs on brooms,” The Journal of Commerce, December 8, 1998, p.3A
35. U.S. Customs Service Textile Status Report: China, U.S. Customs Service, http://www.customs.gov/quotas/2000/cntxtpt.htm, January 22, 2001.
36. Magnier, Mark, “Emerging nations wack US, others over protectionism,” The Journal of Commerce, May 14. 1997, p.3A
37. General Quota Information, U.S. Customs service, http://www.customs.gov/imp-exp2/pubform/import/special.htm, January 22, 2001
38. Thornton, Emily, “The Japan that says no to cold pills,” Business Week, May 19, 1997.
39.Dibenedetto, William, “Mexico says yes to US cherries,” The Journal of Commerce, February 12, 1997
40. Hall, Kevin G., “Mexico avocadoes gain access to US,” The Journal of Commerce, November 7, 1997, p.3A
41. Shorrock, Tim, “US to investigate Japanese barriers to fruit imports,” The Journal of Commerce, October 17, 1997, p.9A
42. Andrews, Edmund L., “WTO overrules Europe’s ban on U.S. hormone-treated beef,” The New York Times, May 9, 1997
43. Linn, Gene, “US renews attack on Asian barriers to food exports,” The Journal of Commerce, April 23, 1998, p.1A
44. Weinstein, Michael M., “Banana spat could have serious consequences for world trade,” The New York Times, December 29, 1998
45. Sanger, David E, “Clinton fires first shot in the Banana War,” The New York Times, December 22, 1998
46. Zaroscostas, John, “EU officials reject plan to ease banana gridlock,” The Journal of Commerce, January 27, 1997, p.3A
47. DePalma, Anthony, “Chiquita sues Europeans, citing banana-quota losses,” The New York Times, January 26, 2001
48. DePalma, Anthony, “U.S. and Europeans agree on deal to end banana trade war,” The New York Times, April 12, 2001
49. “The second battle of Poitiers,” Time, December 6, 1982, p.31
50. Greenberger, Robert S., “Some Asian trade barriers likely to fall,” The Wall Street Journal, April 10, 1998, p.A2
51. Rao, N. Vasuki, “India to introduce EDI to Cut paperwork,” The Journal of Commerce, November 24, 1998, p.3A
52. Wright, Gregory, “South Korea agrees to open market to US vehicles, easing threat of sanction,” The Journal of Commerce, October 22, 1998, p.2A
53. Schuan, Michael, “South Korea acts to discourage imports,” The Wall Street Journal, March 7, 1997, p.A8
54. Banerjee, Neela and Helene Cooper, “Are Russians playing a game of chicken with . . . chickens?” The Wall Street Journal, March 18, 1996
55. Borsuk, Richard, “Changing of the port guards: Some importers fear a return to corruption,” Asian Wall Street Journal, April 7, 1997, p.14.
56. Fisher, Donald L., “Prompt, accurate marking can often help to avoid liquidated damage claims,” The Journal of Commerce, July 22, 1998, p.2C
57. Information Compliance, United States Customs Service, http://www.customs.gov/imp-exp2/pubform/import/comply.htm , October 22, 1999
58. JBC International, “CAT tales: All the way from ‘gotcha’ to ‘informed compliance,’ and back again,” The Journal of Commerce, April 22, 1998, p.11C
59. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “Reasonable care is vital for trade arena under Mod Act,” The Journal of Commerce, January 29, 1999, p.6A
60. Freudmann, Aviva, “Customs in Europe hopes to cyber-melt paper blizzard,” The Journal of Commerce, January 29, 1999, p.1A
61. Baish, Peter, “The ACE: A good beginning,” American Shipper, March 2002, p.75.
62. Freudmann, Aviva, “WTO explores ways to ease cargo delays at borders,” The Journal of Commerce, October 13, 1998, p.1A
63. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “Customs uniformity urged,” The Journal of Commerce, September 23, 1998, p.1B
64. Freudmann, Aviva, “Britain seeks other ‘prototype’ partners,” The Journal of Commerce, May 1, 2000, p.1
65. Gills, Chris, “WCO pushes for customs automation,” American Shipper, March 2002, p.12.
66. Mongelluzzo, Bill, “Customs seeks a consensus,” JoC Week, June 12-18, 2000 , p.37
67. Marking, U.S. Customs Service, http://www.customs.gov/imp-exp2/pubform/import/marking.htm, October 21, 1999.
68. Fisher, Donald L., “Prompt, accurate marking can often help to avoid liquidated damage claims,” The Journal of Commerce, July 22, 1998, p.2C
69. Hershey, Robert D, Jr., “F.T.C. drops plans to relax ‘made in U.S.A.’ standard,” The New York Times, December 2, 1997
70. Green, Paula, “Visa requirements on US textiles to end Jan.1,” The Journal of Commerce, October 9, 1998, p.3A
71. Imbriani, Robert, “Drawback: Learn the rules to earn the refund,” Transportation and Distribution, December 1998, p.8
72. Weiser, Steven S. and Ari L. Kaplan, “Unused merchandise drawback offers distinct benefits for importers, exporters,” The Journal of Commerce, May 27, 1998, p.11C
73. Imbriani, Robert, “Drawback: Learn the rules to earn the refund,” Transportation and Distribution, December 1998, p.8
74. Index of Free Zones Worldwide, EscapeAritist.com, http://www.escapeartist.com/ftz/ftz_index.html , November 7, 2002
75. Foreign Trade Zones: U.S. Customs Procedures and Requirements, http://www.customs.gov/imp-exp2/comm-imp/ftz/brochure.htm , November 7, 2002
Chapter14
International Logistics Infrastructure
Outline
14-1 Definitions 14-3 Communication Infrastructure
14-2 Transportation Infrastructure 14-3a Mail Services
14-2a Port Infrastructure 14-3b Telecommunications Services
14-2b Canals and Waterways 14-4 Utilities Infrastructure
Infrastructure 14-4a Electricity
14-2c Airport Infrastructure 14-4b Water and Sewer
14-2d Rail Infrastructure 14-4c Energy Pipelines
14-2e Road Infrastructure End-of-Chapter Questions
14-2f Warehousing Infrastructure Endnotes
For the manager of international logistics, it is important to have a good understanding of the challenges presented by the different levels of infrastructure found abroad. It is always one of the first problems encountered by an international manager; things don't work abroad like they do at "home." There are different standards, there are different expectations of performance, there are things that work much better, and there are things that do not work as well- in some cases, not at all. Adapting to those differences, and anticipating problems before they
arise, are part of the assets of an experienced international logistics manager.
The issue with learning how to manage these differences in infrastructure is that they are difficult to generalize in one particular comment or statement. Most challenges tend to be concentrated in some small geographic areas, and in most cases are limited to a single location: a specific port is not equipped with an appropriate crane, for example, or a specific tunnel has recently been closed. These challenges force the manager involved in international logistics to recognize the possibility of serious problems. The purpose of this chapter is to present enough information and examples to encourage him or her to ask questions at the onset of a transaction, so that there are no discrepancies between the expectations of the company and what can be achieved.
14-1 Definitions
Before going much further, it would be useful to determine what is meant by "infrastructure" in the context of international logistics. A couple of dictionary definitions would be a good start:
The basic facilities, services, and installations needed for the functioning of a community or society, such as transportation and communication.
A collective term for the subordinate parts of an undertaking; substructure, foundation.
The permanent installations forming a basis for military operations, as airfields, naval bases, training establishments,.., etc.
In the field of logistics, the definition can be very broad: infrastructure is a c01lective term that refers to all of the elements in place (publicly or privately owned goods) to facilitate transportation, communication, and business exchanges. It would therefore include not only transportation and communication elements,but also the existence and quality of public utilities, banking services, and retail distribution channels. To this list, it makes sense to add the existence and quality of the Court system, the defense of intellectual property rights, and the existence of standards. As these concepts are introduced in this chapter, their inclusion into the concept of infrastructure will become more acceptable.
The study of infrastructure is important because the movement of goods and
of documents, as well as the movement of money and information, is dependent
on these infrastructure components.
14-2a Port Infrastructure
Port infrastructure is made up of several items, most of which are interconnected and obviously affect the type of ships that can call on a given port, as well as the type of merchandise that can transit through it.
With the advent of the much larger post-Panamax containerships, ports have been faced with many challenges. Specifically, the size of those ships is stretching the capabilities of the ports: they are wider, longer, higher above the the water, and have a much deeper draft.
Depth of Water
The first issue is undoubtedly the depth of the water. In many ports, the depth of the channels and of the berths is not sufficient to accommodate such large ships. Therefore, in a great number of ports, the port authorities have had engage in dredging activities in order to allow ships with drafts exceeding forty feet (13.5 meters) to access the port.3,4 Only a few ports with naturally deep channels have been exempt from this activity.
This dredging of channels and ports can be exceedingly expensive, but ports have little alternative but to undertake this improvement of their capabilities. Competition is such that ships would call on a different port if one were not expanding.
In a parallel fashion, longer ships require longer turning circles, and therefore a redesign and dredging of different access channels. As ships become yet longer, wider and heavier, the challenge for the ports will be to keep up with these ships' requirements and adapt.
Cranes
Ports have found out that the width of those post-Panamax ships can also be a challenge for their cranes. Traditional Panamax ships can load up to thirteen containers in the width of a ship (see Figure 14-1). Some of the post-Panamax ships can load sixteen or more containers side-by-side. This presents a problem for ports in which the cranes cannot reach. One alternative is to load the ship from one side, turn the ship around, and then load the rest of the container. The problem is one of balance, as the ship will seriously list if it is heavier on one side.
Another obvious alternative is for ports to increase the reach of the cranes.This modification is also accompanied by a need to increase the height of the cranes,as the vessels are higher. These modification can be quite costly for a port and new cranes capable of serving these ships can cost $50 million.6
Another alternative, chosen by the stevedoring company Ceres at the Port of Amsterdam’s Paragon Terminal, is to allow the ship to be loaded from both sides (see Figure 14-2).An advantage of this configuration is that it allows the ship to be loaded with up to twelve cranes-rather than the maximum of six in a traditional port. This alternative speeds up the loading of the ship considerably, from 160 containers per hour (the world record held by the Port of Singapore ) to up to 300 containers per hour, increasing the profitablility of the ship.
For shippers handling non-contaierized cargo, the cranes’ capacity is a major factor in deciding through which port to send a specific cargo. Cigna Insurance publishes a directory called Ports of the World that lists the equiment of any port in the world, specifically the capacity of its cranes (see Figure 14-7).8It should be obvious that the crane at the port of destination should have at least the same capacity as the one that was used to load the cargo. Failure to pay attention to that fact is likely to lead to a dismantling of the cargo or to an overloaded crane, which could place the cargo in jeopardy.
Bridge Clearance
Another factor of great importance in ports is the clearance under its bridges. In many older ports, such as New York-New Jersey, the bridegs are too close to the water, leaving very litter clearance for tall ships or ships for which the cargo is outsized. In some cases, the cargo has to be partially dismantled or repositioned, or the ship lowered with ballast water and the delivery made at low tide so that it clears the bridge span.9
All of these factors (depth of channels and berths, crane capacities, and bridge clearance) are likely to affect how ports are used in the future. There is a strong likehood that all ports will not be able to accommodate the largest ships and that there will be the creation of large port hubs, to and from which mega-containerships will travel. Smaller ports would then be served by smaller “feeder” ships that would not tax the ports’ infrastructure beyond their capacity.10Such ports have already been created in the Mediterranean Sea: Marsaxlokk, in Malta, and Cagliari, in Sardinia (Italy) serve as trans-shipment ports, loading and unloading large containerships in a deep-water port and using feeder services to serve the local markets of France, Italy, and Spain.11
Port Operations
Another issue in ports is the way the port is managed, particularly its work rules, which are often dictated by strong unions. Some ports, such as the Port of Long Beach on the Pacific Coast of the United States, only operate eight hours a day12 instead of the much more efficient twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week of most Asian Pacific Rim ports. Work rules can also be mind-boggingly complex and hamper the efficiency of ports to the point where they are less and less competitive:13In the 1950s,unions dominating the ports of South America were refusing to unload containers,14for example.When there are attempts at modifying these rules,strikes are common:some Japanese and European ports are plagued with recurring work stoppages.
Warehousing Space
Finally, it is critical to understand the amount of warehouse storage space that exists in the port. In most instances, it is necessary for merchandise to be placed in some storage areas that are protected from the elements (specifically rain and sun).If these storage areas are not available or are overcrowed, then it’s likely that cargo will be left exposed, leading to possible damages. Cigna’s Ports of the World lists the amount of covered storage space available in every port (see Figure 14-7).
Even if the cargo can tolerate being left exposed to the elements, another concern is the possibility of flooding in the container―or cargo―staging area. It is not unusual, when bad weather strikes, to see a port’s container yard flooded, and the containers at the bottom of a stack partially immersed, even in a modern port.
For shippers involved with refrigerated cargo, those issues are compounded with the need for reliable reefer storage areas, equipped with power outlets and personnel competent enough to monitor the temperature charts of the refrigerated containers.
Connections with Land-Based Transportation Serices
Yet another issue in a port is its connections to the remainder of the country’s transport infrastructure, such as rail and road access. In some cases, there is so much congestion in the access roads to port terminals that cargo can be delayed substantially; such is the case in many ports in South America16,17 and in China18.The choice of a port is therefore also subject to a good connection to the remainder of the network.
14-2b Canals and Waterways Infrastructure
Maritime transportation is also quite depenent on the existence and proper maintenance of canals and other maritime channels. Their size, as well as the size of their locks, has a great influence on international trade. For example, ships sized to get through the Suez Canal are called Sue-Max ships, and those sized to get through the Panama Canal are called Panamax ships. The current trend in shipbuilding is to create ships that are too large to fit through the Panama Canal, which are dubbed post-Panamax.
From an international logistics standpoint, several waterways are fundamentally and strategically important. However, these waterways have lost their monopoly, as alternatives had to be developed to circumvent their shortcomings.
The Panama Canal
The Panama Canal was started in 1882 under the leadership of Ferdinand de Lesseps, the Frenchman who had built the Suez Canal. After many setbacks, the French abandoned the project and the Canal was finally dug by the United States under the leadership of President Teddy Roosevelt: it opened in 1914.On December 31,1999,after almost a century of United States’ management, the Canal’s ownership was turned over to the Panamanian government.
The Canal was a massive undertaking, necessitating the construction of a dam, which created the largest artificial lake in the world at the time and provided water to six enormous locks that raise or lower ships eighty-five feet (twenty-six meters).The Canal is at least 300 feet wide (91 m),and allows ships with forty feet (12 m) of draft.
Transit times are approximately one day, as ships moved slowly from one ocean to the other. The ships never negotiate the locks under their own power; they are handled by electric locomotives, called “mules”.
In the years before the handover to Panama, the Canal started a massive plan of renovation and expansion. It scrapped most of the mechanical devices that opened and closed the locks and replaced them with hydraulic systems and adapted a computerized traffic management system.19It expanded its watershed to increase its capacity. As ships move through the canal, the locks that they traverse use an inordinate amount of fresh water20.The Canal is currently using its reserve of fresh water-the Gatun Lake-to its maximum capacity. Several widening and deepening projects have also been undertaken, in order to increase the Canal’s throughput. Further expansion, including a new retaining lake and wider, longer locks, are in the works,21and they are expected to boost the Canal’s capacity by 40 percent.
In 2001,the Canal handled upwards of 13,500 transits a year, representing almost 200,000 tons of cargo, and the Panama Canal Authority collected US $579 million in tolls.22
· The Bosporus Strait in Turkey: Joining the Black Sea to the Mediterranean Sea, it is the only water link between the Black Sea and the oceans. A large percentage of the merchandise trade between Russia and the rest of the world transits through it, creating severe congestion and raising safety concerns for the city of Istanbul, which is built on both sides of the Strait. Several efforts have been made to convert some of that traffic to a network of pipelines.23
· The Suez Canal: It allows ships to avoid traveling around the entire continent of Africa. When it was closed after the Six-Day War in 1967,oil companies started to build much larger oil tankers, to make the voyage around the Cape (South Africa ) more cost-effective. Since its reopening in 1975,the Canal has recaptured some of the traffic it had lost, through a widening and deepening effort. However, the canal is still too shallow, and its tolls are prohibitive. The cost of a round trip through the Canal can reach US $500,000.24
· The Panama Canal: It allows ships to avoid traveling around South America. However, the Canal is remarkably “slow”, as ships can only travel in one direction at a time, and as it is increasingly running at its maximum capacity. Wait times to enter the Canal average twenty-two hours25.Despite the emergence of land bridges (see Section 14-2d) in the United States, and the emergence of post-Panamax ships, the Canal still retains its commercial importance.
· The Saint Lawrence Seaway: It links the Great lakes to the St.Lawrence River and the Atlantic Ocean. Unfortunately, the Seaway is narrow and few ships can pass through its locks. It is also plagued by ice, and closes from January to March. This has forced companies to find alternative means of transportation, and the traffic through the Seaway is down 45 percent from what it was twenty years ago.26
· The absence of certain waterways is also critical: for example, there has been considerable talk about a canal through Nicaragua that would be “parallel” to the Panama Canal and free of locks, which would speed up the transit time considerably.27A railroad “land bridge” was once proposed for the same region. A canal through the Isthmus of Kra in Thailand—the Malay Peninsula—which would bypass the Strait of Malacca and the Port of Singapore would speed up the transit time between Europe and the Far East as well.28
· The same lack of infrastructure is found in fresh water passages. Since the War in the Balkans, there has been no fresh water communication between the Black Sea and Northern Europe, as many bridges were demolished on the Danube River29 and barges cannot pass. There is still no fresh water communication between the Mediterranean Sea and Northern Europe, as the construction of a canal between the Rhone River and the Rhine River is still being debated.30
14-2c Airport Infrastructure
Airports are also a fundamental part of the transportation infrastructure . There are fewer critical issues in the management of an international airport than there are in a port, but they can be just as constraining.
Runways
The runways of an airport determine the type of aircraft that can serve this location. The lengths of the runways are particularly relevant, as they generally determine whether the airport can support direct flights to far-away places. Many airports in the world cannot accommodate the large jumbo jets that serve international destinations because the runways were designed mostly for smaller aircraft. As the cities around the airports grew, they became land-locked, unable to extend their runways. Several cities have had to build airports far from their city centers, in order to build facilities that can accommodate international flights. Whereas Charles de Gaulle Airport in Paris, France, and Heathrow Airport in London, UK (both built in the 1970s) are about fifteen miles (twenty-five kilometers) from the cities they serve, the airports built in the 1990s are much further away: Denver International is twenty-three miles (thirty-seven kilometers) from the city and Malpensa in Milan, Italy, is thirty miles (forty-eight kilometers) away.
A second concern is the number of runways, which determines the capacity of the airport. Most airports have more than one runway, but the busiest airport-in number of passengers-in the world has four (Hatfield Airport in Atlanta, USA),and both Chicago O’Hare and Dallas-Fort Worth International have seven. An airport can be quite constrained by its lack of runways; for years, Narita Airport in Tokyo had only one runway to accommodate its traffic. It was stretched to capacity, and there was no way to build a second runway as a number of small farmers refused to sell their land to the airport.32Since the Japanese government cannot expropriate them, the airport cannot build the runway of flights in and out of Narita is limited, increasing the landing fees. Narita has finished a second runway that avoids the reluctant farmers’ land, but it is too short to accommodate jumbo jets, which constitute 90 percent of the Narita traffic, so it is only used for local traffic.
A single runway also increases the probability of delays as the slightest accident or malfunction will immobilize the entire airport.
K
ai-Tak Airport in HongKong was one of the most unusual airports in the world. As the airplanes landed, they flew a few hundred feet away from the high rises and the hills that surrounded the airport(see Figure 14-3). It was an uncomfortable experience many passengers.
In 1998,its replacement, Chek Lap Kok Airport, opened. Dubbed the most expensive construction project in the world at US $20 billion the Chunnel cost "only" $15 billion--it is an artificial island on the outskirts of the city, with its own dedicated tunnel, its own suspension bridge, its own commuter railroad,
and the largest cargo facility in the world. It operates twenty-four hours a day, a boon for cargo shippers
involved in the South-East Asian market, since Kai-Tak closed at night.
In addition to the challenges of building such a large infrastructure, the "transfer" from one airport to the other was attempted in one night. As Kai-Tak closed at midnight on july 5tb, 1998, all Of its equipment was moved to Chek Lap Kok with 10,000 vehicle trips, seventy barge voyages, and thirty flights, and the new airport opened on july 6th,at 6:30A.M. Unfortunately, it did not happen as smoothly as expected, and the first couple of weeks were hectic, especially for cargo.
Figure 14-3
The Approach at Kai-Tak Airport in Hong Kong
Neverthlwss,the new airport has become one of the busiest airports in the world.
Hours of Operation
Another concern of importance is the time frame during which airports are operating. Since most airports are geographically close to large cities, their hours of operations are generally limited by noise constrains and they operate only during “day hours”. Since cargo tends to fly at night, specialized cargo airport that are located outside of large cities and can operate twenty-four hours a day ,seven days a week, have started to emerge such as prestwick in Scotand, Hahn in Germany, and Chateauroux in France. To some extent, the development mirrors that of the Memphis airport, which has become the largest cargo airport in the world, with 2.4 million tons of freight in 1999, even though it is not located in a large metropolitan center.
Warehousing Space
Another concern of importance for cargo shippers is the existence of appropriate warehouse space at an airport; cargo should be protected while it is in transit, arid not left to the elements. This is particularly important as air cargo tends to be--erroneously--not as well packaged as cargo destined for ocean shipping.
The problem is even more acute for refrigerated warehouse space, which can be in very short supply.
14-2d Rail Infrastructure
Another element of the transportation infrastructure of a country is its railroad network. In the eighteenth and early nineteenth century, railroads became the most important means of long-distance land transportation. In Europe, in the United States, in India, in Africa, and in Asia, a dense network of railroads was built, sometimes under the impetus of colonizing forces who wanted to move troops around quickly. This historical development led to some decisions that, a century and a half later, are causing significant problems. To prevent possible invaders from using their railroad infrastructures, Spain and Russia developed railroad gauges (the width between the rails) that were incompatible with the rest of Europe. While it did prevent military troops from using the network, this decision is still causing trouble for any type of rail transportation between these countries and their neighbors.
Most countries have updated their railroad infrastructure as their economies grew. However, in a few countries, the economy has grown much faster and the infrastructure has not been able to keep pace. Such is the case in China, where demand far outstrips supply in terms of rail transportation. China's network satisfies only 60 percent of current demand. The Chinese government has pledged to develop further links, which will be vital to connect the port cities of the South-east to inland cities. Such rail links are critical when the road infrastructure is not yet fully developed.
Over the years, though, as roads and trucks improved, many countries' railroads gradually lost their focus on shipping merchandise and shifted their efforts to high-speed passenger transportation; such is the case of Europe, where most merchandise is shipped by means other than railroad, but where inter-city rail passenger transportation is commonplace, convenient, fast, and competes with airlines over small distances, The best examples are the French (now European) Trains a Grande Vitesse (TGV), that connect Paris to London in three hours (dubbed the Eurostar) and Paris to Brussels in an hour and a half(the Thalys).There is only one TGV dedicated to merchandise transport, and it is used by the French Postal Service ("La Poste"): employees sort the mail on board (see Figure 14-4). A similar switch from merchandise to high-speed passenger transport occurred in Japan; the Shinkansen train covers the 192 kilometers (120 miles) between Hiroshima and Kokura in less than forty-five minutes, for example. It runs on a dedicated high-speed track.
Multi-Modal Emphasis
In the last two decades, three factors have contributed to the renewal of merchandise traffic on railroads: the congestion of roads has worsened, concerns about pollution and noise have increased, and the creation of the multi, modal container has eliminated the need to load and unload merchandise from the traditional box cars.
In the United States, railroads have invested heavily in the modernization of their rolling stock; they- have shifted from boxcars topiggy-back cars-allowing them to carry truck trailers---and to container cars. At the same time, they have improved their infrastructure by increasing the height clearances in tunnds and other areas, allowing trains to transport containers "double-stacked" (i.e., twice as many containers as a single-stack train would). Figures 11-8 and 1I-9 illustrate these concepts. American trains tend to be exceedingly long, with at least one hundred cars, allowing a crew of a few individuals to move in excess of two hundred containers or truck trailers, making them particularly cost attractive. In addition, since passenger raft transport is almost nonexistent in the United States--with the minor exception of the Northeastern part of the country---cargo trains have priority on the network and tend to be relatively fast.
Unfortunately, such improvements have not yet been made to the European infrastructure, which still consists mostly of aging boxcars .~~ Moreover, the emphasis on passenger transportation gives priority to passenger trains, and relegates cargo trains to second-class status, making them slow and inefficient cargo movers. Attempts to create high-speed cargo railroad links from ports in Northern Europe to ports in the Mediterranean have been made , but politics and administrative delays are unlikely to make this corridor a reality for some years.
In the same fashion, the success of North American railroads has enticed several developments in Asia. There are plans to significantly modernize the trans-Siberian railroad, which would allow cargo to be shipped from Asia (Vladivostok)to Europe by rail. There are also plans to create a Trans-Asian railroad, which would connect Singapore and Seoul to Europe via Turkey. However, the obstacles that remain to such a venture are substantial, and its completion is far from certain.
Land Bridges
A consequence of the increased efficiency of the railroads in the United States has been the creation of land bridges. The concept of a land bridge is based on the idea that containerized ocean cargo needs to "cross" some landmass; for example, cargo from South-East Asia needs to cross North America on its way to Europe. One alternative is to take the Panama Canal; however, it is a fairly long voyage south in the Pacific to reach Balboa, and a fairly long voyage north in the Atlantic onto Europe. Another alternative is to take the cargo around India and through the Suez Canal, which is inconvenient and expensive.
The best alternative is to cross North America on a land bridge; the cargo is unloaded from a large containership somewhere on the West Coast of the United States or Canada, and shipped by double-stack train to the East Coast. The journey is faster and cheaper than by ocean. In addition, it allows shipping lines to use post-Panamax ships on their trans-Pacific and trans-Adantic routes, which is also more efficient. A consequence of this trend is that cargo going from Taipei to Barcelona is going to transit through Chicago, something that is unknown to most shippers.
14-2e Road Infrastructure
In addition to the infrastructure of ports, airports, and railroads, a great amount of shipping moves by road, especially on the last "leg" of the journey, from the port, airport, or rail terminal to its final destination.
The road infrastructure of a country is evaluated somewhat differently than the rest of its transportation infrastructure. In no country is there a shortage of roads, for example; however, there certainly are issues regarding the quality and maintenance of the network, its congestion, as well as the existence of high-speed links between major metropolitan areas. The concern therefore is not one of density, but one of usability.
Quality
The road infrastructure of a country is generally described in documents such as the U.S. Department of Commerce's Country Commercial Guides or the CIA"s World Factbook in terms of total miles of road, and of the percentage of these roads that are paved. For example, the country of Argentina is listed as having 215,000 kilometers (134,000 miles) of roads, of which 63,500 kilometers (39,500miles) 29.5 percent are paved. Even in the United States, paved roads Only represent 90 percent of the road infrastructure.
However, this is somewhat misleading, as most of the traffic obviously utilizes paved roads, and the unpaved roads serve remote rural areas. In addition, the condition of a paved road makes a substantial difference in its usefulness; an overcrowded, two-lane highway riddled with potholes is not very conducive to the safe transportation of cargo, Such is the case with the roads in the countries of Belarus, Albania, Romania, Lithuania, and Latvia. The government of Poland estimates that 80 percent of its roads are in unsatisfactory or bad conditions; cargo shipped under such conditions has to be particularly well packaged. Unfortunately, there is no statistical source that indicates the conditions of the roads in a country, and since there are substantial variations from one region of a country to another, it is even more difficult to evaluate. China has a very good road infrastructure between
Guangzhou and Shanghai, for example, but the interior of the country is plagued with deficient and outdated roads.
Congestion of the road infrastructure is also endemic to certain cities: there are too many cars, trucks, and other vehicles on the road, and deliveries are difficult to make (see Figure 14-5). In Calcutta, India, the traffic is so congested that the average speed in the city is 5mph (8 kin/h); most people travel by rickshaw or by public transportation, rather than by car . In Delhi, the government has created a category of vehicles, called VVIP-Very Very Important Persons that are allowed to zip through traffic with blaring sirens and flashing lights In many developed countries' cities, a system of alternating days for traffic has been instituted; with odd-numbered license plates are allowed to travel on odd-numbered days. Such is the case in Lagos, Nigeria, for example. The problems compounded by the fact that resourceful Nigerians obtain from corrupt civil authorities two license plates for every vehicle, and substitute them every morning.
Although congestion is a problem that is extreme in developing countries, it is certainly also present in large metropolitan areas in Europe, Japan, and the United States. As the number of automobiles increases, the situation will worsen further and make deliveries to customers more problematic and inefficient. Many delivery firms are now using motorcycles and mopeds, which are more maneu verable in large cities.
Yet another issue in cities is the confusion that can be generated by the lack of signage and a different addressing system. While most Northern American cities have a "grid" of East-West and North-South streets, with a fairly logical numbering sequence of streets and buildings, European cities are plagued with a maze of different streets that change names at each or so it seems intersection. Mexico City has an extraordinarily confusing system of streets; there are nearly 800 streets named after Benito Ju~irez, 760 named for Miguel Hidalgo, and 300 streets renamed every year. To make things more interesting, 80,000 city blocks have no signage at all. Japan has the tradition of numbering buildings on a street in the order in which they were built, and not in a sequential order based on location. Most of Bombay's addresses are not based on street names, but defined by a succession of smaller and smaller areas: a person's address will include the name of the house, the name of the street, the name of the block, the name of the city, and the city code. In addition, there will be an East or a West, depending of which side of the railroad track the block is, with parallel structures on either side. Such systems make it challenging to deliver goods to a new customer.
To decrease the congestion in cities, countries have built a network of high-speed links that avoid smaller cities while connecting the larger ones. These limited access highways speed up considerably the transportation of goods between cities. Nevertheless, these highways are subject to a number of rules and regulations, some of which limit the size of the trucks that can travel on them and the speed at which they can travel. Since these rules vary from country to country, it can be a challenge to arrange international truck transportation of merchandise. In addition, in many countries, access to high-speed highways is limited to vehicles that pay a toll, making such roads an expensive alternative. In France, for example, the private company running the high-speed highway system charges approximately 0.20 per kilometer ( 0.32 per mile) for semi-trucks.
Civil Engineering Structures (Ouvrages d'Art)
If the country is mountainous, these high-speed thoroughfares are built with numerous bridges and tunnels designed to "eliminate" the constraints of the land scape. A perfect example of such a highway is the Italian Austostrade, which runs along the Appenine Chain and is seemingly an unending succession of tunnels and bridges. Such engineering structures are called collectively (in French) overaged' art~art structures and it is an apt moniker; unfortunately, there is no equivalent in English, so the French term will be used. The dependence of international trade on such ouvrages d'art cannot broader estimated: most natural borders are either water (oceans or lakes) or mountains at the watershed separation. To cross these natural borders, bridges or tunnels have to be built. The Chunnel the tunnel built under the English Channel, between France and Great Britain is a case in point. Until its opening in 1994, shipping goods from one country to the other was delayed by a fairly lengthy ferry voyage, which sometimes could be delayed or cancelled for bad weather. The Chunnel has substantially shortened shipping times between the two countries. Another international route that has been radically changed by ouvragesd' art is the trade between Western Europe and the Middle East, with the opening of the two suspension bridges in Istanbul, one in 1973 (Bo~,azi~;i bridge), the other in 1988 (Fatih Sultan Mehmet bridge). These are the only two bridges that allow road transportation between Europe and Asia, save for an itinerary north of the Black Sea, in Russia. To this date, there is no rail link from Southern Europe to Asia, as the Orient Express ends on the European side of Istanbul, and the Baghdad Railway starts on the Asian side. No rail link is available between the two stations.
The so-called Oresund Fixed Link between Copenhagen, Denmark and Malm6, Sweden is another example of an ouvrage d'art that has significantly altered the transportation landscape of an international border: it actually is a succession of three bridges and a tunnel, with a switchover on an artificial island in the middle of Flinte Channel (see Figure 14-6). It is the first terrestrial communication between the two countries, and it replaces a forty-five minute ferry ride with an eight-minute drive. More importantly, it is the first land link between Western Europe and the Scandinavian countries,
Some bridges are much less architecturally noticeable but no less important to the economies of the countries they link; take, for example, the United States and Canada. For a significant portion of their common border, these two countries are only "connected" by a bridge and a tunnel in Detroit, Michigan (to Windsor,Ontario), and a couple of bridges near Buffalo, New York. At least one of those bridges, the Peace Bridge between Buffalo and Fort Erie, Ontario, is used at its maximum capacity and has not been expanded since 1927.
Another example of the critical nature of bridges and other structures can be seen in the tiny island nation of Palau, where a bridge collapse between the capital city of Koror and the main island of Babelthuap created an economic nightmare. People on the main island used to commute to the capital via the bridge, which has been inadequately replaced with ferry services, Only its reconstruction will allow the country's economy to recover. The building of a bridge can also alter the character of a region; for example, Prince Edward Island is now connected to the rest of Canada by a newly built bridge, and its residents are divided on its impact on their life and economy.
Moreover, it is not just in developing countries that the failure of such infrastructures can be catastrophic: all ouvrages d'art are vulnerable. In March 1999, a deadly fire occurred in the Mont-Blanc tunnel between France and Italy, under the Alps; the tunnel was closed until April 2002. This forced trucks to use the Frejus tunnel, the only other tunnel under the Alps between France and Italy, or make a substantial detour along the Mediterranean coast, neither option being a good alternative. A fire in the Saint Gothard tunnel--the second longest road tunnel in the world, between Switzerland and Italy--forced its closure in October 2001; the tunnel reopened in December 2001 but was limited to half of its traffic capacity, as traffic was only allowed in one direction at a time, a situation that was unchanged as of April 2002.
14-2f Warehousing Infrastructure
It is evident that transportation is dependent on an infrastructure that allows the movement of goods. However, it is equally important to realize that cargo is often stationary when it "waits" for the next transportation alternative to be available. Therefore, it is important for a shipper to obtain information about the warehousing infrastructure of the locations where a shipment will be in layover.
The issues revolving around the warehousing infrastructure concern the protection of the goods when they are waiting while in transit. Will they be protected from the rain? From the sun? From possible floods? international logistics manager will attempt to determine the conditions under which the goods will be kept, and will then determine whether they are correctly packaged, or whether they need to be shipped through a different itinerary. the Cigna Insurance Company's Ports of the World booklet (see Figure 14-7) lists the warehouse space available in each port.
In many cases as well, shippers will use public warehouses (see Figure 14-8) for storage purposes, in order to deliver goods to their customers without having to resort to an international shipment. This enables the company to provide much better customer service by delivering goods with a much shorter lead time.
Unfortunately, the warehousing infrastructure of a country is difficult to evaluate, as there are no general sources of information on the availability and quality of public warehouses. Therefore, in those cases where a company is considering using a public warehouse to serve its customers, it would be best to actually plan an actual visit to the location considered, as the standards used in public warehousing management may be quite different than the ones expected.
14-3 Communication Infrastructure
In addition to the transportation infrastructure, the communication infrastructure is also of substantial importance to international logistics. The ability to communicate with customers and suppliers, either by mail, by phone, or through other electronic media, is very important to the smooth operation of an international transaction. Unfortunately, there are different expectations of service and performance in communication means from country to country.
14-3a Mail Services
The ability of the postal services to deriver mail on time and reliably should be a given in most developed countries. However, there is ample anecdotal evidence that it's not the case in all places. On many occasions, there are unacceptable delays and errors: while the European Union countries strive to deriver letters sent to a national address on the day after it is marled a so-called D+I policy and on the second day if it is international mail within the European community, this is a difficult standard to achieve. Italy, especially before its national postal service was privatised, was notoriously unreliable. France has periodical strikes of its mail service and of its national railway service, both of which can substantially delay the delivery of marl. In South Africa, the mail service has become so unreliable that businesses and individuals no longer trust it enough to send payments, forcing them to make payments m person or through banks.
Another issue is the safety of the mail: will a letter or package make it to its destmation, or will it be lost, damaged, or stolen in transit? Since postal services tend to be very large employers, it is difficult to screen all employees effectively There have been countless documented instances of postal employees stealing the contents of parcels, removing the contents of letters---especially cash, checks, and credit cards--before they reach their destination. Developing countries have an even greater problem, as public employee wages tend to be modest, and the temp tations are many.
Many firms intent on ensuring that their postal communications are safely ehvered. have switched, especially for international documents' exchanges, to private services such as DHL or FedEx. While the costs of private services tend to be much higher than the costs of the traditional postal services, these companies have gamed much market share, thanks to their reputation for greater reliability. In particular, the customers' ability to track packages and documents online has increased this perception.
Another phenomenon that has appeared fairly recently is the exploitation (arbitrage) of the differences in prices and mail categories for international mail from one country to another. A firm sending a substantial number of identical mail pieces internationally will determine in which country that particular mailing is going to cost the least amount; it will then ship the mailing materials in bulk to that country before placing the items in the marl. Commercial materials emanating from France have come to the author from Denmark, Great Britain, and the Netherlands; the lowest cost provider was probably determined by the fact that the weight of the materials being sent placed them in different price categories.
14-3b Telecommunications Services
Slightly different issues are facing telecommunication services; not only has the demand for voice telecommunication increased about 10 percent a year, but the demand for data telecommunication has essentially doubled every year for the past ten years, and shown no sign of slowing down. Some countries have been able to build a sufficiently large domestic infrastructure to carry this increased load, often by us. rag their already existing infrastructure. Many gas and oil pipelines have been given the added responsibility of transmitting data through a fiber optic line laid in their midst. Many countries, though, have not been able to keep up with such growth, and telecommunications in those countries are slow and not very reliable: Ghana, for example, has 249,000 phone lines for 20,000,000 inhabitants, or one line for every eighty persons.
This reliability is the primary concern in several countries where the economy has grown quickly; the domestic communication infrastructure did not follow. Phone service is notoriously unreliable, with phone conversations disconnected, phone calls regularly connected to wrong numbers, and dial tones all but absent. Fortunately, in some of those countries, a phenomenon known as leap frogging has taken place. Since the "old" land-based telephone infrastructure is not working properly, people have switched to cellular phones very quickly and bypass the land-based system. This switch is facilitated by the fact that many countries quickly adopted a single standard, which makes for easy portability and for increased convenience. Such is the case in places like the Czech Republic, where cellular phones now have a greater penetration rate than land-based telephones.
In China, there are almost half as many cellular phones as there are land-bastst phones, and the rate of growth in cellular phones far
surpasses that of the traditional technology.
On the international side, telecommunications are heavily dependent on a network of underwater cables that run across the Atlantic, the Pacific., the Mediterranean Sea, or other large bodies of water. As telecommunication traffic has increased, the capacity of these cables has also increased dramatically. Altogether, though, there are very few cables (only seven cross the Northern Atlantic), and their vulnerability is extraordinary. Although they are buried on the portion of their route that is located in shallow water, they are for the most part simply laid on the floor of the oceans, at the risk of being snagged by fishermen's nets and boat anchors. When these cables cross land, they are just as vulnerable and at the mercy of a careless backhoe operator or other accident. Whenever they are snagged or damaged, traffic on that cable seizes until it is repaired. In an outstanding article in Wired magazine, Neat Stephenson followed the construction of the FLAG--Fiber-optic Link Around the Globe--and reported on the vulnerability of this network: for example, five of the major worldwide cables are routed through a single building in Alexandria, Egypt.
Satellite telecommunications are no less dependent on a limited number of alternatives and therefore just as vulnerable; since satellites are increasingly heavily used for communications such as television programs, their capacity is entirely used, and the failure of a single satellite can wreck havoc on telecommunications. Such was the case when PanAmSat's Galaxy V failed in May 1998.
Other telecommunication infrastructures are vulnerable; the Internet, although touted as "robust," is still very dependent on so-called "root-servers" that keep the list of addresses on the Net. In the summer of 1997, Root Server located in Hernston, Virginia, the mother of all root-servers, "lost" its master list. Internet traffic was disrupted worldwide for several hours.
14-4 Utilities Infrastructure
Another area of concern for the manager involved in international logistics is the utilities infrastructure. While it is generally taken for granted that all utilities—electricity, water, sewage, gas—are available in most countries, experience shows that there is often a shortage of one or more of these commodities in many countries, including developed countries. And while utilities are not directly an issue in transportation, they can become critically important when a company is considering operating a warehouse or establishing a corporate office.
14-4a Electricity
The most common problem with utilities is the availability and reliability of electrical power. It is common in countries where the rate of economic growth out paces the rate of growth in electricity production to have blackouts for part of the day. Actually, the situation is endemic in sub-Sahara Africa, where there are scheduled blackouts, since the production of electricity is much lower than the demand for it; households and businesses therefore plan their days around the availability of electricity. India and China are also affected by recurring blackouts, and so is Saudi Arabia. However, this is not a phenomenon that is limited to developing countries; the availability of electricity is sometimes also disrupted to developed countries. Such was the case in California in the summer of 2001, during which there were substantial supply and demand imbalances and numerous shortages.
However, recent evidence has shown that, even though there were infrastructural shortages at the root of the problem, the speculative behavior of the Enron Corporation was mostly responsible for the wild price fluctuations that Californians experienced.
In addition to problems of production, the utilities are sometimes the victims of theft; households and businesses bypass their meters or tap directly in the grid without the "inconvenience" of a meter, preventing utilities from collecting enough to be able to invest in additional capacity. A World Bank loan to India to build additional power plants was actually made conditional on the utility getting paid for a greater percentage of its production. In Russia, an endemic problem is the theft of the electrical wires for scrap, a "business" that killed 500 thieves in 1999 and forced the Russian government to replace 15,000 miles of high-tension wires,79 without mention of the disruptions to businesses and individuals.
14-4b Water and Sewer
Water supply is also a concern in many countries in the world, leading to interruptions, rationing, and recurring water shortages. It is not uncommon for cities to ration water in the middle of a drought period, on some occasions reducing the availability of water to a few hours a day or a few days a week. As populations in cities increase, the infrastructure delivering water to the cities is often over-taxed which can lead to potentially catastrophic problems, especially in cities with aging infrastructures. For example, New York City gets most of its water from reservoirs 125 miles away, and it is delivered by two tunnels that were built in 1917 and 1937. Neither of these tunnels has ever been shut down for repairs, as the city would not be able to function without the water they deliver. A new water tunnel is currently under construction and is scheduled to start operating in 2020. Many cities have leaky pipes and lose a portion of their supply to those leaks; Manila estimates it loses half of its water production through leaks and illegal siphoning of the water.
The quality of the water is also a concern: in many cities, the water delivery infrastructure is not well protected, leaving a strong possibility of bacterial contamination, and forcing users to boil the water before they use it. This procedure is a common recommendation given by international travelers. The World Bank estimates that no more than 80 percent of the world population has "reasonable access" to clean water, defined as access to within 1 km (0.62 miles) of the house.
On the other end, the infrastructure designed to remove used water is also critical. Many countries have inadequate or overburdened sewer treatment facilities, resulting in the pollution of water tables and adjacent bodies of water, or problems with sewer back-ups at times of heavy rains, for example. While less critical than water availability to the proper operation of a warehouse or distribution center, sewer service is still important as it can be a nuisance to have employees deal with stench or frequent clean-ups. The World Bank estimates that less than 60 percent of the world population has access to adequate sanitation.
Similar observations can be made about refuse removal, a service generally provided by the municipalities, but which can be unreliable; strikes of municipal workers can take several days, during which no pick-up is conducted, resulting in a problem in the operation of any type of business.
14-4c Energy Pipelines
The infrastructure of access to energy is also of importance. As most of the easily accessible oil land gas fields near the end of their life expectancies, energy resources now come .from remote areas that are difficult to operate and from where it is difficult to ship. Building energy pipelines from those areas is a challenge, and the obstacles include the weather-the Alaskan pipeline-natural barriers, political issues, environmental challenges, and bickering between the oil companies and the governments of the countries in which they were building.
Nevertheless, the infrastructure of pipelines is growing and allows an ever greater percentage of the energy needs of the world to no longer be transported by ships, trucks, and railroads.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
End-of-Chapter Questions
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. What are the main elements of the maritime transportation infrastructure? How would the quality and dependability of the maritime transportation infrastructure affect an international shipment?
2. What are the main elements of the air transportation infrastructure? How would the quality and dependability of the air transportation infrastructure affect an international shipment?
3. What are the main elements of the land transportation and warehousing infrastructure? How would the quality and dependability of these infrastructures affect an international shipment?
4. What are the main elements of the communication and utilities infrastructure? How would the quality and dependability of these infrastructures affect an international shipment?
Endnotes
Difference in Nominal
Interest Rates
Change in Expected Spot Exchange Rate
International Fisher Effect
Chang in
Expected Spot Exchange Rate
Difference in Nominal
Interest Rates
Forecasted Difference in Inflation Rates
International Fisher Effect
Fisher Effect
Interest Rate Parity
Purchasing Power Parity
Unbiased Predictor
Forward
Exchange Rate Discount/Premium
Difference in Nominal
Interest Rates
Forecasted Difference in Inflation Rates
International Fisher Effect
Fisher Effect
Interest Rate Parity
Purchasing Power Parity
Unbiased Predictor
Forward
Exchange Rate Discount/Premium
Change in Expected Spot Exchange Rate
Difference in Nominal
Interest Rates
Forecasted Difference in Inflation Rates
International Fisher Effect
Fisher Effect
Interest Rate Parity
Purchasing Power Parity
Unbiased Predictor
Forward
Exchange Rate Discount/Premium
Change in Expected Spot Exchange Rate
� 本电子版教材主要由物流041-3班与部分Logeam成员根据Piere David《International logistics》录入编撰而成,仅供南京财经大学内部教学用。
Incoterm: An International Commerce Term, or a formalized international Term of Trade, which specifies the responsibilities of the importer in an international transaction. It is advisable to specify “Incoterms 2000” when negotiating an international sale, so as to avoid possible confusion with earlier versions of Incoterms.
(Variant: A modification to one of the Incoterms codified by the International Chamber of Commerce. Variants are generally used to further clarify the responsibilities of the exporter and of the importer in a given transaction.
(stevedore: A company or a person whose responsibility is to load and unload ships in a port.
(Ship’s rail : The edge of the ship; an imaginary rail that circles the entire hull of a ship. Should a cargo item fall from the crane onto the ship while it is being loaded, the determination of whose responsibility it is hinges on which side of the ship’s rail it falls on.
�“ Restrictive laws and regulations,” International Union of Marine Insurance, as quoted by the American Institute of Marine Underwrites � HYPERLINK "Http://www.aimu.org/brochures,October" ��Http://www.aimu.org/brochures,October� 3,2000
� Ramberg, Jan, ICC Guide to Incoterms 2000, 1999, International Chamber of Commerce Publication No.620, ICC Publishing S.A., 38 Cours Albert ler, 75008 Paris, France and ICC Publishing, Inc., 156 Fifth Avenue, Suite 417, New York, NY 10010, USA.
(country risk or political risk The probability of not getting paid by a certain creditor, because the creditor’s country does not have the funds to pay the debt (insufficient foreign exchange reserves) or because the creditor is not legally allowed to pay the debt (political embargo). Political risk can also mean the probability of nationalization of a firm’s subsidiary by the host country.
(commercial risk The probability of not getting paid by a certain creditor, because this creditor does not have the funds to pay the debt or because the creditor refuses to pay the debt.
(exposure The relative consequences of a particular risk for an exporter; the risk of a $50,000 loss would represent a greater exposure for a small exporter than for a large exporter.
(credit insurance An insurance policy under which commercial risk is covered; in exchange for a premium paid by the exporter, the insurance company will bear the risk of non-payment by the importer, deducting a slight percentage of the receivable. Credit insurance does not cover political risks.
(international factoring A means of financing international receivable accounts. The firm can ask a factoring company to advance funds on a receivable account; the factoring firm can provide the funds with recourse, where the owner of the account receivable is still responsible for collecting it, or without recourse, where the collection responsibility shifts to the factoring house.
(issuing bank The bank providing the Letter of Credit to the importer. It is that bank that, should the importer be unable to pay, and should the exporter provide all the necessary documents, has the contractual obligation to pay the beneficiary.
Beneficiary The firm named in a Letter of Credit as the firm to whom the bank is insuring payment if the importer does not pay. Usually, the beneficiary of a Letter of Credit is the exporter.
applicant The firm asking the Issuing Bank for a Letter of Credit. Usually, the applicant is the importer.
advising bank In a Letter of Credit transaction, the bank that determines whether the Issuing Bank is a legitimate bank, and whether the terms of the Letter of Credit offered by the issuing bank on behalf of the importer are appropriate. Generally, the Advising Bank is the exporter’s regular bank, but in some cases, the exporter’s bank will delegate this role to another bank which is more experienced in international trade.
confirmed letter of credit A payment alternative in which the exporter asks a bank to provide an additional level of payment security to a Letter of Credit: should the importer not pay and should the Issuing Bank not pay, the Confirming Bank will pay.
confirming bank The bank providing an additional level of payment security to the beneficiary of a Letter of Credit; the Confirming Bank certifies that it will pay the Letter of Credit if the importer and the Issuing Bank do not pay.
correspondent bank A foreign bank with which a domestic bank has a preferred business relationship.
discrepancy A difference between the documents required by the Letter of Credit and the documents provided by the exporter. A discrepancy can be as simple as a misspelling and as significant as a change in the invoice amount. Since Letter of Credit are documentary, any discrepancy is , in theory, a violation of the terms of the Letter of Credit and therefore invalidates it. In practice, however, 50 percent of Letters of Credit have discrepancies, which are resolved through amendments.
amendment A change to a Letter of Credit to which all parties to a Letter of Credit all parties to a Letter of Credit agree: the exporter, the importer, the Issuing Bank, and the Advising Bank. In general, amendments are only made if there are discrepancies, as every amendment costs the exporter and importer money.
stand-by letter of credit A type of Letter of Credit that covers more than one shipment; for example, a large transaction would normally necessitate a Letter of Credit for each shipment, since a separate bill of lading is generated for each shipment. A Stand-By Letter of Credit allows for multiple bills of lading, issued on different dates.
bill of exchange In a Documentary Collection transaction, another term for a draft.
remitting bank In a Documentary Collection transaction, the bank that interacts with the exporter and with the Presenting Bank in the importing country. The Remitting Bank is the one that receives the documents from the exporter and then sends them to the Presenting Bank.
presenting bank In a Documentary Collection transaction, the bank that interacts with the importer on behalf of the exporter. The Presenting Bank is the one receiving the documents from the exporter or from the Remitting Bank and that holds them until the importer either signs a draft or pays the exporter.
drawee In a Documentary Collection transaction, another term for the importer who signs the draft.
time draft In a Documentary Collection transaction, a time draft is a promissory note that the importer has to pay a number of days (30,60,90,or 180 days) after it accepts the draft by signing it.
date draft In a Documentary Collection transaction, a date draft is a promissory note that the importer has to pay a number of days (30,60,90,or 180 days) after the exporter ships the goods.
protest In a Documentary Collection transaction, if the drawee (importer) does not pay a draft that it has signed, the Presenting Bank will file a protest, a legal document that notifies other parties that the drawee is not honoring its debts. In many countries, the filing of a protest effectively cuts the drawee’s ability to have access to any credit.
instruction letter A document sent by the exporter to the Presenting Bank where it spells out its instructions regarding how it expects the bank to handle the documents and how it expects the bank to handle an importer who does not accept the draft sent.
trade acceptance In a Documentary Collection transaction, the alternative where the exporter expects the importer to readily accept signing a draft after being notified by the Presenting Bank that the documents have arrived. The importer (trader) “accepts” the draft.
banker’s acceptance In a Documentary Collection transaction, the alternative where the exporter is not certain the importer will readily accept signing a draft after being notified by the Presenting Bank that the Documents have arrived. It therefore asks the Presenting Bank to “accept” the draft on behalf of the importer.
aval In a Documentary Collection transaction, the fact that a Presenting Bank is willing to sign the draft on behalf of the importer.
international forfeiting A means to finance an international transaction in which an exporter collects a series of drafts from the importer, all with fairly long-term due dates. The exporter sells these receivables to a forfeiting firm who buys them without recourse, which means that the forfeiting firm is responsible for collecting the funds from the importer.
bank guarantee A contract from a bank where the bank guarantees that an exporter will perform as required by its contract with the importer. If the exporter does not perform, the bank pays a compensation to the importer. Bank guarantees are illegal in the United States.
Term of trade An element in a contract of sale that specifies the responsibilities of the exporter.
Term of sale An element in a contract of sale that specifies the method of payment to which an exporter and an importer have agreed. Specifically, the Term of sale will specify Cash in Advance, Letter of Credit, Documentary Collection, Open Account, or TradeCard Transaction.
Currency The monetary unit used by a country.
hard currency A currency that can easily be converted into another currency.
Soft currency A currency that cannot be easily converted into another currency.
� Invertible currency A currency that cannot be converted into another currency.
� Direct quote The value of a foreign currency expressed in units of the domestic currency.
indirect quote The value of the domestic currency expressed in units of the foreign currency.
spot exchange rate The exchange rate of a foreign currency for immediate delivery (within forty-eight hours)
forward exchange rate The exchange rate of a foreign currency for delivery in 30,90,or,180 days from the date of the quote.
outright rate The exchange rate of a foreign currency for delivery in 30, 90, or, 180 days from the date of the quote. The outright rate is the rate at which a commercial customer would purchase the currency.
swap rate The exchange rate of a foreign currency for deliver in 30, 90, or 180 days from the date of the quote. The swap rate is the difference between the current spot rate and the rate at which a commercial customer would purchase the currency. It is expressed in points that must be subtracted or added to the spot rate.
points In a forward exchange rate, the difference between the outright rate and the swap rate. Points are not fixed units; their value depends on the way a currency is expressed, but is the smallest decimal value in which that currency is traded.
currency futures A method used to trade currencies; the value of a fixed quantity of foreign currency for delivery at fixed point in the future is determined by market forces.
currency options A method used to speculate on the value of a currency in the future .A firm can purchase options to buy (called call options)or options to sell (called put options)a particular currency at a particular price ,called the strike price, on a given date.
call options See currency options.
put options See currency options.
� strike price See currency options.
floating currency A currency whose value is determined by market forces. The exchange rate of a floating currency varies frequently.
� pegged currency A currency whose value is determined by a fixed exchanged rate with another (stronger) currency.
dollarization A phenomenon where other countries decide to adopt the U.S. dollar as their circulating currency .Panama and Ecuador have gone through a “dollarization” of their respective economies.
� currency block A group of currencies whose values fluctuate in parallel fashion .The currencies within the group have a fixed exchange rate, but their exchange rates with currencies outside of the group float.
artificial currency A currency that is not in circulation. After the euro was changed into a circulating currency on January 1,2002,the only artificial currency left was the Special Drawing Rights of the International Monetary Fund.
classification society A company that is responsible for determining the seaworthiness of a particular vessel .It places a ship in a specific ”class” as a function of its age, maintenance records, and the availability of on-board equipment.
� protection and Indemnity Club(P&I) A group of ship owners who agree to mutually share the costs of a member’s liabilities to other parties; for example, the club members would be individually responsible for the costs of a single member’s liability in the event of an oil spill.
� franchise The portion of a loss, expressed as a percentage, below which a “With Average” insurance policy will not cover a partial loss .If the amount of the partial loss exceeds the franchise, then the entire costs of the partial loss are covered.
name Under the Lloyd’s concept of an insurance market, an individual who is willing to assume a particular risk on his or her personal assets . Individual who are Names are called ”bespoke Names ” and have unlimited liability. Corporations can also be Names, but enjoy limited liability.
syndicate Under the Lloyd’s concept of an insurance market, a group of Names who agree to insure a certain type of loss .The risks are shared by all the members of the Syndicate.
� underwriter The company, Syndicate, or Name that assumes the risk of a loss for another party, in exchange for a premium.
Lakers: A cargo ship designed for the Great Lakes of the United States and Canada. Their maximum size is dictated by the size of the locks through which they will travel.
(
(open registry: A country that allows vessels owned by companies having no business registered in that country and carry its flag.
flags of convenience: A country with an open registry and that has lower taxes and more lenient on-board regulations than other countries with open registries. A derogatory term.
(secondary registries: A response by developed countries to the threat of open registries and flags of convenience: they created a secondary registry with lower on-board standards and taxes to entice ship owners to carry their flag and not defect to flag of convenience countries.
cabotage: An ocean trade consisting of shipping between Ports located in the same country.
conference: A group of shipping companies (carries) that operate vessels competing in the same trade lanes, and that have legally agreed to not compete on price and charge the same type of cargo and the same voyage.
tariffs: ( The price that conference members have agreed to charge for a specific commodity going from one specific port to another.(
Hague Rules An international liberty convert ion for ocean-going carriers that limits their liability to $500 per package. The liability convention followed by United States carriers.
Nautical fault An error in navigation made y the crew of a ship.
Hague-Visby Rules An international liability convention for ocean-going carriers that limits their liability to SDR 667 per package or SDR 2 per kilogram, whichever is higher. This liability convention is the most commonly used in the world; however, the United States has not ratified this convention and therefore still abides by the Hague Rules
� Container a large metal box used in international shipments that can be loaded directly onto a truck,a railroad car,or an ocean going vessel.the most common dimensions of containers are 8*8*20 feet and 8*8*40 feet
(duty The amount of tax paid on an imported good; the duty is calculated using the tariff rate and the value of the goods.
classification The process of determining what the correct Harmonized System Number is for an import.
valuation The process of determining the value of an import, or the amount upon which the duty will be calculated.
rules of origin The rules used to determine the country of origin of a particular product.
tariff The rate at which an import is taxed; the tariff rate is dependent on the classification of the goods, as well as their country of origin. The tariff rate is also called the duty rate(
(
(binding ruling A determination, made by the United States Customs, and only applicable to the United States, that classifies a specific product and assigns it a tariff rate, before the goods are imported
assist An item provided by the importer (customer) to the exporter (seller) so that the exporter can manufacture the goods: a mold or a die, for example. The value of an assist must be included in the valuation of the imported goods for U.S. Customs’ purposes.
( Tariff schedule a document listing all possible Harmonized System classification categories, as well as their associated tariff rates for the different types of countries. Most tariff schedules have two or more “columns,” a term that refers to the number of categories of countries of origin the tariff schedule uses.
( dumping The strategy followed by some exporters to sell the products they are exporting at a price that is considered “too low” by the importing country’s Customs Office.
(value added tax (VAT) A tax perceived by many countries that is very similar to a sales tax, but that is collected whenever the product’s value is increased. The Value Added Tax on imports is collected at the point of entry at the point of entry in the country.
( quota A limit, set by the importing country’s government on the quantity of a specific commodity that can be imported in a given year.
(export quota A limit, set by the exporting country’s government, on the quantity of a specific commodity that can be exported in a given year.
� entry The process by which an importer notifies Customs that it has imported a particular product.
� Customs clearance A notification by Customs that the importer is allowed to take physical possession of the goods, either because the duty has been paid or because Customs have a reasonable expectation that the duty will paid.
� liquidated entry An entry that has been successfully reviewed by Customs authorities and for which duty has been paid.
� protest In a customs transaction in the United States, the formal request by an importer to have Customs reconsider its classification, its valuation, or its determination of a country of otigin.
� informed compliance A standard of behavior, set and enforced by the United States Customs, that is expected of importers if they want their Customs entries to be cleared quickly and if they want to keep Customs inspections to a minimum.
� reasonable care A standard of behavior, set and enforced by the United States Customs, that is expected of importers if they want their Customs entries to be cleared quickly and if they want to keep Customs inspections to a minimum.
visa A document provided by the government of an exporting country for a product that is subject a quota in the United Stated. It is a document granting the exporter the “right” to export such goods.
1. American Heritage Dictionary,Th rd Edition.2000,Houghton—Mifflin Company,Boston,Massachusetts.
2. oxford English Dictionary,Second Edinon,online, http://www.oed.com.
3. VPerhovek,Sam Howe,“In the Northwest,a fight to deepen a ship channel,,"The New York Times, April I,2002.
4. Weiskott,Maria N.,"Megaships bring C0mplexex demands,’The Jo u rnal of Co m merce,April 21,1999,P.7C.
5. Damas,Philip,"Big ships.Big problems,"American.Shipper,August 200 1,PP.1 2—2 2. MongeUuzzo,Bill”With cranes,size is everythlng”,The Journal of Commerce,December 31,1996,P.1 B·
6. ongelluzzo, Bill, "With cranes, size is everything,"The lournal of Commerce., December 31, 1996, p.18
8 . Ports of the World, Fifteenth Edition, Cigna Insurance Corporation, available from Publisher, Ports of theWorld, Cigna lnsurance Companies, EO. Box 7716 Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
9 Journal of Commerce Staff, "Supercranes arrive atglobal terminal," The Journal of Commerce, November15, 1999, p. 15.
10 Machalaba, Daniel, "Maersk is ready to start on giantport; The Wall Street Journal, June 5, 2000, p. A4.
11 Porter, Janet, "Cagliari to woo Med box trades;' The Journal of Commerce, March 17, 1997, p. C1.
12 Mongelluzzo, Bill, "Extending terminal hours,' The Journal of Commerce, March 5, 1997, p. lB.
13 Machalaba, Daniel, "Treading water: U.S. Ports are losing the battle to keep up with overseas trade.
14Davies,John,“Slow passage to progress,"In ternaUonal Bsiness,December 1996-January 1 997,PP.14-17·
16, Davies,John,“Slow passage to progress,"Internatmnnl Business,December 1996一January 1997,pp.14一l7.
17Gibbs,Hope Katz,“Boxing South America,"ExportToday,June 1996,PP.50—69.
18Cook,Thomas A.,"Shipping considerations for PRCChina,"The Exporter,April 1996,P.30
19Mitchell,Jon,“Panama Canal'S traffic management systern to be transformed by computer revolution'’The lournaZ of Commerce,September 1 5,1 997,P.4B。
20Gri ths,Emma,“Panama Canal users confident as waterway enters a new era,"The lournalof Commerce, December 16,1999,P.4.
21Carl,Traci,“Panama wants a bigger canal for bigger ships,"TheCleveland Plain Dealer,March 31,2002, P.G5. 、
22“Panama Canal traffic--Fiscal years 1 999 through 2001’,'Panama Canal Authority,
http://www.pancanal.com/eng/maritime/reports/table0 1.pdf,April 4,2002.
23 Moore,Molly,“Is the Bosporus taking on more than it can handle?"The International Herald Tribune,November 17,2000,P.2.
24 Jehl,Douglas,"Journal:Trying to revive a canal that is out of the loop,"The New York Times,April 30,1997
25Carl,Traci,"Panama wants a bigger canal for bigger ships"'The Cleveland Plain Dealer,March 31,2002.P.G5
26Urquhart,John,"U.S.,Canada try to revive once-grand waterway,"The Wall Street Journal,March 12 1998.p.A14
27 Airwise:The Airport and Air Travei Guide,
http:www.airwise.comm/airports/index.html
28 Kristof,Nicholas D.,"Thanks to farnolers,airport grows like Bonsai,"The New York Times,June 10, 1999.
29 Kristof,Nicholas D.,"Thanks to farnolers,airport grows like Bonsai,"The New York Times,June 10, 1999.
30 Rapoport,Carla,"Seamless airport transfer sought, The Journal of Commerce,May 7,1998,p.1A
�Platt,Kevin,"Hong Kong,send to close—call landings,The Christian Science Monitor,March 5,I997,PP.10—11.
�Rapoport,Carla,"Seamless airport transfer sought, The Journal of Commerce,May 7,1998,p.1A 35.Rapoport,Carla,"Seamless airport transfer sought"The lournal of Commerce,May 7,1998,P.1A.
�Rapoport,Carla,"Seamless airport transfer sought"The lournal of Commerce,May 7,1998,P.1A
�Zhan,Sherrie E.,No kudos for Chek Lap Kok, World Trade,October 1998,P.32..
� Rapoport,Carla,"Seamless airport transfer sought, The Journal of Commerce,May 7,1998,p.1A
�Tower, Courtney, "The peace bridge? Hardly," JoC Week, August 28--September 3, 2000, p. 17
�
�Goering, Laurie, "A city, hung up by too many hang-ups," The Chicago Tribune, March 4, 1998.
�Carding,Tony,“Trans—European transport network to link ports in Marseille and Antwerp with hinterlands,Traffic World,Aprill 7,1998.
�Bamard,Bruce,"France vetoes plan for rail freeway Soutlined by the E.U,'"The Journal of Commerce,JUne4,1997,P.3B.
�Andersson, Martha, "Ancient nordic rivals link up in bridge project;' 7he Christian Science Monitor, April10, 1997, p. 7.
� Associated Press, Asian railwaychugging to reality;'The New York Times, October 20, 1997.
� U.S. and Foreign Commercial Service: CountryCommercial Guides.http://www.stat-usa.gov/mrd.nsf/vwCCG_Country, April 5, 2002.
�WorldFactbook, Central Intelligence Agency.
http://www, cia. gov/cia/public a tio ns/factbook/index.html, April 5, 2002.
� World Factbook, Central Intelligence Agency'.
http://www.cia.gov/cia/publications/factbook/index.html, April 5, 2002.
�Feller, Gordon, "For truckers, Polish roads are a deep,dark pothole on route linking EU and Russia" TrafficWorld September 8, 1998.
�Conley, John, "Chinese puzzle,' International Business,uly/August 1996, pp. 16-20.
�Zubrzycki,John,"In city of joy, foot-power loses pull with tie.haw ban,The Christian Science Monitor,December 11,1996,p.1.
� Conley, John, "Chinese puzzle,' International Business,uly/August 1996, pp. 16-20.
�Dillon,Sam,"Can't find Juarez Street? There are hundreds!"The New York "limes, January 12, 2000.
�Aalund, Dagmar,"Bridge soon will link futures of Danes, Swedes," 'The Wall Street Journal, May 25, 2000,p. A20.
�Andersson, Martha, "Ancient nordic rivals link up in bridge project;' 7he Christian Science Monitor, April10, 1997, p. 7.
�Tower, Courtney, "The peace bridge? Hardly," JoC Week, August 28--September 3, 2000, p. 17.
�Osmond, Warren, "Bridge collapse rips a tiny, new Pacific nation," The Christian Science Monitor, January 13, 1997, p. 6.
�De Santis, Solange, "A long ferry tale ends, to the dis-may of some Canadians," The Wall Street Journal, February 14, 1997, p. A 1.
�Ports of the WorM, Fifteenth Edition, Cigna InsuranceCorporation, available from Publisher, Ports of theWor/d, Cigna Insurance Companies, EO. Box 7716,Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19192, USA.
�Ddlios, Hugh, "A first-class headache," The Chicago Tribune; luly 10, 1997.
�Ewing, Terzah, "Williams Cos. seeks to extend its information pipeline, The Wall Street Journal,November 21, 1997, p. B4.
�RansdeU, Eric, "Rolling out the future, U.S.News and World Report, August 12, 1996, pp.
�Phillips, Michael M., "On Ghana's Tech frontier," The Wall Street Journal, May 22, 2002, p. B 1.
�Goering, Laurie, "A city, hung up by too many hang-ups," The Chicago Tribune, March 4, 1998.
�Thomas, Eapen, "India behind the hype," Bus/heSSWeek, February 20, 1995, pp. 66----68.
�Naik, Gautam,"Braving sharks, waves, to lay" phone-lines,"The Wall Street Journal,September 12,1997,p,B1
�Robinson, Sara,"Cat in fiber cable disrupts Internet traffic nationnwide,"The New York Times,September 29,1999.
�Stephenson, Neal, "Mother Earth, mother board,'Wired, December 1996, pp. 97-160.
�Cooper, Kenneth J,"Coal vs.goals: India's dilemma"The Washington Post, October 16, 1997, p.A21.
�Rao, N. Vasuki,"Infrastructure bottlenecks are taking their toll on india's future growth," The Journal of Commerce, March 19, 1997, p. 23C.
�Jensen, Paul, "China in lights," Export Today, April 1997, pp. 56-60.
�Pearl, Daniel, "Saudis, of all people, find indugry hob-bled by a lag in electricity. The Wall Street Journal, August 8,1996,p.A1.
�Rao, N. Vasuki,"Infrastructure bottlenecks are taking their toll on india's future growth," The Journal of Commerce, March 19, 1997, p. 23C.
� Thomas, Eapen, "India behind the hype," Bus/heSSWeek, February 20, 1995, pp. 66----68.
�Jensen, Paul, "China in lights," Export Today, April 1997, pp. 56-60.
� Jensen, Paul, "China in lights," Export Today, April 1997, pp. 56-60.
�Rao, N. Vasuki,"Infrastructure bottlenecks are taking their toll on india's future growth," The Journal of Commerce, March 19, 1997, p. 23C.
�Useem, Jerry, "Exxon's African adventure,' Fortune,April 15, 2002, pp. 102-114.
�Gottschalk, Arthur, "Pipeline deal nears completion,"The Journal of Commerce, February 19, 1997, p. IA.
�2002 World Development Indicators database, World Bank, www.worldbank.org, April 20, 2002.
�2002 World Development Indicators database, World Bank, www.worldbank.org, April 20, 2002.
�Lelyveld, Michael S., "Iran, Turkey ready to build gas pipeline" The ]ournal of Commerce, March 6, 1997, p. 1A.
�Useem, Jerry, "Exxon's African adventure,' Fortune,April 15, 2002, pp. 102-114.
�Gottschalk, Arthur, "Pipeline deal nears completion,"The Journal of Commerce, February 19, 1997, p. IA.
1